Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Amarakosha Search
Results for tis
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
āranālaḥ2.9.38NeuterSingularabhiṣutam, avantisomam, dhānyāmlam, kuñjalam, sauvīram, kāñjikam, kulmāṣam
asuraḥ1.1.12MasculineSingularditisutaḥ, indrāriḥ, daityaḥ, suradviṣ, śukraśiṣyaḥ, danujaḥ, pūrvadevaḥ, dānavaḥ, daiteyaḥgiant
durodaraḥ3.3.179NeuterSingularcamūjaghanam, hastasūtram, pratisaraḥ
pādātam2.8.68NeuterSingularpa‍ttisaṃhatiḥ
pragāḍham3.3.50NeuterSingularatisūkṣmam, dhānyaṃśam
rajatam3.3.86MasculineSingularyuktaḥ, atisaṃskṛtaḥ, marṣī
tisāraḥ2.6.60MasculineSingularatisārakaḥ
tindukaḥ2.4.38MasculineSingularkālaskandhaḥ, śitisārakaḥ, sphūrjakaḥ
ucchritaḥ3.3.91MasculineSingularsambaddhārthaḥ, hitam, śaktisthaḥ
vilambhaḥ2.4.28MasculineSingularatisarjanam
tisāraḥ2.6.60MasculineSingularatisārakaḥ
pratisīrā2.6.121FeminineSingularjavanikā, tiraskariṇī
pratisaraḥ3.3.182MasculineSingular
Monier-Williams Search
Results for tis
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
tisf. plural of tr/i- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' See priya--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisf. Andropogon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisraskāramind. so as to change into 3 (ṛc- verses) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisṛdhanvan. a bow with 3 arrows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisṛkāf. Name of a village Va1rtt. 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyatisṛj(1. plural -/ati-sṛjāmas-) to let pass
ādityajyotis(ādity/a--) mfn. having the light of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agnijyotismfn. flaming, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amatismfn. poor, indigent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmātisāram. dysentery or diarrhoea produced by vitiated mucus in the abdomen (the excretion being mixed with hard and fetid matter) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmātisārinmfn. afflicted with the above disease. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anatisṛṣṭamfn. not allowed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarjyotis(ant/ar--) mfn. having the soul enlightened, illuminated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antisumna(/anti--) mfn. at hand with kindness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anubhūtisvarūpācāryam. Name of the author of the grammar sārasvatī-prakriyā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anutpattisamamf(ā-) (in nyāya- philosophy) arguing against a thing by trying to show that nothing exists from which it could spring. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anvatisicto pour out over or along View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyatojyotismfn. having light or a jyotis- day only on one side, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratisādhyamfn. incurable, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratisaṃkhyāf. "not observing", in compound with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratisaṃkhyāinconsiderateness, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratisaṃkhyānirodham. the unobserved annihilation of an object View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratisaṃkramamfn. having no intermixture. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratistabdhamfn. unrestrained (see a-pratiṣṭabdha-above.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
argalāstutistotran. a hymn introductory to the devīmāhātmya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arthāpattisamafn. an inference by which the quality of any object is attributed to another object because of their sharing some other quality in common View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aruṇajyotism. Name of śiva-: View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisādhvasan. excessive fear. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaktif. excessive attachment. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaktimatmfn. excessively attached. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisamarthamfn. very competent. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃcayam. excessive accumulation. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃdhāto overreach, deceive ; to wrong or injure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃdhānan. overreaching, cheating. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃdheyamfn. easy to be settled or conciliated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃdheyamfn. easy to be conciliated, easy to be settled. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisamīpamfn. very near. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisamparkam. excessive (sexual) intercourse. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃskṛtamfn. highly finished. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaṃtaptamfn. greatly afflicted. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāṃvatsaramfn. extending over more than a year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāmyāf. the sweet juice of the Bengal Madder, Rubia Manjith. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisandhamind. so as to violate an agreement or any fixed order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisandhitamfn. overreached, cheated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāntapanan. a kind of severe penance (inflicted especially for eating unclean animal food). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaram. effort, exertion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāra m. purging, dysentery. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāratransgression (in - ti-- s-), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisārakin mfn. afflicted with purging or dysentery. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarasvatīf. a particular personification, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisargam. act of parting with, dismissal, giving away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisargam. granting permission, leave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisargam. atisarg/am- 1. d/a-, to bid any one farewell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisargaremnant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātisārikamf(ī-)n. like diarrhoea, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisārin mfn. afflicted with purging or dysentery. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisārinmfn. afflicted with purging or dysentery. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarjanan. the act of giving away, granting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarjanan. liberality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarjanan. a gift View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarjanan. sending out of the world, killing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarvamfn. too complete View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarvamfn. superior to all See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarvamfn. superior to all View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisarvam. the Supreme. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisauhityan. excessive satiety exempli gratia, 'for example' being spoiled, stuffed with food, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisauparṇamfn. superior to (the powers of) suparṇa- or garuḍa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaurabhamfn. very fragrant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisaurabhan. extraordinary fragrance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisāyamind. very late in the evening. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisenam. Name of a prince. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisevto use or enjoy immoderately, to practise excessively ; see ati-sevā- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order ati-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisevāf. excessive addiction (to a habit). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisiddhif. great perfection. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisitāṅgavihaṃgam. a swan, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisnigdhamfn. very smooth, very nice, very affectionate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisparśam. too marked contact (of the tongue and palate) in pronunciation. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisphiramfn. very tremulous. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisCaus. to cause to pass through: Passive voice -sāryate- ; to be purged View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisraṃsto drop or turn away from, to escape View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisrāvitamfn. caused to flow excessively (as a wound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛjto glide over or along ; to send away dismiss, abandon ; to leave as a remnant, to remit, forgive ; to give away, present, to create in a higher degree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛjyamfn. to be dismissed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛjyamfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛpto glide or creep over, get over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛṣṭi(/ati--) f. an extraordinary or excellent creation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisṛṣṭif. a higher creation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisruto flow over or flow excessively. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisrutamfn. that which has been flowing over (Name of soma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisthiramfn. very stable. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisthūlamfn. (/ati-.) excessively big or clumsy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisthūlamfn. excessively stupid. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atistrimf(is-,or ī-)n. surpassing a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atistrimf(is-,or ī-)n. See Gram. 123. b-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atistutif. excessive praise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisuhitamfn. excessively kind, over-kind. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisuhitamfn. perfectly satiated, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisujanamfn. very moral, very friendly. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisulabhamfn. very easily obtainable. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisundaramfn. very handsome View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisundaramf. a metre belonging to the class aṣṭi- (also called citra-or cañcalā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisvapnam. excessive sleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisvapnan. excessive tendency to dreaming. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisvāryamfn. the last of the seven notes
atisvasthamfn. enjoying excellent health. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātisvāyanamfn. (fr. ati-svan-), (gaRa pakṣādi-, q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisvinnamfn. caused to perspire abundantly, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atisvṛto hold or sustain a note View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmajyotisn. the light of the soul or supreme spirit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmajyotismfn. receiving light from one's self View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avantisenam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avantisomam. sour gruel (prepared from the fermentation of, rice-water) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avantisvāminm. Name of a sanctuary built by avantivarman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahiṣṭājjyotisn. Name of a triṣṭubh- the last pāda- of which contains 8 syllables View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
barhirjyotism. fire or the god of fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhagavadbhaktisādhanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhagavadbhaktisārasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhagavadbhaktistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisāgaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisāmānyanirūpaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisaṃdarbham. (and bhaktisaṃdarbhapadyāvalī bha-padyāvalī- f.) Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisaṃdarbhapadyāvalīf. bhaktisaṃdarbha
bhaktisaṃnyāsanirṇayavivaraṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisaṃvardhanaśatakan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisāram. (and bhaktisārasaṃgraha ra-saṃgraha-,m.) Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisārasaṃgraham. bhaktisāra
bhaktisiddhāntam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisudhodayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktisūtran. Name of work () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhavapratisaṃdhim. entering into existence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhuktisaptaśatīf. Name of a poem. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūpatistutif. Name of a hymn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtajyotism. "light of living beings", Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtisita() mfn. white with ashes (said of śiva-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtisṛjmfn. creating welfare View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bodhisattvabuddhānusmṛtisamādhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmajyotisn. the splendour of brahma- or of the Supreme Being (also written brahma-jy-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmajyotismfn. having the splendour of brahmā- (Scholiast or Commentator"of the presiding priest") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmajyotism. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmaṇaspatisūktan. brahmaṇaspati
brāhmīśāntisaṃkalpam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhacchāntistava(hac+śā-) m. the larger śānti-stava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhajjyotismfn. (h/aj--) bright-shining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhajjyotism. Name of a grandson of brahmā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisamamfn. equal to bṛhaspati-, like bṛhaspati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisaṃhitāf. Name of two works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisavam. Name of a festival lasting one day (said to confer the rank, of a purohita- on those observing it) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisavahautraprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisavakḷptif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisavaprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisiddhāntam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatismṛtif. bṛhaspati-'s law-book. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatistomam. Name of an ekāha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisuratāf. a proper N. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisuta(b/ṛhas-p/ati--) mfn. pressed out (as soma- juice) by bṛhas-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaspatisutran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturaśītisāhasramfn. numbering 84000 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturthamandrātisvāryamfn. "to be lengthened in a particular way", said of a kind of recitation of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturviṃśatisāhasramf(ī-)n. consisting of 24000 (G) i, 4, 147 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturviṃśatismṛtif. equals -mata- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cintisurāṣṭram. plural the cinti-s and the inhabitants of su-rāṣṭra- gaRa kārta-kaujapādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇājyotis(d/akṣ-) mfn. brilliant by the sacrificial gift View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇāmūrtisaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇāmūrtistava m. 10 verses ascribed to śaṃkara- (explained by viśva-rūpa- or sureśvara- in a commentary with gloss by rāma-tīrtha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇāmūrtistotran. 10 verses ascribed to śaṃkara- (explained by viśva-rūpa- or sureśvara- in a commentary with gloss by rāma-tīrtha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantisthamfn. seated on an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśajyotism. Name of a son of su-bhrāj- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhṛtisiṃham. (varia lectio ta-s-) Name of an author (said to have assisted puruṣottama- in composing the hārāvalī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinajyotisn. daylight, sunshine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditisutam. idem or 'm. equals -ja- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditisutagurum. the planet Venus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvijātisātind. for or to Brahmans View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyotisn. light, brightness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyotisn. a star View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekajyotisn. "the only light", Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekākṣaragaṇapatistotran. a hymn in honour of gaṇeśa- (a portion of the rudrayāmala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇapatistavarājam. Name of a hymn in praise of gaṇeśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇapatistotran. prayers addressed to gaṇeśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisūtran. a sūtra- composed in the gīti- metre (on ) Introd. 43. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haribhaktisamāgamam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haribhaktisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haribhaktisudhārasam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haribhaktisudhodayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastisenam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastisnānan. the washing of an elephants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastisomāf. Name of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastisūtran. a sūtra-. treating of elephants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himajyotismfn. cold-rayed (as the moon) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hiraṇyajyotisn. splendour of golden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hiraṇyajyotismfn. having golden splendour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāṃkaryan. Name (also title or epithet) of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisampannamfn. belonging to a noble family View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāran. idem or 'n. Name (also title or epithet) of work ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisasyan. equals -kośa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismaramf(ā-)n. recollecting a former existence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismaran. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismarahradam. Name of a pond View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismaraṇan. equals ra-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismaratāf. recollection of a former existence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tismaratvan. idem or 'f. recollection of a former existence ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisvabhāvam. specific or generic character or nature, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. light (of the sun, dawn, fire, lightning, etc.;also plural), brightness (of the sky) etc. (tr/īṇi jy/otīṃṣi-,light appearing in the 3 worlds, viz. on earth, in the intermediate region, and in the sky or heaven [the last being called uttam/a- ;or /uttara-, ;or tṛt/īya- ] ;also personified as"fire"on earth,"ether or air"in the intermediate region, and"sun"in the sky ;"fire, sun and moon") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. fire, flash of lightning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. moonlight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. (plural) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. eye-light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. the eye View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. dual number sun and moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. plural the heavenly bodies, planets and stars etc. (tiṣām ayana- n. course or movements of the heavenly bodies, science of those movements ([ equals tiṣa-]) ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. sg. the light of heaven, celestial world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. light as the divine principle of life or source of intelligence, intelligence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. (pauruṣaj-"human intelligence") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. (para jyotis-,"highest light or truth") and View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. light as the type of freedom or bliss or victory (confer, compare , and Latin lux) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. Name of several ekāha-s etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. of certain formularies containing the word jyotis- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. a metre of 32 short and 16 long syllables View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. equals tiṣa-, science of the movements of the heavenly bodies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotisn. a mystical N. for the letter r- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. Trigonella foenum graecum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. Name of a marut- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. of a son of manu- svārociṣa-, 429 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. of a prajā-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotism. see d/akṣiṇā--, śukr/a--, sa--, h/iraṇya--, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotissātkṛ equals tiṣ-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotistattvan. equals tiṣa-t- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kārtisiṃhadevam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
katisaṃkhyamfn. how many in number? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khajyotism. a shining flying insect, fire-fly etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khaṇḍasphuṭapratisaṃskaraṇan. repairing of dilapidations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khaṇḍasphuṭapratisaṃskaraṇan. (pāli- ṇḍa-phulla--.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiṃjyotis(k/iṃ--) mfn. having which light? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtisāram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtisenam. Name of a nephew of the serpent-king vāsuki- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtisiṃhadevam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtisomam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtistambham. a column of fame View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtisādhyatvan. the state of being accomplished by exertion. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitispṛśm. an inhabitant of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitisuram. equals -deva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitisutam. (equals -ja-) the planet Mars View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitisutam. Name of the demon naraka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntisurāṣṭram. plural the kunti-s and the inhabitants of surāṣṭra- gaRa kārtakaujapādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyejyotisf. a kind of Vedic metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāgaṇapatisahasranāmastotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāgaṇapatistavarājam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāgaṇapatistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahājyotism. "having great splendour", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maṅgalapratisaram. equals -sūtra-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maṅgalapratisaram. the cord of an amulet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manojyotis(m/ano--) mfn. one whose light is the intellect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantrajyotisn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matisacivam. a wise counsellor, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghajyotisn. "drink-light", lightning, a flash of lightning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛtisādhanamfn. causing death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muhūrtakalpadrumīyasaṃkrāntisaṃjñākusuman. muhūrtakalpadruma
muktisaptaśatīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktisenam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktisopānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrdhajyotisn. equals brahma-randhra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrtisaṃcaramfn. going about with a body, embodied, incarnate, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrtisaṃcāramfn. equals -dhara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrtisanāthamfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') possessing an idol of. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrtisevanan. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') worship of the idol of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naṣṭāptisūtran. "line or series of lost property", booty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisamañjasamf(ā-or ī-)n. not quite right or proper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāndramfn. not too tough View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisvalpamfn. not too short View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisvasthamfn. not very well View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niratisayatvan. niratiśaya
nirjyotismfn. lightless, dark View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirvṛtisthānan. place of eternal bliss (wrong reading nir-vṛtti-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣpatisutāf. having no husband and no sons View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisaṃdhim. essence of all policy (Bombay edition) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisaṃkalanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisamuccayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāramn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisārasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisumāvalif. (!) Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisumāvalif. Name (also title or epithet) of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padajyotisn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paddhatisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paktisthānan. place of digestion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcagatisamatikrāntam. "having passed through the 5 forms of existence", Name of gautama- buddha- (some reckon 6 formsSee ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcaviṃśatisāhasrikāf. Name of a prajñāpāramitā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paramārthasaṃvṛtisatyanirdeśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāśarasmṛtisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
patisahagamananiṣedhanirāsaprakāśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
patisevāf. devotion to a husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattisainyan. () a body or troop of infantry. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattisaṃhatif. () a body or troop of infantry. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitāsumatisaṃvādam. Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajāpatismṛtif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajāpatisṛṣṭa(j/ā-p-) mfn. created by prajā-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisampannamfn. endowed with a noble nature
prakṛtisiddhamfn. effected by nature, natural View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisiddhan. true or real nature View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisthamfn. being in the original or natural state, genuine, unaltered, unimpaired, normal, well, healthy (also -sthita- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisthamfn. inherent, innate, incidental to nature View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisthamfn. bare, stripped of everything View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisthadarśanamfn. one who has recovered the faculty of sight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisthitamfn. See -stha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtisubhagamfn. naturally pleasant or agreeable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtivikṛtisvabhāvam. the relation of (a word in its) radical form to (itself under the) mutations (of inflection etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pralayasthitisargam. plural destruction, preservation and creation (of the world). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāptisamam. a particular jāti- (q.v) in logic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśamaratisūsran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisacA1. -sacate-, to pursue with vengeance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisadP. -sīdati- () , to start back, abhor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisadanamind. every one to his dwelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisadmaind. at or in every house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisadṛkṣa (pr/ati--) mfn. similar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisadṛś(pr/ati--) mfn. similar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisahA1. -sahate-, to be a match for, overcome (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamamfn. equal to, a match for View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāmamfn. (prob.) unkind, unfriendly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādhāP. -dadhāti-, to put back again, replace, re-arrange, restore ; to redress, correct (an error) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādhānan. collecting one's self again, composure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādhānan. cure, remedy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādiśP. -diśati-, to answer, reply ; to order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādiṣṭamfn. bidden, directed, ordered, commanded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāhitamfn. fitted to the bowstring (as an arrow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāmantam. "a hostile neighbour", enemy, adversary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamantam(pr/ati--) ind. on every side, everywhere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāpanan. ( āp-) the going against, attacking (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāmarthyan. relative suitableness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamasP. -asyati- (ind.p. -āsam-), to put back again to its place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāsA1. -āste-, to be a match for, cope with, resist (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāsanan. the being a match for, with standing, resisting (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāsitamfn. equalled, opposed, fought View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāśritamfn. ( śri-) depending on (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamayyaind. having arranged (prob. wrong reading for -śamayya-;See prati-śam-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisambandhiind. according to the respective connection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisambhūP. -bhavati-, to apply or give one's self to (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisambuddhamfn. ( budh-) restored to consciousness. recovered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃcarP. -carati-, to meet, come together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃcaram. going or moving backwards (a-pr-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃcaram. re-absorption or resolution (back again into prakṛti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃcaram. that into which anything is re-absorbed or resolved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃcaram. a place of resort, haunt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdeśam. a message in return, answer to a message View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdeṣṭavyamfn. (an answer) to be given in reply to a message View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhāP. A1. -dadhāti-, -dhatte-, (P.) to put together again, re-arrange ; (A1.) to put on, adjust (an arrow) ; (A.) to return, reply ; (P. A1.) to remember, recollect ; (A1.) to comprehend, understand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. putting together again, joining together etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. a juncture, the period of transition between two ages View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. memory, recollection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. praise, panegyric View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. self-command, suppression of feeling for a time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhānan. a remedy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāṃdhānikam. (fr. saṃdhāna-) a bard, panegyrist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhātṛm. one who recollects or remembers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdheyamfn. to be opposed (apr-,"irresistible") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhim. reunion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhim. re-entry into (compound) or into the womb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhim. re-birth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhim. the period of transition between two ages View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhim. resistance, adverseness (of fate) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhijñānan. recognition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdhitamfn. (see saṃdhaya-) fastened, strengthened, confirmed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdiśP. -diśati-, to give a person (accusative or haste with genitive case) a message or commission in return ; to send back a message to (genitive case) ; to order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃgrahP. A1. -grihṇāti-, ṇīte-, to receive, accept ; to meet with, find
pratisaṃhāram. drawing in, withdrawing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhāram. giving up, resigning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhāram. keeping away, abstention from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhāram. compression, diminution View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhāram. comprehension View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃharaṇīyan. (sc. karman-) a particular punishment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhitaSee column 2. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhitamfn. aimed at, directed against View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛP. A1. -harati-, te-, to draw together, contract (with ātmānam-,"one's self" id est to shrink, return to its usual bed, said of the sea) ; to draw or keep back, withdraw (as a weapon, the eye etc.) ; to take away, put off ; to absorb, annihilate, destroy ; to check, stop, repress etc. ; to change : Causal -hārayati-, to retract View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛṣP. -harṣati-, to rejoice again, be glad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛṣṭamfn. glad, merry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛtamfn. kept back, checked, restrained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛtamfn. comprehended, included View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃhṛtamfn. compressed, reduced in bulk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamīkṣA1. -īkṣate-, to hold out, persevere (Scholiast or Commentator equals jīv-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamīkṣaṇan. looking at again, returning a glance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamindhA1. -inddhe-, to kindle again, rekindle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃjātamfn. ( jan-) born, sprung up, arisen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃjihīrṣumfn. (fr. Desiderative) wishing to withdraw or to be freed from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃjñāA1. -jānīte-, to be kindly disposed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkāśam. ( kāś-) a similar appearance, resemblance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkhyā(only ind.p. khyāya-), to count or reckon up, number View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkhyāf. consciousness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkhyānan. the tranquil consideration of a matter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkhyānirodham. (with ) the conscious annihilation of an object (?) (see a-prati-nirodha-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkramA1. -kramate-, to go back again, come to an end : Causal -krāmayati-, to cause to go back or return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkramam. re-absorption, dissolution (m. Calcutta edition also krāma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkramāf. impression View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkruddhamfn. ( krudh-) angry with, wroth against (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃkucitamfn. closed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃlayanan. ( -) retirement into a lonely place, privacy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃlayanan. complete absorption View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃlīnamfn. retired, in privacy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃlīnamfn. complete retirement for the sake of meditation
pratisammodanan. greeting, salutation (alsof(ā-).) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisammodanakathāf. friendly address as a salutation
pratisammudCaus. -modayati-, to give friendly greeting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃrabdhamfn. (plural) holding one another by the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃrabdhamfn. excited, furious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃrabhA1. -rabhate-, to seize, take hold of (Bombay edition -saṃ-carate-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃruddhamfn. ( rudh-) contracted into itself shrunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃsargam. equals pratisarga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃskāram. restoration (raṃ-kṛ-,to restore) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃskāraṇāf. idem or 'm. restoration (raṃ-kṛ-,to restore) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃskṛtamfn. joined or united with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃsṛṣṭamfn. mingled with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsaṃsṛṣṭabhaktamfn. one who is temperate in eating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃskāramind. at every ceremony. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃskṛ( skṛ- equals kṛ-;only Potential -kuryāt-), to repair, restore View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsmṛP. -smarati-, to remember View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃśriP. -śrayati-, to seek refuge or protection in reply View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsṛjP. -sṛjati-, to mingle with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃśru(only ind.p. -śrutya-), to Promise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃstambh(only ind.p. -stabhya-), to strengthen, encourage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃstaran. ( stṛ-) friendly reception View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃsthānan. ( sthā-) settling in, entering into (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvadA1. -vadate-, to agree with any one (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvādin(?), m. an adversary (probably for prati-- vādin-), . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvatsaramind. at every year, yearly commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvedakamfn. giving detailed information View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvedanan. experiment, enjoyment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvedinmfn. feeling, experiencing, being conscious of anything View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃveṣṭA1. -veṣṭate-, to shrivel, shrink up, contract View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvid Causal -vedayati-, to recognize (?) (A1. parasmE-pada -vedayamāna-,feeling ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvidf. analytical science (4 with Buddhists) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvidhānan. (1. dhā-) a counter action, stroke in return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvinniścayāvatārāf. Name of a particular dhāraṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvitprāptam. Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyatA1. -yatate-, to fight against View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyātamfn. ( -) going against, assailing (with accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyattamfn. completely prepared or armed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyoddhṛm. an adversary in war View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyoddhṛm. an adversary in war View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyudh(only perfect tense -yuyudhuḥ-), to resist an attack together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃyuktamfn. ( yuj-) bound or attached to something else (Bombay edition) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṅgakṣikāf. a cloak to keep off the dust (worn by Buddhist mendicants) (prob. wrong reading for -saṃkakṣikā-).
pratisaṅginmfn. ( sañj-) cleaving or clinging to, adhering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṅginmfn. (a-pr-) not meeting with any obstacle, irresistible View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) a cord or ribbon used as an amulet worn round the neck or wrist at nuptials etc. etc. etc. (alsof(ā-).[ ];and n.[ gaRa ardharcādi-]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. a bracelet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. a line returning into itself. circle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. assailing, an attack (a-pr-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. a wreath, garland View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. a follower, servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. the rear of an army View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. dressing or anointing a wound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaram. day-break View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisarabandham. a particular nuptial ceremony View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisarabandham. plural Name of particular magical verses or formulas protecting from demons View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisarabandham. n. a watch, guard View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisarabandhāf. (see above) a female servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisarabandhāf. (with ) one of the 5 protectors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaraṇamfn. leaning or resting upon (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'; pratisaraṇatā -- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaraṇan. streaming back (of rivers) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaraṇan. leaning or resting on (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāraṇan. (fr. Causal) dressing and anointing the edges of a wound (or an instrument for doing so) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāraṇan. Name of a particular process to which minerals (especially quicksilver) are subjected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaraṇatāf. pratisaraṇa
pratisāraṇīyamfn. to be dressed or anointed (as a wound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāraṇīyamfn. to be applied for dressing a wound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisargaSee under prati-sṛj-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisargam. secondary or continued creation out of primitive matter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisargam. dissolution, destruction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisargam. the portion of a purāṇa- which treats of the destruction and renovation of the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisargamind. in every creation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisārinmfn. going round or from one to the other View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāritamfn. (fr. Causal) repelled, removed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāritamfn. dressed (as a wound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaryamfn. present in an amulet or at an incantation ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisatkṛtamfn. honoured in return, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātisatvanamind. in the direction of the satvan- (sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) (-sutvan/am- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisavyamfn. in inverted order, inverted, reverse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāyamind. towards evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisenāf. an opposing or hostile army View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisevA1. -sevate-, to pursue, follow (pleasure) ; to be kind towards (accusative), serve, honour (equals prati-juṣ-) on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātisīmam. (fr. -sīman-) a neighbour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisiṃham. a hostile lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisīrāf. a curtain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisīrāf. a screen or wall of cloth, an outer tent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskandham. every shoulder (instrumental case"each on his shoulder") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskandham. Name of an attendant of skanda- (varia lectio kapi-sk-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskandhamind. upon the shoulders View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskandhamm. in every section of a book View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskhalitamfn. ( skhal-) warded off (equals prati-ṣkuta- ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskīrṇan. the being hurt or injured (see prati-kṝ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiskṝP. -kirati- (perfect tense -caskare-), to hurt, injure, to tear to pieces View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratismṛP. A1. -smarati-, te-, to remember, recollect (accusative) : Causal -smārayati-, to remind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratismṛtif. "recollection", Name of a particular kind of magic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisnātamfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisnātamfn. ( snā-) bathed, washed (see prati-ṣṇāta-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisneham. (prob.) wrong reading for pati-s- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisomāf. a kind of plant (equals mahiṣa-vallī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisomodakadvijamind. against the moon or water or a Brahman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispandanan. ( spand-) throbbing, vibration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispardhA1. -spardhate-, to emulate, compete, rival View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispardhāf. emulation, rivalry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispardhinmfn. emulous, coping with (genitive case), a rival View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispardhinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') resembling, like View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispaśa () mfn. ( spaś-) spying, watching, lying in wait. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratispāśana() mfn. ( spaś-) spying, watching, lying in wait. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisphurP. -sphurati-, to push away, remove View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisP. -sarati- (ind.p. -sāram- ), to go against, rush upon, attack, assail (accusative) ; to return, go home ; to go round or from place to place (not only on the main road) : Causal -sārayati-, to cause to go back ; to put back again, restore to its place ; to spread over, tip or touch with (instrumental case) ; to put asunder, sever, separate : Passive voice to void or emit per anum (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisṛjP. -sṛjati-, to hurl or utter in reply (a curse) ; to send away, despatch (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisrotamf(ā-)n. equals next (mandākinīm pratisrotām anuvraja-,go up the anda1kini1 id est up or against the stream) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisrotamind. () against the stream, up the stream View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisrotamind. (wrong reading śrotas-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisrotasind. ( ) against the stream, up the stream View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisrotasind. (wrong reading śrotas-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisṛpP. -sarpati-, to creep back ; to creep into, enter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisṛṣṭamfn. (varia lectio śiṣṭa-,only ) despatched, despised, celebrated, given. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisṛtamfn. met, encountered, pushed back, removed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratistabdhamfn. leaned against, pressed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratistabdhamfn. stopped, checked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratistabdhamfn. obstructed, constipated (see prati-ṣṭabdha-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratistambhP. A1. -stabhnāti-, -sṭabhate-, to lean or press (A1."one's self") against View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisthānamind. in every place, everywhere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratistrīmfn. lying on a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisundarīf. equals -yuvati- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisuptamfn. ( svap-) fallen asleep, sleeping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūrya(or yaka-) m. a mock sun, parhelion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūrya(or yaka-) m.a kind of lizard, a chameleon (which lies or basks in the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūryamind. opposite to the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūryamatsyam. a particular appearance in the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūryamatsyam. (according to to commentator or commentary) a mock sun and a comet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisūryaśayānakam. "lying or basking in the sun", a kind of lizard, a chameleon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisvāhākāramind. at every exclamation svāhā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisvamind. "each for itself."one by one, singly commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisvanP. -svanati-, to resound : Causal -svānayati-, to make resound
pratisvanam. (also plural) echo, reverberation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisvaram. ( svar-) a rever berated sound, echo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisvaram. a focus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātisvikamf(ī-)n. (fr. -sva-) own, not common to others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātisvikamf(ī-)n. granting to every one his own due View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyagjyotisn. the inward light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
premabhaktistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prītisambodhyaṅgan. (with Buddhists) joyfulness (one of the 7 requisites for attaining supreme knowledge) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prītisaṃdarbham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prītisaṃgatif. a covenant of friendship, friendly alliance with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prītisaṃyogam. relation of friendship View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prītisnigdhamfn. moist through love or charming through affection (said of the eyes) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purajyotisn. Name of the region or the world of agni- (wrong reading for puro-j-?) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purastājjyotis(RPrst.) n. Name of a metre. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purojyotismfn. preceded by light or radiance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvapadaprakṛtisvaramfn. having the original accent of the first member of a compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktātisāra m. flow of blood, dysentery, bloody flux View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisahacaram. " rati-'s consort", Name of kāma-deva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisaṃgrahavyākhyāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisaṃhitamfn. accompanied with love, abounding in affection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisaṃyogam. sexual union View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisāram. or n. Name of work
ratisarvasvan. the whole essence of love View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisatvarāf. Trigonella Corniculata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisenam. Name of a king of the cola-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisenam. of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratisundaram. a kind of coitus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadācārastutistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaḍviṃśatisūtran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasrajyotism. Name of a son of su-bhrāj- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sajyotismfn. having the same or a common light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sajyotisind. according to the light (id est either by day from the disappearance of the stars till sunset, or by night from sunset till the appearance of the stars) (tiṣi- idem or 'mfn. having the same or a common light ' ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sajyotisind. as long as the sun is in the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakalajyotism. a kind of venomless snake View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sakalaśāntisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakanṛpatisaṃvatsaram. a year of the śaka- era View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisaṃgamāmṛtan. Name of Tantric work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisaṃgamatantran. Name of Tantric work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisenam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisiddhantam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisiṃham. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktistotran. Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktisvāminm. Name of a minister of muktāpīḍa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāptisādhanan. means of accomplishment or completion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samatisṛṣṭamfn. ( sṛj-) one who has taken leave, allowed to go View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samatisrutamfn. ( sru-) entirely flowed asunder, become thoroughly liquid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavṛttisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sambhūtabhūrigajavijipadātisainyamfn. possessed of an army (consisting) of numerous elephants and horses and foot-soldiers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkaṣṭanāśanagaṇapatistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃkhyavṛttisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃkhyavṛttisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampratisaṃcaram. re-absorption or resolution (brāhmaḥsam-pratisaṃcara-,"re-absorption into brahma-") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisadmann. a room for performing any propitiatory rite for averting evil (equals -gṛha-)
śāntisalilan. propitiatory water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisārabhāṣyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisomam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntistavam. Name of several works (see bṛhac-chānti-st-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisūktan. Name of a hymn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntisūrim. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptarṣismṛtisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptaśaktistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptatisambandham. a collection of 70 tales View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptatisaṃkhyākamfn. amounting to 70 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptaviṃśatisādhulakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śārīrakasambandhoktisaṃkṣepam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvadevatāpratisthṭhāsārasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvajyotism. Name of an ekāha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvasmṛtisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvātisārinmfn. suffering from diarrhoea caused by all the humours View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvavyūharatisvabhāvanayasaṃdarśanam. Name of a king of the gandharva-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatajyotism. Name of a son of su-bhrāj- (according to to "the moon") . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāramfn. suffering from diarrhoea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tisāramfn. sinful, guilty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyajyotis(saty/a--) mfn. having real splendour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śekharajyotism. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śitisārakam. "having a dark essence", Diospyros Embryopteris View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivabhaktisudhānidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivabhaktisudhārṇavam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivabhaktisudhodayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivapāramparyapratipādikaśrutismṛtyudāharaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivaśaktisiddhif. Name of work by harṣa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śleṣmātisāram. dysentery or diarrhoea produced by vitiated phlegm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisādhyamfn. capable of being proved by law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisāgaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisāgarasaṃgraha m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisāgarasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃgraham. Name of an ancient law-book (often quoted) and of other compilations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃgraharatnavyākhyānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃgrahasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisammatamfn. approved by law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃskāram. impression (caused) by memory (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisaṃskārakaustubham. Name of work
smṛtisaṃskārarahasyan. Name of work
smṛtisaṃskāravādam. Name of work
smṛtisaṃskāravicāram. Name of work
smṛtisamuccayam. "law-collection", Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisārasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisārasamuccayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisārasarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisārāvalīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisāravyavasthāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisarojasundaramn. (?) Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisiddhamfn. established by law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisiddhāntasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisindhum. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtisudhākaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śokātisāram. diarrhoea produced by sorrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somārkapratisaṃkāśamfn. resembling the sun and moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīpatisaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisāgaram. the ocean (id est the whole substance or essence) of sacred knowledge (viṣṇu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisaṃgraham. Name of two vedānta- works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisaṃkṣiptavarṇanan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisāram. Name of two works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisārapañcaratnan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisārasamuccayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisārasamuddharaṇaprakaraṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtif. dual number the veda- and human tradition or law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtivihitamfn. enjoined by the veda- and human tradition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtiviruddhamfn. opposed to the veda- and human tradition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtyāaitātparyan. Name of a vedānta- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtyuditamfn. declared or enjoined by the veda- and human law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisphoṭāf. Gynandropsis Pentaphylla View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutistutif. (equals veda-stuti-) Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisukhamfn. pleasant to the ear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisukhadamfn. giving pleasure to the ear, pleasant to hear. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisukhāvahamfn. giving pleasure to the ear, pleasant to hear. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisūktimālāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutisūtratātparyāmṛtan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthitisthāpakamfn. restoring anything to its original state or condition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthitisthāpakam. the capability of restoration to an original state or position, elasticity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stutisāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stutisūktimālāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śucinetraratisambhavam. Name of a king of the gandharva-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sugatisopānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sujyotis(or -jyot/is-) mfn. shining very brightly, radiant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śukasuktisudhākaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śukrajyotis(śukr/a-) mfn. having bright splendour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūktisādhutvamālikāf. Name of a poem (perhaps identical with kti-mālikā-).
sūktisahasran. Name of a collection of a thousand beautiful verses. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuktisāhvayāf. Name of a city (equals śukti-matī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūktisaṃgraham. Name of a kāvya- by kṛṣṇa-dāsa- kāyastha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuktisparśam. a dark spot or flaw on a pearl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sumatisvāminm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryajyotismfn. having the sun's light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvarṇajyotismfn. having a golden lustre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svarjyotismfn. (sv^ar--) shining with heaven's light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svarjyotisn. Name of two sāman-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayaṃjyotis(svay/aṃ--) mfn. self-shining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tamojyotism. "light in darkness", a fire-fly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tṛṇajyotisn. Name of a shining grass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ubhayatojyotismfn. having light on both sides View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ubhayatojyotismfn. "having a jyotiḥ-ṣṭoma-, sacrifice on both sides", being between two jyotiḥ-ṣṭoma- sacrifices View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
umāpatisevinmfn. worshipping śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapattisamam. (in logic) a kind of contradiction in which both the contradicting assertions are supposed to be demonstrable (exempli gratia, 'for example' sound is uneternal, because it is produced;it is eternal, because it is not tangible) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upariṣṭājjyotisn. idem or 'f. Name of a variety of the jyotiṣmatī- (q.v) metre (having twelve instants in the last line, and eight instants in each of the three preceding lines).' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ūrdhvajyotismfn. one whose light tends upwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāgjyotis(v/āg--) mfn. receiving light or enlightenment by speech View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiśampāyananītisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanaspatisavam. Name of particular sacrificial rite View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varadagaṇapatistotran. Name of stotra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varātisargam. the granting a boon or request View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartisn. circuit, orbit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartisn. lodging, abode (equals mārga- ; equals gṛha- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāstoṣpatisūktan. Name of a hymn (prob. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāsudevajyotism. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātātisāram. dysentery produced by vitiated wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntaśrutisārasaṃgrahaName of work m. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntasūtravṛttisaṃkṣiptāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimatisamudghātinm. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṃśatisāhasramf(ā-)n. 20, 000 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṃśatismṛtif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṃśatistotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayajyotism. (?) Name of a muni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vināyakaśāntisaṃgraham. Name of work or chapter from work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratisāran. ( m.fr. sṛ-) repentance
vipratisāran. evil, wickedness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratisāran. anger, wrath View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratisāravatmfn. equals next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratisārinmfn. full of repentance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratisārinmfn. afflicted, dejected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇubhaktistutif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣvagjyotism. Name of the eldest of the 100 sons of śata-jit-,
viśvajyotismfn. (viśv/a--) all-brilliant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvajyotism. Name of an ekāha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvajyotism. of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvajyotisf. Name of particular bricks (supposed to represent fire, the wind, and the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvajyotisn. Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vithūtistotra(?) n. Name of a stotra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttisaṃgraham. Name of a concise commentator or commentary on pāṇini-'s sūtra-s (by rāma-candra-, a pupil of nāgoji-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttisthamfn. being in any state or condition or employment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttistham. a lizard, chameleon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatisaṃdahP. -dahati-, to burn up entirely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatisev Passive voice -sevyate-, to be well furnished or provided with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatisonly ind.p. -sṛtya-, prob."in each case","on every occasion" (gurum anu-sṛtya- ) : Caus. -sārayati- (with kathām-), to converse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatisṛpP. -sarpati- (), to move to and fro, fly in every direction (as arrows) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyavahārāṅgasmṛtisarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyavahārārthasmṛtisārasamuccayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajatisthānan. the place or position of the vedi- or sacrificial altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisamārādhanavidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisaṃskāram. Name of chapter of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisaṃskāraprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisaṃskāravidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisaṃskāravidhinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisāṃtapanan. Name of a particular kind of penance (a pañca-gavya-lasting for three days), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatisvadharmabhikṣāvidhim. Name of a work (containing rules for the regulation of life on the part of religious mendicants, attributed to śaṃkarācārya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatyācārasaṃgrahīyayatisaṃskāraprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yeyajñenetisūktaName of the hymn (beginning with ye yajñena-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yogavṛttisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuktisnehaprapūraṇīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yūthapatisakāśamind. into the presence of the chief of the herd View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
Results for tis71 results
atisaktiḥ अतिसक्तिः f. Close contact or proximity; great attachment; अतिसक्तिमेत्य वरुणस्य दिशा Śi.9.7.
atisandhā अतिसन्धा 3 U. 1 To deceive, over-reach, cheat; त्वया चन्द्रमसा च विश्वसनीयाभ्यामतिसन्धीयते कमिजनसार्थः Ś.3; कथं मया ब्रह्मबन्धुरतिसन्धेयः V.2. -2 To prejudice, wrong, injure, encroach upon; मूलद्वारं नान्यैर्द्वारैरतिसन्दधीत रूपर्द्ध्या Bṛi. S.53.82.
atisandhānam अतिसन्धानम् 1 Cheating, deception; परातिसन्धान˚ Ś.5.25; trick, fraud. -2 Capture. -दण्डा˚ = Capture by means of the army. Kau. A.12.
atisandhyā अतिसन्ध्या The time about the twilights, the time just before and after the morning and evening twilight.
atisarpaṇam अतिसर्पणम् Violent motion or movement (of the child in the womb). गर्भसंक्रमणे वाचि मर्मणामतिसर्पणे Mb.14.17.19.
atisarva अतिसर्व a. Transcending or superior to all, above all. वाक्त्वचेनातिसर्वेण चन्द्रलेखेव पक्षतौ । Bk.4.16. -र्वः The Supreme Being; अतिसर्वाय शर्वाय Mugdha.
atisāntapanam अतिसान्तपनम् A kind of very austere penance; (गोमूत्रगोमयक्षीरदधिसर्पिःकुशोदकान्येकाहं द्वितीयमुपवसेत्तत्सान्तपनम्; त्र्यहाभ्यस्तैश्चातिसान्तपनम् Viṣṇu Smṛiti).
atisāṃvatsara अतिसांवत्सर a (री f.) Extending over more than a year; नातिसांवत्सरीं वृद्धिं न चादृष्टां विनिर्हरेत् Ms.8 153.
atisāmyā अतिसाम्या [अत्यन्तं साम्यं मधुना अस्याः] N. of the plant मधुयष्टि, sweet juice of the Bengal Madder, Rubiat Manjith. (Mar. ज्येष्टमध)
atis अतिसृ 1 P. Ved. To extend. -Caus. 1 To extend. -2 To exert oneself to drive out (as a fluid).
atisara अतिसर a. 1 One who goes beyond or exceeds. -2 Leader, foremost. -रः Effort _x001F_6or exertion.
atisṛj अतिसृज् 6 P. 1 To give, present, bestow, grant; अतिसृष्टो राज्यार्धविभागः Mu.2; पुरा नारायणेनेयमतिसृष्टा मरुत्वते V.1.17; राघवाय तनयां...अतिसृष्टवान् R.11.48; अनसूयाति- सृष्टेन 12.27. -2To dismiss, abandon, part with. -3 To permit, allow. -4 To remit, forgive (as fine &c.). -5 To leave as a remnant.
atisargaḥ अतिसर्गः 1 Granting (of a wish); giving; स्रष्टुर्वरातिसर्गात्तु मया तस्य दुरात्मनः R.1.42. -2 Granting permission (to do what one likes कामचारानुज्ञा) P.III 3.163, one of the senses of the Potential अतिसर्गाच्च पटवो दृष्ट्वा Rām.5.62.7. -3 Dismissal, discharge, parting with; giving away; स्त्रीणां दानविक्रयातिसर्गा विद्यन्ते न पुंसः Nir. -4 Favour; तवातिसर्गाद्देवेश प्रजापत्यमिदं पदम् । Mb.8.34.2. -a. [सर्गं सृष्टिमतिक्रान्तः] Everlasting, permanent (नित्य); emancipated (मुक्त).
atisarjanam अतिसर्जनम् 1 Giving, granting; consigning विधुरां ज्वलनातिसर्जनात् Ku.4.32, consigning to the flames; दीयतामिति वचो$तिसर्जने Śi.14.48; तत्तदीयविशिखातिसर्जनात् Ki. 13.57 giving back. -2 Liberality, munificence. -3 Killing. -4 Deception. -5 Separation from, parting with.
atisṛṣṭi अतिसृष्टि Superior creation सैषा ब्रह्मणो$तिसृष्टिः Bṛi. Ār. Up.1.4.6.
atisaurabha अतिसौरभ a. Very fragrant. -भम् Great fragrance. -भः The mango tree
atisauhityam अतिसौहित्यम् Stuffing oneself with food; न ˚त्यमाचरेत् Ms.4.62.
atisparśa अतिस्पर्श a. Not liberal, niggardly, mean-spirited. -र्शः Slight contact or absence of contact of the tongue and palate in pronunciation; epithet of the semivowels and vowels.
atisnehaḥ अतिस्नेहः Over-affection, ˚हः कार्यदर्शी V.2 sees or finds what is to be done; ˚हः पापशङ्की Ś.4 is apt to suspect evil.
apratisaṃkrama अप्रतिसंक्रम a. Having no intermixture.
apratisaṃkhya अप्रतिसंख्य a. Unobserved, unnoticed; ˚आख्य(ख्या)- निरोधः unobserved nullity, annihilation of an object; one of the three topics included by the Buddhas under the category of निरूप, the other two being प्रतिसंख्या- निरोध wilful destruction, as of a jar by a mallet, and आकाश the ethereal element.
jyotis ज्योतिस् n. [द्युत्-इसुन् आदेर्दस्य जः. ज्युत्-इसुन् वा] 1 Light, lustre, brightness, flash; ज्योतिरेकं जगाम Ś.5.3; R.2. 75; Me.5. -2 Light of Brahman, light regarded as the Supreme spirit; Bg.5.24;13.17; अथ यदतः परो दिवो ज्योतिर्दीप्यते Ch. Up.3.13.7; U.4.18. -3 Lightning. -4 A heavenly body. -5 A heavenly body, a luminary (planet, star &c.); ज्योतिर्भिरुद्यद्भिरिव त्रियामा Ku.7.21; Bg.1.21; H.1.21; Ku.2.19; Ś.7.6. -6 Brightness of the sky, day-light (opp. तमस्). -7 The sun and moon (dual). -8 Light as the divine principle of life, intelligence. -9 The science of the course of heavenly bodies; astronomy. See ज्योतिष. -1 The faculty of seeing. -11 The celestial world. -12 A Cow; ŚB. on MS.1.3.49. -m. 1 The sun. -2 Fire; ज्योति- ष्कल्पोरुकेशरः (मारुतिः) Bk.9.6. -8 An epithet of Viṣṇu. -Comp. -इङ्गः, -इङ्गणः the fire-fly. -कणः a spark of fire. -गणः the heavenly bodies collectively; -चक्रम् the zodiac. -ज्ञः an astronomer of astrologer. -मण्डलम् the stellar sphere. -मिलिन् m. -वी(बी)जम् a fire-fly. -रथः (ज्योतीरथः) the polar star. -लोकः the supreme spirit. -विद् m. an astronomer or astrologer. -विद्या, -शास्त्रम् (ज्योतिःशास्त्रम्) astronomy or astrology. -स्तोमः (ज्योतिष्टोमः) a Soma sacrifice considered as the type of a whole class of sacrificial ceremonies. -ज्योतिष्टोमः A kind of soma sacrifice requiring sixteen priests for its performance. -हस्ता N. of Durgā.
dyotis द्योतिस् n. 1 Light, brightness, lustre. -2 A star. -Comp. -इङ्गणः (द्योतिरिङ्गणः) a fire-fly.
pratisaṃyatta प्रतिसंयत्त p. p. Completely prepared, armed.
pratisaṃyāta प्रतिसंयात a. Assailing.
pratisaṃruddha प्रतिसंरुद्ध p. p. Shrunk, contracted. प्रतिसंलयनम् pratisaṃlayanam संलीनम् saṃlīnam प्रतिसंलयनम् संलीनम् Complele retirement.
pratisaṃvid प्रतिसंविद् f. An accurate knowledge of the particulars of anything.
pratisaṃvedaka प्रतिसंवेदक a. Giving detailed information about.
pratisaṃvedanam प्रतिसंवेदनम् Experiment, enjoyment.
pratisaṃvidhānam प्रतिसंविधानम् A counter-action.
pratisaṃstaram प्रतिसंस्तरम् Friendly reception.
pratisaṃsthānam प्रतिसंस्थानम् Setting in, entering into.
pratisaṃhṛ प्रतिसंहृ 1 P. 1 To draw back, withdraw, draw in; तत् साधुकृतसंधानं प्रतिसंहर सायकम् Ś.1.11; R.3.64; प्रतिसंहर तात बुद्धिमेताम् Bu. Ch.5.3. -2 To retract, take back, -3 To compress, reduce in bulk. -4 To change.
pratisaṃhāraḥ प्रतिसंहारः 1 Taking back, withdrawing. -2 Diminution, compression. -3 Comprehension, inclusion. -4 Yielding, giving up; रसानां प्रतिसंहारात् सौभाग्यमिह विन्दति Mb.13.57.17.
pratisaṃhṛta प्रतिसंहृत p. p. 1 Taken back, withdrawn; एष प्रति- संहृतः Ś.1. -2 Comprehended, included. -3 Compressed. -4 Checked, restrained; युगान्तकालप्रतिसंहृतात्मनः Śi.1.23.
pratisaṃkāśaḥ प्रतिसंकाशः Resemblance.
pratisaṃkramaḥ प्रतिसंक्रमः 1 Reabsorption. -2 Reflection (प्रतिच्छाया). -3 Dissolution (प्रलय); तत्त्वानां भगवंस्तेषां कतिधा प्रतिसंक्रमः Bhāg.3.7.37.
pratisaṃkhyā प्रतिसंख्या Consciousness.
pratisaṃkhyānam प्रतिसंख्यानम् 1 The tranquil consideration of a matter; युक्तो योगं प्रति सदा प्रतिसंख्यानमेव च Mb.13.141.83. -2 The Sāṅkhya Philosophy.
pratisaṃgakṣikā प्रतिसंगक्षिका A cloak to keep off dust.
pratisaṃgin प्रतिसंगिन् a. 1 Clinging or adhering to, attached to. -2 Irresistible.
pratisaṃcaraḥ प्रतिसंचरः 1 Moving backwards. -2 Reabsorption. -3 Especially, reabsorption (of the world) back into Prakṛiti. -4 A place or resort, haunt.
pratisaṃdeśaḥ प्रतिसंदेशः A message in return, an answer to a message.
pratisaṃdhā प्रतिसंधा 3 U. 1 To re-adjust. -2 To aim at, direct. -3 To conceive, comprehend. -4 To be, fasten. -5 To put on, wear. -6 To restore, return. -7 To compose oneself. -8 To fit (as an arrow to the bowstring.)
pratisaṃhita प्रतिसंहित p. p. Aimed at, directed against.
pratisaṃdhānam प्रतिसंधानम् 1 Joining together, uniting again; नैको$पि (उपायः) च्छिन्नकण्ठप्रतिसंधानपूर्वस्य प्राणलाभस्य Dk.2.2. -2 The period of transition between two ages. -3 A means, remedy. -4 Self-command, restraint of feelings or passion. -5 Praise. -6 Memory, recollection. -7 Remedy.
pratisaṃdhiḥ प्रतिसंधिः 1 Reunion. -2 Entering into the womb. -3 The period of transition between two ages. -4 Stop, cessation (उपरम); अदृष्टतो$नुपायाच्च प्रतिसन्धेश्च कर्मणः Mb. 12.26.2. -5 Rebirth.
pratisaṃdhita प्रतिसंधित a. Fastened, strengthened, confirmed; मनुरपि परेणैव प्रतिसंधितमनोरथः Bhāg.5.1.22.
pratisamādhānam प्रतिसमाधानम् Cure, remedy; दोषे प्रतिसमाधानमज्ञाते क्रियतां कथम् Bk.6.2.
pratisamāsanam प्रतिसमासनम् 1 Coping with, being a match for. -2 Resisting, opposing, withstanding.
pratisamāsita प्रतिसमासित a. Equalled, opposed; भीष्मद्रोणादयो युद्धे शक्याः प्रतिसमासितुम् Mb.3.47.26.
pratisara प्रतिसर a. Dependent, subject. -रः, -रम् 1 A cord or ribbon worn round the wrist or neck as an amulet. -2 An ornament. -3 A watch, guard. -4 Assailing, an attack. -रः 1 A servant, follower; विजये त्वर्यतां लेखः प्रतिसराय Pratijñā. -2 A bracelet, marriage-string; स्रस्तोरगप्रतिसरेण करेण पाणिः (अगृह्यत) Ki.5.33; (= कौतुकसूत्र); Māl.5.18. -3 A garland, wreath. -4 Day-break. -5 The rear of an army. -6 A form of incantation. -7 Healing or dressing a wound. -रा 1 A female servant. -2 A thread, fillet; प्रतिसरया तुरगाणां भल्लातकशालि- कुण्ठसिद्धार्थं कण्ठेषु निवघ्नीयात्.
pratisargaḥ प्रतिसर्गः 1 Secondary creation (as by the agents of one Supreme Being); संग्रहेण मया ख्यातः प्रतिसर्गस्तबानघ Bhāg.4.8.5; आदिसर्गस्तु यः सूत कथितो विस्तरेण च । प्रति- सर्गश्च ये येषामधिपास्तान् वदस्व नः ॥ Kālikā P. -2 Dissolution. -3 Continued creation out of primitive matter. -4 The portion of a Purāṇa which treats of the destruction and renovation of the world; सर्गश्च प्रतिसर्गश्च वंशो मन्वन्तराणि च । वंशानुचरितं चैव पुराणं पञ्चलक्षणम् ॥
pratisaṃdhānikaḥ प्रतिसंधानिकः A bard, panegyrist.
pratis प्रतिसृ 1 P. To go back, return. -2 To go towards, rush upon, attack, assail; दैत्यः प्रत्यसरद्देवं मत्तो मत्तमिव द्विपम् Hariv. -Caus. 1 To push backwards, replace; कनकवलयं स्रस्तं स्रस्तं मया प्रतिसार्यते Ś.3.12. -2 To repel, drive away or back.
pratisaraṇam प्रतिसरणम् Leaning or resting upon.
pratisāraṇam प्रतिसारणम् 1 Dressing the edges of a wound. -2 An instrument used for anointing a wound.
pratisārita प्रतिसारित a. 1 Repelled, removed. -2 Dressed (as a wound).
pratisīrā प्रतिसीरा A screen, curtain, wall of cloth; भावस्त्रपोर्मि- प्रतिसीरया ते न दीयते N.14.31.
pratisṛṣṭa प्रतिसृष्ट p. p. 1 Sent out, despatched. -2 Celebrated. -3 Repulsed, rejected. -4 Intoxicated (प्रमत्त according to धरणि).
pratistrī प्रतिस्त्री a. Lying on a woman; Ch. Up.
pratisnāta प्रतिस्नात p. p. Bathed.
pratisnehaḥ प्रतिस्नेहः Love in return, requital or reciprocation of love.
pratispandanam प्रतिस्पन्दनम् Throbbing, vibration.
pratispardhā प्रतिस्पर्धा Rivalry, emulation.
pratispardhin प्रतिस्पर्धिन् a. Rival, envious of. -m. A rival, competitor. प्रतिस्वनः pratisvanḥ प्रतिस्वरः pratisvarḥ प्रतिस्वनः प्रतिस्वरः 1 An echo, reverberation; दधिरे- $धिभित्ति पटहप्रतिस्वनैः स्फुटमट्टहासमिव सौधपङ्क्तयः Śi.13.31. -2 A focus.
pratisvam प्रतिस्वम् ind. One by one, singly.
prātisvika प्रातिस्विक a. (-की f.) 1 Peculiar, not common to others, one's own. -2 Granting to every one what is his due.
vartis वर्तिस् n. Ved. 1 Circuit, orbit. -2 A way, path. -3 Abode, residence.
vaipratisama वैप्रतिसम a. Unmatched; not equalled; Mb.2.
sajyotis सज्योतिस् ind. According to the light; सज्योतिः स्यादनध्यायः शेषे रात्रौ यथा दिवा Ms.4.16;5.82.
Macdonell Vedic Search
Results for tis2 results
tisr tisŕ, nm. f. of trí three, N. tisrás, i. 35, 6; ii. 35, 5.
jyotis jyót-is, n. light, iv. 50, 4; 51, 1; viii. 48, 3; x. 127, 2 [jyut = dyut shine].
Macdonell Search
260 results
akṛtārtha a. unsatisfied.
atapas a. not practising penances; -ka, a. id.
atṛpta pp. unsatisfied, insatiate; -tâ, f. abst. n.
atuṣṭi f. dissatisfaction, discontent.
atuṣṭa pp. dissatisfied.
atṛpyat pr. pt. not becoming satisfied.
anabhiprīta pp. not satisfied.
anirvṛta pp. dissatisfied, un happy; -vriti, f. lack of pleasure, sorrow.
anugraha m. favour: -krit, a. giving satisfaction; -na, n. showing favour; -½artham, ad. in favour of; î-kri, make a token of favour; -grâhaka, a. favouring, furthering; m. sup porter; -grâhya, fp.deserving favour; fa voured by (g.); -ghatana, n. continuation.
anuttama a. (without a highest), highest, most excellent; mightiest; -uttara, a. not answering; unanswerable; n. unsatis factory answer in court: -tva, n. abst. n.; -uttara&ndot;ga, a. not billowy; -utthâna, n. lack of energy; -utpatti, f. non-production; -utpâda, m. id.; non-appearance; -utsâha, m. absence of energy; -utsâhin, a. weak willed; -utsuka-tâ, f. unassumingness, mo desty; -utsûtra-pada-nyâsa, a.without a step against the rules of policy; without a word against grammatical rules; -utseka, m. lack of presumption, modesty; -utsekin, a. unassuming, modest, humble.
anuṣṭhātavya fp. to be done, to be executed; -shthâtri, m. performer; -shthâna, n. practice, performance; -shthâ pana, n. causing to perform; -shthâyin, a. practising, performing; -shthita,pp. done, performed; -shtheya, fp. to be accomplished.
anuśaya m. repentance; revocation (of a bargain): -vat, a. penitent; -½âkshepa, m. implication of remorse: a rhet. figure; -s&asharp;sana, n. instruction; precept, doctrine; order; -sâsanîya, fp. to be instructed; to be punished; -sâsitri, m. guide, teacher; -sâ sin, a. chastising; -sâsti, f. instruction; -si kshin, a. acquiring, practising; -sishta, pp. √ sâs; -susrûshâ, f. (des. n.) obedience; -sok ana, n. lamentation;-sokin, a. lamenting for (--°ree;); -sobhin, a. splendid.
anusara a. (î) following; conform ing to: -na, n. following, pursuing; -sânu, ad. on the ridge of the hills; -sâra, m. follow ing, pursuing; conformity; (legal) precedent: -tas, in. according to (--°ree;); -sârin, a. following, attendant on; seeking out; aiming at; conform ing to; adhering to; -sevâ, f. service, attend ance; -sevin, a. addicted to, practising (--°ree;).
antarjānu a. holding the hands between the knees; ad. between the knees; -gyotis, a. having its light turned inwards; n. internal light.
aparituṣṭa pp. not pleased; -tosha, a. dissatisfied; m. dissatisfaction; -tyakta, pp. unforsaken; -tyagya, fp. not to be forsaken; -tyâga, m. non-abandonment; -tyâgya, fp. not to be abandoned; -nirvâna, pp. not quite extinguished or ended; -ni shthita, pp. not standing quite firm.
aparihata pp. unimpeded, boundless; -hâra, m. non-avoidance; -hârya, fp. unavoidable; -hîya-mâna, pr. pt. ps. not being omitted, not wanting; -hrita, pp. un avoided, practised; -hvrita, pp.unscathed.
abhyasana n. application; study; î-ya, fp. to be practised.
arax{093c}ñjita pp. dissatisfied.
arthaśāstra n. treatise on prac tical life or policy; -sauka, n. blamelessness in money matters; -srî, f. abundance of wealth; -samsiddhi, f. success of a matter; -sam graha, m. accumulation of riches; -samkaya, m. sg. pl. property, wealth; -samdeha, m. doubtful or critical case.
avanti m. pl. N. of a people; -deva, m. N. of a king; -nagarî, f. the city of Uggayinî; -pura, n., î, f. id.; -mâtri, -kâ, f. pl. the divine mothers of the Avantis; -vatî, f. N.; -vardhana, m. N.; -varman, m. N. of a king and of a poet; -sundarî, f. N.; -sena, m., â, f. N.; -svâmin, m. N. of a temple.
avasakta pp. (√ sañg) fixed; -sak thikâ, f. loin cloth: -m kri, place a cloth round the loins; -sanna, pp. ended, waned; spent; -sara, m. occasion, opportunity; right time; appropriateness, use; turn; -sárpana, n. descent; -sarpinî, f. descending cycle; -sâda, m. sitting down; sinking; exhaustion, lassi tude; defeat: -na, n. discouragement; de jection; -s&asharp;na, n. resting-place; cessation; end; death; end of a sentence or verse; pause: -bhûmi, f. acme; -sita, pp. (√ sâ) ended: -½artha, a. satisfied; -siti, f. conclusion, end; -seka, m. sprinkling; bleeding (by leeches); -sekana, n. sprinkling; water for washing; bleeding.
aśilpin m. no artist or artisan.
aśāntatanu a. whose body is not satisfied.
asaṃtāpa a. feeling no grief; -tushta, pp. dissatisfied, discontented; -to sha, m. discontent; -tyâga, m. non-renun ciation of (g.).
asādhaka a. not accomplishing; unsatisfactory; -ana, n. no means; a. destitute of resources; unfeasible: -tva, n. abst. n.
ahaṃvādin a. talking egotistic ally.
ahīna pp. not deprived of, practising (in.): -karman, a. following no low occupation; not neglecting rites.
āpyāya m. increase, becoming full; -ana, a. causing corpulency; causing well-be ing; n. satisfying; advancement; causing Soma to swell: â, f. satiety; -in, a. bestowing pros perity (--°ree;).
āraṇya a. living or growing in the forest; wild: (a)-ka, a. id.; m. forester; anchorite; n. forest-treatise (part of a Brâhmana to be studied in solitudes).
ārṣṭiṣeṇa m. descendant of Ri shtishena.
upakaraṇa n. doing a service or favour; accessory; implement, instrument; furniture; contribution; means; aid; supple mentary treatise; (á)-vat, a. supplied with means; î-kri, make a tool of; î-bhû,become a tool of; î-ya, fp. to whom a service is to be done or is done: -tâ, f. abst. n.
upaveśana n. sitting down, seat; undergoing (--°ree;); -in, a. undergoing, practising (--°ree;).
upasevaka a. courting (--°ree;); -ana, n. courting; carnal intercourse with (--°ree;); addition to, indulgence in (--°ree;); â, f. carnal intercourse with; devotion to; indulgence in (--°ree;); -in, a.serving; reverencing; worship ping; practising (--°ree;).
ṛtayā in. ad. rightly; -yúg, a. rightly yoked; well allied; -vat, a. having or speak ing truth; -s&asharp;p, a. practising piety; -stúbh, a. rightly praising.
aindrajāla n. witchcraft; -gâl ika, a. (î) referring to or practising witch craft; m. wizard, juggler; -nîla, a. (î) made of sapphire; -sira, m. kind of elephant.
karpūra m. n. camphor; -keli, m. N. of a flamingo; -gaura, n. N. of a lake (whitish like camphor); -tilaka, m. N. of an elephant; -pata, m. N. of a dyer; -mañ- garî, f. N. of a princess; -flamingo; -drama;-maya, a. consisting of or like camphor; -vi lâsa, m. N.; -saras, n. N. of a lake.
karmātman a. whose nature is action; -½anta, m. completion of work; busi ness, public affairs, management; -½antika, m. labourer, artisan: -loka, m. labourers; -½abhyâsa, m. practice of a rite.
kalā f. small part, esp. one-sixteenth; sixteenth part of the moon's disc; interest on capital; small division of time (ranging be tween 8 seconds and about 2 1/2 minutes accord ing to different statements); artistic skill; art (of which there are 64); -keli, a. practising an art as an amusement; -gña, a. understand ing an art or the arts; m. artist; -dhara, a. possessing an art or the arts; m. moon; -nâtha, m. moon;-nidhi, m. id.
kalābhara m. artist; -bhrit, m. id.; -vat, m. moon; -vid, a.=kalâ-gña.
kavitā f., -tvá, n. poetic art or gift; -putra, m. N. of a dramatist; -râga, m. king of poets; N. of a poet; (í)-sasta (or á), pp. spoken or praised by sages.
kāpāla a. (î) connected with or made of skulls; m. pl. school of Kapâlin; -ika, m. Saiva sectary (wearing and eating out of human skulls); a certain mixed caste; -in, m. ep. of Siva; N.; a. practised by a Kâpâlika.
kāmarasika a. indulging in love; libidinous; -rûpa, n. any form desired; a. assuming any form at will; m. pl. N. of a people in western Assam; -rûpin, a. id.; -vat, a. enamoured; -varsha, a.raining as desired; -vâda, m. talking as one lists; -vâs in, a. changing one's abode at pleasure; -vritta, pp. indulging one's desires, pleasure-loving; -sara, m. arrow of Kâma; -sâsana, m. ep. of Siva; -sâstra, n. treatise on love, T. of various works; -sû, a. granting desires; -sûtra, n. a Sûtra treating of love; -haituka, a. caused by desire only.
kāru m. poet, singer; -u, m. artisan (f. û): -ka, m. id.
kāvya m. pl. kind of Manes; n. poem; -kartri, m. poet; -goshthî, f. discussion on poetry; -gîva-gña, m. Venus, Jupiter, and Mercury, or a. understanding the purport of a poem; -tâ, f., -tva, n.condition of a poem; -devî, f. N. of a queen; -prakâsa, m. Light of poetry: T. of a work on poetics by Mammata and Alata (11th or 12th century); -mîmâmsa ka, m. rhetorician; -rasa, m. flavour of poetry; -sâstra, n.poetry and learning (°ree;--); treatise on poetry; Poetics: T. of a work.
kunti m. pl. N. of a people; sg. king of the Kuntis; -bhoga, m. N. of a king of the Kuntis, who adopted Kuntî.
kulāya m. n. web, tissue; nest; lair; dwelling; -ín, a. nest-like.
kulapatana n. fall --, degradation of the family; -pati, m. head of the family; -parvata, m. chief mtn. or mtn.-range; -p&asharp;, m. f. head of the family or community; -pâms anî, f. disgrace to her family; -pâlikâ, f. N.; -putra, m. son of a good family; virtuous youth: -ka, m. id.; -purusha, m. man of good family; virtuous man; -pratishthâ, f. support of the race; -prasûta, pp. born of a noble race; -bhava, a.coming of a noble race; -bhavana, n. chief residence; -bhûta, pp. being the head of the guild; -bhûbhrit, m. chief mtn. or mtn.-range; model of a prince; -mârga, m. ancestral path; -mitra, n. friend of the family.
kṛcchrakarman n. distress, trouble; -kâla, m. time of distress or danger; -gata, pp. distressed, endangered; practising penance; -tâ, f. dangerousness; -patita, pp. fallen into distress; -prâna,a. whose life is in danger; eking out one's existence with difficulty; -sâdhya, fp. difficult of accom plishment.
kṛtaka a. artificial, feigned, false; adopted (son): -m, feignedly, -tva, n. quality of being artificially produced; -kartavya, a. having fulfilled his task; -karman, n. an ac complished deed; a. having fulfilled one's duty; -kârin, a. doing a thing; -kârya, n. an at tained object; a. having accomplished his ob ject; satisfied: -tva, n. abst. n.; -kâla, m. ap pointed time; -kritya, a. having done his duty; having attained his object, satisfied (as to, lc.): -tâ, f. satisfaction; -kriya, a. hav ing performed a sacred rite; pious; -kshana, a. having an appointed time, i. e. waiting im patiently for (lc., ac. w. prati, inf., --°ree;); -ksho bha, a. shaken; -ghna, a. ignoring benefits, ungrateful: -tâ, f., -tva, n. ingratitude; -kûda, a. having received the tonsure; -gan man, a. planted; -gña, a. recognising benefits, grateful: -tâ, f. gratitude.
kṛtin a. active; clever; skilful, ex perienced (in, lc., --°ree;); having attained one's object, satisfied; -i-tva, n. satisfaction.
kṛtālaya a. having taken up one's abode, dwelling (in, lc., --°ree;); feeling at home; -½avasakthika, a. having put on a loin cloth; -½avasatha, a. received into one's house; -½avastha, a.compelled to appear in court; -½âsamsa, a. hoping; -½astra, a. practised in arms or archery; -½âhâraka, a. having finished one's meal.
kṛtārthīkaraṇa a. satisfac tory; -kri, satisfy; -bhû, be satisfied.
kṛtārthaya den. P. satisfy; fulfil.
kṛtāṅka a. branded; -½añgala, a. having the palms joined in supplication to (d.); -½âtithya, a. having practised hospi tality; hospitably entertained; -½âtman, a. whose mind is cultivatedor purified; -½âdara, a. treated with due respect; -½anuvyâdha, a. filled with (in.); -½anta, a. making an end, decisive; m. matter, affair, case; fate; Death, Yama; system, doctrine: -nagarî, f. city of Yama, -samtrâsa,m. N. of a Râkshasa; -½antara, a. having made one's way to (g.); -½anná, n. cooked food; -½aparâdha, a. hav ing committed an offence against (g.); -½abhi sheka, a. hvg. performed a religious ablution; consecrated;-½abhyâsa, a. kept to one's studies (by, --°ree;); -½artha, a. having attained his object; satisfied: -tâ, f., -tva, n. satisfaction.
kaumāra a. (î) relating to a youth or virgin; youthful; relating to Kumâra (god of war); n. childhood, youth; innocence of youth, virginity; -kârin, a. practising chas tity; -vrata, n. vow of chastity:-kârin, a. practising a vow of chastity.
kratu m. power, might, efficacy; coun sel, intelligence, wisdom; inspiration; plan, purpose, wish, will; sacrifice (sts. personified); N. of the three liturgies forming the prâtar anuvâka; N. of a son of Brahman (one of the Pragâpatis and of the seven Rishis); a star in the Great Bear.
khaṇḍaya den. P. break or cut in pieces; injure; bite; interrupt, disturb; destroy, dispel; cause to cease, satisfy; neglect; refute; deceive. ava, break in pieces. ud, tear off. vi, cut in pieces, lacerate.
gaganagati m. dweller in the sky; -kara, m. sky-goer, bird; -kârin, a. coming from the sky (voice); -tala, n. vault of heaven; -nagara, n. mirage; -pratishtha, a. being in the air; -lih, a. reaching to the sky; -vihârin, a. moving in the sky; -sad, m. denizen of the sky; -sindhu, f. celestial Ganges; -sparsana, m. N. of one of the Ma ruts; -spris, a. touching=dwelling in, the sky; reaching to the sky.
gaura a. (&isharp;) whitish, yellowish, reddish; m. kind of buffalo; white mustard (a grain of it=a measure); -mukha, m. N.; -mriga, m. kind of buffalo.
grantha m. knot; composition; verse (of 32 syllables); treatise, book; text, word ing; chapter; -ana, n. connecting, tying.
cara a. movable, moving; n. animal (opp. plant); --°ree;, going, wandering, walking; acting, living; practising; m. spy; â, f. life.
caritārthaya den. P. cause any one (ac.) to attain his object, satisfy.
caritārtha a. having obtained one's object; successful; satisfied: -tâ, f. at tainment of one's object, satisfaction; -tva, n. accomplishment.
caritavya fp. to be practised or performed.
carya fp. to be practised; â, f. roam ing; procedure, conduct; observance; per formance or practice of, occupation with (--°ree;, in.).
cākrika m. carter; potter; oil grinder; bell-man; partisan, accomplice.
cikīrṣa des. of √ kri, do; -shâ, f. desire to do or make, longing for (g.; --°ree;); -shita, n. undertaking; purpose, intention; -shu, a. wishing to do, make, fashion, per form, or practise; desirous of (ac., --°ree;).
cirakāra a. slow, tardy; dilatory; -kâr-i, -kâr-in, a. id.: i-ta, f., i-tva, n. tardi ness, dilatoriness; -kâla, a. belonging to the olden time; m. long time: -m, °ree;--, for a long time; ab. after a long time; on account of the long interval; -krita, pp. long practised; -gîvin, a. long-lived; m. N. of a crow; -dâ tri, m. N. of a prince; -nirvâhya, fp. tak ing a long time to carry out.
janmapādapa m. tree of one's home; -pratishthâ, f. mother; -bandha, m. bonds of (repeated) birth; -bhû, -bhûmi, f. land of birth; -bhûmî-bhû, become the land of --'s birth (--°ree;).
jitaśrama a. (overcoming=) inured to fatigue; practised in (lc.).
juṣṭi f. favour; satisfaction.
joṣa m. satisfaction: -m, ad. at will, as one pleases; gladly; gosham âs, be silent.
tantra n. loom; warp; groundwork, underlying principle, essence; system; stand ard; main point; rule, doctrine; manual; section in a manual; a class of magical and mystical treatises; spell; physic, specific; government; --°ree;, line, rank, troop; a. chiefly concerned with, dependent on (--°ree;).
tapodhana a. whose wealth is pen ance; devout, pious; m. ascetic, devotee; N.; -nidhi, m. treasury of penance; rigorous devotee; -bhrit, a. devout, pious; m. devotee, ascetic; -maya, a. (î) consisting of penance or austerity; devoted to piety; -mûla, a. having austerity for its root; -yagña, a. sacri ficing with penance; -yukta, pp. ascetic, pious; m. ascetic, devotee; -rata, pp. delighting in penance, devout; -rati, a. id.; -vat, a. ascetic, devout; -vana, n. sacred grove (in which ascetics practise penance); -vriddha, pp. abounding in penance, rigorously ascetic, very pious.
tarpaṇīya fp. to be satisfied w. (in.).
tarpaṇa a. (î) satisfying; n. satis faction (act. & ps.); satisfying, pleasing (the gods or Manes by oblations); nourishment, refreshment.
tāpasa a. (î) practising penance; re lating to religious penance; m., -î, f. ascetic, hermit; -ya, n. status of ascetics.
tuṣṭi f. satisfaction, contentment.
turīya SB.), a. fourth; consisting of four; n. fourth state of Vedântist's soul (completeunion with Brahma).
taiṣa a. (î) relating to the lunar man sion Tishya; m. N. of a month; î, f. day of full moon in the month Taisha.
tṛptikara a. satisfying; -kâraka, a. id.; -mat, a. satisfied (with, lc.); -yoga, m. satisfaction.
tṛpti f. (also -tí) satisfaction; satiety.
taittirīya m. pl. N. of a school of the Yagur-veda: -ka, a. belonging to the school of the Taittirîyas; -prâtisâkhya, n. Prâtisâkhya of the Taittirîyas; -yagur-veda, m. the Yagur-veda of the Taittirîyas;-sâkhâ, f. the school of the Taittirîyas; -samhitâ, f. the Samhitâ of the Taittirîyas; -½âranyaka, n. an Âranyaka of the Taittirîyas; -½upani shad, f. the Taittirîya Upanishad.
toṣa m. satisfaction, pleasure (in, g., lc., --°ree;); -ana, a. (î) appeasing, satisfying, de lighting; n. id.; -in, a. (--°ree;) content with, liking; satisfying, gladdening.
tri num. pl. m. n. (f. tisri) three: trishu (gr. or lex.)=of all three genders.
daṇḍakāṣṭha n. wooden staff; -ghna, a. striking with a staff, committing assault; -kakra, n. detachment of an army -tâdana, n. chastisement with a stick; -tva, n. condition of a staff; -dâsa, m.slave for (non-payment of) a fine, one who serves out a fine; -dhara, a. wielding the rod or sceptre over, punishing, chastising (g.); m. prince, king; judge, magistrate; leader of a troop; ep. of Yama: -½adhipati, m. chief of judges, king; -dhâra, a. wielding the rod, exercising judicial authority: -ka, a. id.; -dhârana, n. bearing of a staff; employment of force; chastisement.
daṇḍa m. (n.) staff, stick; mace, club (to which the elephant's trunk and human arms and thighs are often compared); stalk; handle; flagstaff (on a carriage); pole (as a measure of length = 4 cubits); rod = symbol of violence, force of arms, military power, army; mastery of, complete control over (g., --°ree;); sceptre (as symbol of judicial power), punishment (corporal chastisement, admoni tion, fine): gupta --, secret fine=blackmail; vaitasá --, reedlike staff=membrum virile.
daṇḍapāṇi a. holding a staff in one's hand; m. policeman; ep. of Yama; -pâta, m. (descent of the rod), punishment, chastisement; -pâtana, n. castigation; -pâ rushya, n. assault: du. bodily chastisement and admonition; -pâla, m. guardian of jus tice, judge: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -pâláka, m. guardian of justice, judge; -pâsaka, m. policeman, watchman; -pranâma, m. prostration at full length like a staff; -pradâna,n. presentation of the staff (at investiture); -bhaya, n. fear of the rod; -bhâg, a. liable to punishment; -bhrit, a. wielding the rod; m. ep. of Yama; -mukhya, m. leader of an army.
damana a. (î) taming, subduing (--°ree;); m. horse-tamer, charioteer; Vincent, N. of one of Damayantî's brothers; n. subduing; chas tising.
daśamāsya a. ten months old; -mukha, m. (ten-faced), Râvana: -ripu, m. Râvana's foe, ep. of Râma; -yoganî, f. dis tance of ten yoganas; -ratha, m. N. of several kings, esp. of Râma's father, sovereign of Ayodhyâ; -rasmi-sata, m. (thousand-rayed), sun; -râtra, m. n. period of ten days: á, a. lasting ten days; m. festival of ten days; -a½ri- ka, having ten verses; -rûpa, n. sg. the ten kinds of dramas; T. of a treatise on rhetoric by Dhanamgaya (tenth century): -ka, n. id.; -lakshana-ka, a. having ten characteristics, tenfold; -varsha, -varshîya, a. ten years old; -vârshika, a. (î) id.; lasting ten years; occur ring after ten years; -vidha, a. tenfold; -satá, n. 110; 1000: î, f. 1000; -sata-kara-dhârin, a. having a thousand rays (moon); -sata½ak- sha, a. thousand-eyed (Indra); -siras, a. ten-headed; -sîrsha, a. id.; m. Râvana; -sâhas ra, a. consisting of ten thousand; n. ten thousand.
durākṛti a. mis-shapen, deform ed, ugly; -âkranda, a. having bad friends, friendless; -âgama, m. dishonest acquisition; -âkara, a. (î) hard to practise; difficult to treat or cure; -âkâra, m. bad conduct or cus tom; a. ill-behaved, of bad conduct, impious; -âtma-tâ, f. wickedness, baseness; -âtman, a. evil-minded, wicked, base, impious; -âtma vat, a. id.; -âdhara, a. hard to check, irre sistible; hard to obtain; hard to guard; -â dhársha, a. hard to attack; dangerous; -âna ma, a. hard to bend (bow); -&asharp;pa, a. hard to come up with; hard to attain; -ârâdhya, fp. hard to conciliate; hard to worship; -âruha, a. hard to climb; -âropa, a. hard to string; -âroha, a. hard to climb or ascend to: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -âlakshya, fp. hard to perceive; -âlamba, a. hard to gain a footing on; -âlam bha, a. hard to grasp; -âloka, a. hard to per ceive; -âvara, a. hard to close or protect; -âvaha, a. hard to conduct to (--°ree;); -âvâra, a. hard to close; difficult to check; -âvâsin, a. having bad quarters; -&asharp;vî, a. hard to pass (v. l. dur&asharp;yya).
durbhakṣa a. hard to eat; -bhága, a. loathsome, ugly; unpleasant; ill-fated: â, f. ugly woman; -bhaga-tva, n. misfortune; -bhara, a. hard to bear; -support; -satisfy; heavily laden with (--°ree;); -bhâgya, a. unfortunate; -bhâsha, a. using bad language; m. abu sive language; -bhâshita, pp. offensive (lan guage); -bhâshin, a. using abusive language; -bhiksha, n. (m. rare) famine; distress: -tva, n. abst. n., -vyasanin, a. having to cope with famine; -bhida, a. hard to burst; -disperse; -bheda, a. hard to burst, disunite, or sunder; -bhedya, fp. id.
duścara a. hard to traverse; inac cessible; hard to pass (time); difficult to prac tise: -tva, n. difficulty of practising; -kar ita, pp. behaving ill, doing ill deeds; n. (dús-), ill-conduct, misdeed, folly;-kárman, a. having a skin disease; -kâritra, a. ill conducted; -kârin, a. id.; -kikitsâ, f. wrong medical treatment; -kikitsita, pp. hard to cure; -kikitsya, fp. id.: -tva, n. difficulty of curing; -kitta, a. dejected, sad; -ketas, a.ill-disposed; -keshtâ, f. bad conduct, perverse ness; -keshtita, pp. n. id.: pl. ill-doings; -kyavaná, a. hard to overthrow, immovable; -kyâva, a. id.; -khid, a. hard to destroy.
duṣparigraha a. hard to re tain; -parihántu, a. hard to remove; -pari hara, a. hard to avoid; -pâra, a. hard to cross; -perform; -pârshni-graha, a. hav ing a bad enemy in the rear, -grâha, a. id.;-pûra, a. hard to fill; -satisfy; -prakriti, f. low nature; a. base; -prakriyâ, f. trifling dignity; -pragña, a. stupid: -tva, n. stu pidity; -pranîta, pp. led astray; n. indis cretion; -pradharsha, a. hard to assail; -prabhañgana, m.hurricane; -prayukta, pp. badly or wrongly employed; -pravâda, m. slander; -pravritti, f. bad news; -pra vesa, a. hard to enter; -prasaha, a. hard to endure, irresistible; -prasâda, a. hard to ap pease: -na, a. id.; -prasâdhana, a. hard to manage (person); -prasâdhya, fp. id.; -prâ pa, a. hard to attain; -preksha, a., -preksha- nîya, fp. hard to see; unpleasant to look at; -prekshya, fp. id.
dyotis n. light; star (=gyotis).
dharmaśāsana n. manual of law; -sâstra, n. authoritative compendium of law; law-book; -sâstrin, m. adherent of the law-books: pl. a certain school; -sîla, a. just, virtuous; m. N.; -samyukta, pp.legal; -samsrita, pp. just, virtuous; -samka thâ, f. pl. discourses on virtue; -samgñâ, f. sense of duty; -samaya, m. obligation entered into; -sâdhana, n. fulfilment of duty; necessary means for the fulfilment of duty; -sûtra, n. sûtra treatise on customary law; -sena, m. N. of a merchant; -sevana, n. fulfilment of duty; -skandha, m. chapter on law; -stha, m. judge; -sthûnâ-râga, m. main pillar of the law; -svâmin, m. N. of a temple erected by king Dharma; -hantri, m. (-trî, f.) violator of the law; -hâni, f. neglect of duty; -hîna, pp. excluded from the pale of the law.
dhik ij. of dissatisfaction, reproach, or lamentation; fie! woe! with nm., vc., g., gnly. ac., sts. aho --, hâ -(± kashtam), ha hâ dhik; dhig astu, shame on --! fie on --! (ac. or g.); dhik kri, reproach (ac.); ridi cule, belittle.
dhṛtimat a. steadfast, firm, reso lute; contented, satisfied; -maya, a. (î) con sisting of strong will; -mush, a. robbing of steadfastness.
dhṛti f. holding fast; standing still; firmness, steadiness; fortitude; constancy; resoluteness; satisfaction, contentment: -m kri, find satisfaction; stand one's ground; -m bandh, direct one's will towards (lc.).
nātinirvṛti f. not too great satisfaction; -nîka, a. not too low; -pari- kara, a. having a limited retinue; -pari sphuta, a. somewhat concealed; -paryâpta, pp. not too abundant; -pushta, pp.not too well furnished with (in.); -prakupita, pp. not excessively angry; -pramanas, a. not too good-humoured; -prasiddha, pp. not noto rious; -bhârika, a. not too weighty; -bhin na, pp. not very different from (ab.); -mâ tram, ad. not excessively; -mân-in, a. not esteeming oneself toohighly: (-i)-tâ, f. absence of vanity; -ramanîya, fp. not too charming: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -rûpa, a. not very pretty; -visadam, ad. (kiss) not very audibly; -vis târa-samkata, a. neither too wide nor too narrow; -sîta½ushna, a. neither too hot nor too cold; -slishta, pp. not very firm; -sva stha, a. not very well, poorly.
nigada m. reciting aloud; prayer recited aloud; mention; -gama, m. insertion, esp. of gods' names in a ritual formula; passage (in which a word occurs); root from which a word is derived; Vedic text, holy writ; sacred ordinance; doctrine; -gamana, n. being quoted; conclusion (of a syllogism); -garana, n. swallowing; -gûdha-kârin, a. walking in disguise; -gûdha-tara, cpv. well concealed; -gûhana, n. hiding; -grabhîtri, m. seizer, binder (of sacrificial animal); -gra ha, m. seizure; repression, suppression; keep ing back from (ab.); restraint, coercion; chastisement; reprimand; -grahana, n. re pression, suppression; punishment; -grahî tri, m. seizer; -grahîtavya, fp. to be pun ished; -grâhya, fp. id.; oppressed, injured, by (--°ree;).
niyama m. restraint, limitation; re striction to (lc. or prati with ac.); fixed rule, certainty, absolute necessity (in a particular case); contract, promise; vow; self-imposed (religious) observance, minor (occasional) duty: ab. necessarily, certainly; in. id.; with certain limitations; -yamana, n. restraining, subduing; restriction; -yama-vat, a. prac tising religious observances; -yamya, fp. to be restrained, -subdued; -limited; -re stricted; -y&asharp;na, n. going in, entry; -yâma ka, a. (ikâ) restraining, checking; restricting.
nirvācya fp. to be explained, determined; -vâ-na, pp. of √ vâ; -vâ½ana, n. extinction; extinction of the vital flame, dis solution, final emancipation, union with the absolute; absorption in (--°ree;); individual ex tinction (B.); complete satisfaction, bliss: -pûrana, n. funeral sacrifice.
nirvṛti f. in ward tranquillity; satis faction, joy, pleasure; happiness, bliss; ex tinction (of a lamp): -mat, a. tranquil; happy; -vritti, f. accomplishment, perform ance, completion; impropriety, unseemly be haviour.
niṣeddhavya fp. to be restrained or prevented; -sheddhrí, m. restrainer, pre venter; -shedha, m. keeping off, prevention; prohibition; negation: -ka, a. prohibiting; -shedhin, a. repelling = surpassing (--°ree;); -shedhya, fp. to be prevented or prohibited; -sheva, a. practising (--°ree;); m. adoration: â, f. practice, addiction to; enjoyment; adoration; -shevaka, a. (--°ree;) frequenting; practising; enjoying; -shevana, n. visiting; practice; employment of, addiction to (g., --°ree;); -shev- -itavya, fp. to be practised or observed; -employed; -enjoyed; -shevin, a. devot ing oneself to, practising; enjoying, having sexual intercourse with; -shevya, fp. to be visited; -enjoyed; venerable.
nistuṣa a. unhusked; purified, pure; -trish, a. satisfied.
nīti f. guidance; worldly wisdom, practical morality, political and social ethics; discretion, prudent counsel; policy: -kusala, a. skilled in the conduct of human affairs, politic; -gña, a. prudent, politic; -dosha, m. error of conduct; -patala, n. treatise on policy; -mat, a. (-î) acquainted with the rules of worldly wisdom, politic, prudent; -yukta, pp. versed in policy; -vid, m. poli tician; -vidyâ, f. science of policy; -vedin, a.knowing policy; -sataka, n. T. of Bhartri hari's century of verses on worldly wisdom; -sâstra, n. science of political ethics; trea tise on polity; -samdhi, m. quintessence of polity.
nyāya m. [going back, reference, precedent], rule, standard, axiom, principle, method; manner; propriety, correct way; logical proof or conclusion, syllogism; logic, the Nyâya system of philosophy;lawsuit; decision, judgment: in., ab., °ree;--, after the manner of (--°ree;); in. -tas, °ree;--, suitably, properly; -vartin, a. behaving with propriety; -vâdin, a. speaking suitably; -vid, m. connoisseur; -vidyâ, f. logic; -vritta,pp. behaving with propriety; -sâstra, n. treatise on logic; -sikshâ, f. logic.
pakṣatva n. being a component part of (--°ree;); being the subject of a conclusion; prosecution; -dvâra, n. side-door; -dhara, a. taking the side of (g.); attached to (lc.); m. bird; -pâta, m. flight; partisanship, partiality, predilection for (ac.±prati, g., lc., --°ree;); -pâti-tâ, f. partiality or predilection for (lc. or --°ree;); -pâtin, a. siding with, partial to (--°ree;); -puta, m. outspread wing; wing; -bala, n. strength of wing; -rakanâ, f. formation of a party; (á)-vat, a. winged; having a large following; -vikala, a. paralyzed in the wings.
pakṣa m. (n.1) wing, pinion; feathers of an arrow; flank, side; half; half-month, fortnight (15 days); side, party, following, ally, partisans, family, race (sg. & pl.); host, troop, class; quantity (of hair); place; alternative; case; opinion, proposition; prosecution (leg.); subject of an inference (logic); topic, subject under discussion: pakshe, in the other case; with regard to (--°ree;); atra --, in this case; tâbhyâm mukte --,in a case other than these two.
pattra n. wing; feather (also of an arrow); vehicle (car, horse, or camel); (plum age of a tree), leaf, petal; leaf prepared for writing on (-m âropaya=put on paper); letter, document; foil of metal;ornamental leaf painted with (--°ree;): -ka(ikâ)=pattra --°ree; a.; -kkhedya, a. having its feathers plucked out; n. a kind of artistic skill (?); -pati, m. ep. of Garuda; -puta, m. n.: i-kâ, f. leaf rolled up into a funnel-shape;-bha&ndot;ga, m. streaks painted with musk and other frag rant substances on the face or parts of the body; -ratha, m. (riding on wings), bird: -½indra, m. lord of birds, ep. of Garuda: -ketu, m. having Garuda as his badge, Vishnu; -rekhâ, f.=-bha&ndot;ga; -latâ, f. id.; N.; -le khâ, f. id.; N.; -vâha, m. (borne on wings), bird; arrow; -viseshaka, m. (?) leaf-like painted mark; -veshta, m. kind of earring; -sâka, n. vegetable with leaves;-½âlî, f.= -bha&ndot;ga; -½âhâra, m. pl. feeding on leaves.
paritarkaṇa n. consideration; -tarpana, a. satisfying; n. satisfaction.
paritāpa m. heat, warmth; dis tress, anguish, sorrow, affliction; remorse; giving pain; -tâpin, a. burning hot; causing affliction or sorrow, distressing; -tushti, f. satisfaction; -tripti, f. perfect satisfaction; -tosha, m. satisfaction, gratification, glee; pleasure or delight in (g. or lc.); -toshayi tri, a. satisfying, gratifying; -tosha-vat, a. satisfied, gratified; -toshin, a. satisfied with, gratified by (--°ree;); -tyakta, pp.deserted, abandoned; -tyaktri, m. forsaker; -tyâga, m. abandonment, desertion; repudiation; re linquishment, renunciation, loss, privation, sacrifice: -sena, m. N. of a prince; -tyâgin, a. abandoning; resigning, renouncing (--°ree;); liberal; m. renouncer; -tyâgana, n. causing to abandon; depriving of (--°ree;); -tyâgya, fp. to be abandoned, -deserted, -renounced, avoided; -trâna, n. preservation, protection, help, deliverance, rescue from (ab.); shelter, refuge; preventive of (g.); -trâtavya, fp. to be protected from (ab.); -trâtri, m. pro tector, deliverer (with ac. or g.); -trâsa, m. fright, fear.
parītāpa m. heat; -tosha, m. satisfaction; -tta, pp. √ dâ; -pâka, m. de velopment; ripeness; consequences, result.
pavamāna pr. pt. √ pû; m. wind; god of wind; N. of a certain Agni or of a son of Agni; N. of certain stotras sung by the Sâmagas at the Gyotishtoma sacrifice: -vat, a. accompanied by the Pavamâna stotra; -sakha, m. (friend of the wind), fire; -½uktha, n. series of verses in the midday Pavamâna.
pākṣika a. (î) partisan; alternative, optional, applicable in certain cases only.
pākṣapātika a. partial, partisan (speech).
pākaśāsana m. chastiser of the demon Pâka, ep. of Indra; -sâstra, n. art of cookery.
pāṇḍara a. pale yellow, whitish, white.
pāṇḍura a. whitish, white, pale: -tâ, f. white colour; -ya, den. P. colour whitish yellow; i-ta, pp. coloured yellowish white; i-man, m. pale colour; î-kri, colour yellowish white.
pāṇḍu a. (f. id.) yellowish white, whitish, pale; m. N. of a sovereign of ancient Delhi, a son of Vyâsa and brother of Dhri tarâshtra; -kkhâya, a. white-coloured; -tâ, f. yellowish white colour, paleness; -nanda na, m. son of Pându; -pattra, n. yellow (= withered) leaf; -putra, m. son of Pându; -bhûma, m. pale-coloured (chalky) soil.
pātana a. felling; n. causing to fall, throwing down, casting (dice); striking off or down; dandasya --, infliction of the rod, chastisement; garbhasya -, causing a mis carriage; î-ya, fp. to be cast or shot at (lc.).
pāriṇāmika a. digestible; subject to development: with bhâva, m. natural disposition; -nâyya, n. household utensils; -nâhya, n. id.; -tosh-ika, n. reward, gratuity (token of satisfaction); -panth-ika, m. highwayman, robber; -pâtra, incorrect for -yâtra; -pârsva-ka, a. atten dant: ikâ, f. chambermaid; -pârsvika, a. standing at one's side; m. attendant: pl. retinue; -pâlya, n. governorship; -plava, a. swimming; moving to and fro, unsteady; wavering, irresolute; m. ship: -tâ, f., -tva, n. unsteadiness, caprice; -bhadra, m. coral tree (Erythrina indica); -bhâsh-ika, a. (î) technical; -mândal-ya, n. spherical shape; -mân-ya, n.circumference; -yâtra, m. N. of the western Vindhya range; -vitt-ya, n. bachelorhood while a younger brother is mar ried; -vettr-ya, n. marriage of a younger before an elder brother; -sesh-ya, n. result: ab. therefore; -shada, m. member of an as sembly or council, auditor, spectator: pl. retinue of a god; -shad-ya, m. one who takes part in an assembly, spectator; -hâr-ika, a. privileged; -hâr-ya, m. bracelet; -hâs-ya, n. jest.
puramathana m. crusher of Pura, ep. of Siva; -mârga, m. street; -raksha, -rakshin, m. town watchman, policeman; -vâsin, m. citizen; -sâsana, m. chastiser of Pura, ep. of Siva.
puroga a. going before, preceding; chief, best; m. leader: --°ree; a. having -at the head, led by, following or accompanying; at tended, filled, or inspired with; -gata, pp. standing or placed before or in front; -gama, a. going before, preceding; chief, best; m. leader: --°ree; a. having -as leader, following; accompanied by; -gava, m. (fore-bull), leader: &isharp;, f. leader; -g&asharp;, m. leader; -ganma-tâ, f. priority of birth; -ganman, a. born before; -gyotis, a. having a light before, preceded by radiance.
pulaha m. N. of an ancient Rishi, mentioned as one of the spiritual sons of Brahman, as one of the Pragâpatis, and as one of the seven Rishis; N. of a star.
pulastya m. N. of an ancient Rishi, mentioned as one of the spiritual sons of Brahman, as one of the Pragâpatis, and as one of the seven Rishis; N. of a star.
puṣya n. nourishment; flower (= uppermost or best of anything); 2. (-yã) m. the sixth lunar asterism (=the earlier term Tishya); day on which the moon is in the asterism Pushya, Pushya-day; the month Pausha (December-January); N. of various princes: -ratha, m. the asterism Pushya as a car.
pūrṇa pp. (√ 1. pri) filled, full: -kâma, a. whose wishes are fulfilled; -kumbha, m. pitcher full of water (also with apâm); m. n. breach of a particular form; a. having a full pitcher; -kandra, m. full moon: -nibha, a. resembling the full moon, -prabhâ, f. lustre of the full moon; -tâ, f. fulness; plenty; -tva, n. id.; being full of (--°ree;); -pâtrá, m., î, f. full vessel, vessel-full: also as a measure of capacity; n. present (such as clothes) given to the bringer of good news: (a)-pra tibhata, a. vying with a full vessel=over flowing, supreme (glory), -maya, a. (î) con sisting of a full vessel or of the measure called pûrna-pâtra, amounting to so much or only concerned therewith (speech); -bhadra, m. N. of a snake-demon; -mandala, n. full circle; -mânasa, a. whose heart is satisfied; (á)-mâs, m. full moon; -mâsa, m. full moon and full-moon sacrifice: î, f. day ornight of full moon; -mukha, n. full mouth: in. (blow) with full cheeks; m. (full-faced), N. of a snake-demon; -mushti, m. f. handful; -yau vana, a. being in the full bloom of youth; -ratha, m. (having a complete chariot), pre eminent warrior; -lakshmî-ka, a. having abundant splendour or wealth; -vapus, a. full-orbed (moon); -srî, a. having abundant riches.
pūra a. filling; satisfying; m. filling; satisfying; swelling of a river or of the ocean; volume of water, flood, stream (often --°ree; with words denoting water or other fluid); superabundance, high degree of (--°ree;); cake; slow inhalation of breath through the nose (an ascetic practice); -aka, a. filling, -up, completing (g. or --°ree;); fulfilling, satisfying; m. stream, effusion; multiplier; slow inspira tion of breath through the nose (an ascetic practice); citron-tree: -pinda, m. pl. flour balls for completing the sacrifice to the Manes; -ana, a. (î) filling; fulfilling, satis fying; producing; m. filler-up or completer of a number, masculine ordinal number (from dvitîya onwards); n. act of filling or filling up; complete drawing of a bow; fulfilling, satisfying; equipping: -pratyaya, m. suffix forming ordinal nouns (gr.); -anîya, fp. to be filled in or supplied; to be fulfilled or satisfied; -ayitavya, fp. to be filled up or completed; to be satisfied; -ayitri, m. filler, of (g.); fulfiller, satisfier.
paiṅgala m. pat. fr. Pi&ndot;gala; n. treatise composed by Pi&ndot;gala; -ya, n. tawny colour.
peśas n. form, figure; artistic figure, ornament, embroidery; embroidered garment.
peśala a. artistically fashioned, decorated; beautiful, charming, lovely; tender; refined; skilful, dexterous, clever, ingenious; n. beauty, charm: -tva, n. dexterity, skill; -½aksha, a. lovely-eyed: -tâ, f. abst. n.
prakara m. (scattered) heap, quantity, plenty: î, f. kind of song; short interlude (in a drama); -karana, n. production, creation; treatment, discussion, exposition; subject of discussion, topic; section, chapter; special treatise, monograph; kind of drama (in which the plot is invented by the poet): asminn eva prakarane, in regard to this very point, in this connection; na ka prakaranam vetsi, nor do you know what the point in question is: -tas, ad. on a suitable occasion, -tva, n. condition of discussing (--°ree;); -kartavya, fp. to be prepared; to be displayed or cherished; to be appointed to (lc.); -kartri, m. one who causes or occasions; -karsha, m. (preference, advantage), excellence, superiority, pre-eminence; intensity, excess; predominance; --°ree; a. consisting for the most part in: in., ab., °ree;--, highly, strongly, thoroughly; -karshana, m. troubler;n. drawing off; protrusion; extension, long duration; -karsha-vat, a. excellent; --°ree;, distinguished or pre-eminent in; -kalpanâ, f. allotment; -kalp-ita, pp. fitted, arranged, placed; -kalp-ya, to be allotted or settled; -kâ&ndot;kshâ, f. appetite; -kânda, m. n. trunk of a tree (between the root and branches); minor section in a book; --°ree;=pre-eminent, excellent; -kâmá, m. delight, voluptuousness: pl. objects of desire: -m, -tas, or°ree;--, ad. with delight, willingly; according to desire, sufficiently; in very deed; -kâra, m. kind, sort, species; way, manner; --°ree; a. of the nature of, -like: kena prakârena, in what way? how? prakâraih, in one way or another; râmâyanasya bhâratasya vâ pra kârah, a kind of Râmâyana or Mahâbhârata; -kâra-ka, a. (--°ree;) of the nature of, -like; -kâra-tâ, f. speciality; -kâra-vat, a. belonging to a species; -kârya, fp. to be exhibited; -kâlana, a. driving on; m. N. of a Nâga.
prakṛti f. (putting before, what is presupposed), original or natural form or condition (opp. vi-kriti, derivative form); nature, constitution, disposition, temper; fundamental form, pattern, standard, rule (sp. damental form, pattern, standard, rule (sp. in ritual); nature (opp. spirit: ph.): pl. material elements (rare); primary constituents of nature (from which all else is evolved: there are eight: avyakta, mahat, ahamkâra, and the five elements: ph.); constituent elements of the state (in politics: there are seven: king, minister, fortress, territory or subjects, treasure, army, and ally; kings primarily (of these there are four) and secondarily (of these there are eight) concerned in a war (each of these twelve having five prakritis in the form of minister, territory, fortress, treasure, army); constituent elements of a king's own state (exclusive of himself); ministers; subjects, citizens; sg. root, base (gr.): °ree;-or in. by nature, originally, properly; in the original state, unchanged: -ka, a. (--°ree;) id.; kripana, a. naturally feeble in discriminating between (lc.); -ga, a.innate; -purusha, m. nature and spirit (du.); minister; -bhâva, m. original or unmodified state; -mandala, n. whole circle of subjects, entire territory; -mat, a. having or being in the original, natural, or usual condition orform; -sampanna, pp. endowed with a noble nature; -subhaga, a. naturally beautiful; -stha, a. being in the natural state or condition, natural, genuine, normal; healthy; being in good circumstances.
praṇaya m. leader; guidance; mani festation, display; confidence, in (lc.); friendly regard; familiarity; affection, love; fond attachment (of lovers), display of affection; desire, longing, for (lc.): in., ab., °ree;--, and pranaya½upetam, ad. confidently, fearlessly; unreservedly, without ceremony: -kalaha, m. friendly quarrel; -nayana, n. bringing, fetching; means or vessel for fetching; mani festation, display; adduction; wielding (a weapon), infliction of punishment (danda); establishing, founding; performance, execu tion; composition (of, --°ree;); satisfying, satiat ing (--°ree;); -naya-bha&ndot;ga, m. breach of con fidence; -naya-vat,a. acting without re serve or ceremony, unaffected; tenderly at tached to (lc. or --°ree;); addicted to (--°ree;); -nay i-kriyâ, f. friendly service; -nayi-tâ, f. love, affection (for, lc.); desire, longing (for, g. or --°ree;); -nay-in,a. beloved, dear (to, g.); ten derly attached, affectionate, loving; fond of, liking, devoted to, longing for (in. or --°ree;); frequenting, dwelling or being in (--°ree;); aim ing at, having in view (--°ree;); combined orprovided with (--°ree;); m. favourite, dear friend; lover, husband: -î, f. mistress, wife; -nayî kri, attach closely: pp. connected with (in. or --°ree;); -nayî-bhû, again become attached to (lc.).
pratyagakṣa n. inner organ; a. having inner organs; -âtman, m. inward or individual soul; individual; -ânanda, a. con sisting of inward joy; -âsis, f. personal wish; a. containing a personal wish; -udak, ad. (west-northerly, i. e.) north-westerly; -eka rasa, a. having a taste for the inward, i. e. one's own soul, only; -gyotis, n. inward light; -dakshina-tas, ad. (west-southerly, i. e.) south-westerly; -dakshinâ, ad. id.: -pra vana, a. precipitous towards the south-west; -dis, f. west; -dris, f. inward gaze; a. hav ing one's gaze directed inward; -dhâman, a. having inward light.
prapitāmaha m. great grandfather; also designation of Brahman and Krishna: pl. great-grandfathers, ances tors: î, f. paternal great-grandmother; -pi trivya, m. paternal grand-uncle; -pitvá, (V.) n. going away; flight, retreat; retired spot; evening; -pitsu, des. a. desirous of plunging into (lc.); wishing to enter upon a path (ac.); -pîdana, n. pressing, squeezing; means of squeezing tumours; -purâna, a.long kept, old; -pushpita, pp. covered with blossoms, flowering; -pûraka, a. (ikâ) fulfilling, satis fying; -pûrana, a. (î) filling up (oil) and increasing (love for anything); insertion in (lc. or --°ree;); drawing of a bow;embellishment of Indra's banner; -pûrya, ps. base of √ 1. pri, be thoroughly filled or satiated; be filled to the brim.
pratuda m. pecker (a class of birds); goad; -tushti, f. satisfaction: -da, a. giving pleasure to (--°ree;); -trid, a. cleaving; -todá, m. goad; -tolî, f. broad road, main street.
pravaktavya fp. to be propounded, imparted, or taught; -vaktri, m. one who tells, imparts, or says anything (--°ree;); good speaker; teacher, propounder; originator of a story: -tva, n. condition of an instructor; -vakana, n. speaking; propounding; reciting; instruction; expression, designation; pro pounded doctrine, holy treatise, sacred scrip tures, sp. the Brâhmanas: -patu, a. skilful in speech, eloquent; -vakanîya,fp. to be propounded.
prasāda m. clearness (of water, the voice); brightness; perspicuity (of speech or style); radiance (of the countenance); calm ness (of mind), serenity; cheerfulness, good temper; kindness, graciousness, favour; help, aid; gracious gift; food offered to an idol; remnants of a preceptor's food (which may be eaten without scruple): -m kri, be gra cious, show favour; grant the favour of (inf. or --°ree;); -sâda-ka, a. making clear, clarifying; cheering, gladdening; -sâdana, a. (î) making clear, clarifying; n. making clear, clarification; soothing, calming, tranquillizing; rendering cheerful; gratifying; propitiation; -sâdanîya, fp. to be propitiated; -sâda-parâ&ndot;mukha, a. (î) indifferent to any one's favour; with drawing one's favour from (g.); -sâda-bhû mi, f. object of favour, favourite; -sâdayi tavya, fp. to be rendered propitious towards (upari); -sâda-vitta: -ka, a. abounding in favour, standing high in the favour of (g. or --°ree;); m. favourite; -sâda½antara, n. another mark of favour; -sâdita, cs. pp. (√ sad) pleased, propitiated, well-satisfied; -sâdin, a. bright (eye, face); clear (neetar); perspi cuous; cheering, gladdening; -sâdî-kri, grant (ac.) as a favour to (g.), graciously present; -sâdya, 1. cs. gd. having ap peased, pleased, or propitiated; 2. fp. to be propitiated; -sâdhaka, a. (ikâ) adorn ing; m. dresser, valet; f. (ikâ) lady's maid; -s&asharp;dhana, a. accomplishing; n. ac complishment; putting in order, arranging; embellishment, personal adornment, toilet; means of decoration, toilet requisites; orna ment of (--°ree;): î, f. comb; -sâdhita, pp. ac complished; decorated; -sâra, m. spreading or stretching out, extension; rising, whirling up (of dust); opening; -sârana, n. stretch ing out, extending; development; extension, diffusion, augmentation; vocalization of a semivowel (gr.); -sâranin, a. containing a semivowel liable to vocalization (gr.); -sâr ita, cs. pp. (√ sri) extended, expanded, dif fused; stretched forth, exposed for sale; -sârin, a. breaking forth, issuing from (--°ree;); stretching oneself out; extending to (--°ree;); -sârya, 1. cs. gd. having extended or put forth; 2. fp. to be vocalized (semivowel).
prasakala a. very full (bosom); -sakta, pp. √ sañg: °ree;-or -m, ad. incessantly; -saktavya, fp. to be attached to (lc.); -sak ti, f. attachment, devotion, or addiction to, indulgence in, occupation with (lc.), occur rence of a case; bearing, applicability; practicableness: -m pra-yâ, be practicable; -sa&ndot;ktavya, fp. to be allowed to occur; -sa&ndot;khyâ, f. sum total; consideration; -sam khyâna, n. enumeration; reflexion, medita tion; fame, reputation; -sa&ndot;ga, m. attach ment, inclination; fondness for, addiction to; indulgence in (lc. or --°ree;); gratification, of (g.); association or intercourse with (--°ree;); illicit pursuit; applicability; contingency; opening, opportunity, occasion; connexion (pl. all that is connected with or results from anything): in. assiduously, with one's whole soul; in the course of (--°ree;); occasionally, in cidentally (also ab., °ree;--, or -tas); amunâ or tat-prasa&ndot;gena, on that occasion; etat prasa&ndot;ge, on this occasion; prasa&ndot;ge ku tra½api, on a certain occasion: -vat, a. occa sional, incidental, -vinivritti, f. non-recur rence of a contingency, prevention of the re currence; -sa&ndot;gin, a. attached or devoted to (--°ree;); connected with anything; contin gent, occurring; secondary, unessential; -sag ya, fp. applicable: -tâ, f. -ness,-pratishe dha, m. negative form of an applicable (posi tive) statement: -tva, n. abst. n.; -satti, f. graciousness; favour, complacency; -sam dhâna, n. combination, union; -sanna, pp. (√ sad) clear; bright; pleased, soothed, de lighted; complacent; gracious, propitious, kindly disposed; plain (meaning); distinct (impression); correct (supposition): -tâ, f. clearness, purity; brightness; perspicuity; complacence, good humour, -tva, n.clearness, brightness, -mukha, a. of a placid counte nance, looking pleased, -salila, a. having clear water; -sabha, °ree;-or -m, ad. forcibly; violently; exceedingly, very much; importu nately: -damana, n. forcible subjugation; -sara, m. advance; diffusion, expansion, ex tension; range; issue (of smoke); free scope, ample space; motion (of the eye); appear ance, manifestation; prevalence, influence; stream, flood; multitude, quantity: -na, n. running away, escaping; coming into force; complaisance, amiability; -sárga (or á), m. gushing forth; dismissal; -sárpana, n. going forward, advancing; betaking oneself to (lc.); -sarpin, a. issuing from (--°ree;); slinking away.
prākṛta a. (â, î) connected with nature (prakriti), natural, original; unal tered; usual, ordinary, common; low, vul gar; proceeding from or relating to nature (phil.); Prâkritic; m. low orvulgar man, n. vernacular dialect (derived from Sanskrit and spoken by women and inferior charac ters in Sanskrit plays), Prâkrit: -bhâshin, a. speaking Prâkrit, -sâsana, n. treatise on Prâkrit, -kandrikâ, f. Moonlight of Prâkrit, T. of Vararuki's Prâkrit grammar, -pra kâsa, m. Illustration of Prâkrit, id.
prāggṅgam ad. on the east of the Ganges; -gamana-vat, a. going forward; -gâmin, a. preceding or intending to precede; -guna, a. having the previously mentioned quality; -grîva, a.having the neck directed eastward; -ganman, n. previous birth or existence; -gâta, (pp.) n., -gâti, f. previous existence; -gyotish-a, a. lighted from the east; relating to the city of Prâggyotisha; m. prince or country of Prâggyotisha: pl. inhabitants of--; n. N. of a city supposed to have been inhabited by the demon Naraka; -dakshina, a. (east-southern, i.e.) south-east ern: â, f. south-east; â, ad. south-easterly: -pravana, a. sloping towards the south-east; -desa, m. eastern country; -daihika, a. be longing to a former life; -dvâr, f. door facing east; -dvâra, n. id.; space in front of a door; a. having a door facing eastward; -bhâra, m. [having the weight in front, inclined], de clivity; inclination; (subsiding) mass, great quantity; -bhâva, m. previous existence.
prātikāmin m. (acting ac cording to one's desire: prati-kâmam), ser vant; messenger; -kûlika, a. (î) resisting, hostile, contrary: -tâ, f. opposition, hostility; -kûlya, n. unfriendliness, opposition; repug nant practice; disagreeableness; disagree ment with (--°ree;); -gña, n. subject under dis cussion; -daivas-ika, a. occurring daily (prati-divasam); -nidhi-ka, m. representa tive; -paksha, a. belonging to the enemy oradversary; -pakshya, n. hostility, enmity, towards (g.); -pada, a. forming the com mencement; m. N.; -pad-ika, a. express, ex plicit; n. crude base of a noun (before it re ceives the case terminations or other suffixes); -paurush-ika, a. relating to manliness or valour; -bha, a. intuitive; n. intuition; pre sence of mind; -bhat-ya, n. rivalry; -bhâv ya, n. surety, for (--°ree;); certainty, trustworthy news of (g.); -bhâs-ika, a. existing only in appearance, apparent only; -rûp-ika, a. coun terfeit, spurious; using false measure or coun terfeit coin; -lom-ya, n. inversion, inverse order; opposition, hostility; -ves-ika, m. neighbour; -vesm-ika, m. neighbour: î, f.female neighbour; -ves-ya, a. neighbouring; m. opposite neighbour; neighbour;--°ree;=neigh bouring: -ka, m. neighbour; -sâkhya, n. a grammatical treatise on the phonetic changes of words in the text of the Vedasaccording to the respective recension (prati-sâkham; there are four such treatises, one for the RV., two for the YV., and one for the AV.); -satvanam, ad. in the direction of the Sat van; -sv-ika, a. own, peculiar, not common to others; -hata, m. kind of svarita ac cent; -hartra, n. office of the Pratihartri; -hârika, m. door-keeper; -hâr-ya, n. jug glery, performance of miracles; miracle.
prāyaścitta n. [thought of death], atonement, expiation, penance; amends, satis faction; -kitti, f. id.; a. expiating (Agni); -kittin, a. making atonement; -kittîya, 1. den. Â. be bound to perform penance; 2. a. serving as an atonement; bound to perform penance: -tâ, f. liability to perform a pe nance; -ketana, n. expiation, atonement.
prīṇana a. pleasing, soothing; n. delectation, satisfaction; means of satis fying etc.
prīti f. satisfaction, gratification, joy, delight, pleasure (in or at, lc. or --°ree;); kindly feeling, favour; friendship, with (sa mam or --°ree;); affection, love, or fondness for (g., lc., --°ree;); Joy(personified, esp. as the daughter of Daksha and as one of the wives of Kâma): in. joyfully; in a friendly way; affectionately: -kara, a. giving satisfaction to, pleasing (--°ree;); -karman, n. act of love, friendlyaction; -kûta, N. of a village; -datta, pp. given through affection or love; -dâna, n. gift of love; -dâya, m. id.; -dhana, n. money given through friendship; -pûrva kam, ad. kindly, affectionately; -pramukha, a. kindly (speech); -mat, a. glad; satisfied; feeling love or friendship for (g. or lc.); kind (word); -maya, a. produced by joy; -yug, a. beloved, dear; -rasâyana, n. elixir of joy; -vakas, n. kind or friendly words; -vardhana, m. (increaser of joy), N. of the fourth month; -visrambha-bhâgana, n. re pository of affection and confidence; -sam gati, f. friendly alliance with (in.).
baddha pp. (√ bandh) bound, etc.: -ka, m. prisoner (V.); -kadambaka, a. forming groups; -kalâpin, a. having his quiver tied on; -graha, a. insisting on something; -kitta, a. having one's thoughts fixed on (lc.); -trishna, a. longing for (--°ree;); -drishti, a. having one's gaze fixed on (lc.); -dvesha, a. entertaining hatred for any one; -niskaya, a. firmly resolved; -netra, a. having the eyes fixed on anything, gazing steadfastly; -pratigña, a. having made a promise; -pratisrut, a. echoing; -bhâva, m. having the affections fixed on, enamoured of (lc.); -bhîma½andhakâra, a. wrapped in terrible gloom; -mandala, a. having circles formed, ranged in circles; -mushti, a. having the fist elenched; close-fisted; -mûla, a. having taken root, firmly rooted; having gained a firm footing: -tâ, f. firm footing; -mauna, a. observing silence; -rabhasa, a.impetuous, passionate; -râga, a. having one's desire fixed on, enamoured of (lc.); -râgga, a. hav ing gained the sovereignty, having succeeded to the throne; -laksha, a. having the gaze fixed on, gazing steadfastly at (--°ree;); -vasati, a. having one's abode fixed in, dwelling in (lc.); -vâk, a. obstructing speech; -vepathu, a. trembling; -vaira, a. having contracted hostility with (in. or --°ree;); -sikha, a. having one's hair tied in a top-knot;-srotra-manas- kakshus, a. having ears, mind, and eyes fixed on (lc.); -sneha, a. entertaining affection for (lc.); -spriha, a. feeling a longing for (--°ree;); -½añgali, a. holding one's hands joined together (in supplication or as a mark of respect); -½âdara, a. attaching great value to (--°ree;); -½ânanda, a. having joy attaching to it, joyful (day); -½anurâga, a. conceiving an attachment, enamoured; -½anusaya, a. con ceiving an unconquerable hatred; -½andha kâra, a. wrapped in darkness; -½avasthiti, a. constant; -½âsa, a. entertaining hope of (--°ree;); -½âsa&ndot;ka, a. conceiving anxiety; -½ut sava, a. entering upon a festival; -½udyama,a. making efforts or prepared to (inf.).
bahiraṅga a. external; unessen tial: -tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -argala, --°ree;, a. external bolt; -artha, m. external object; -gata, pp. come forth: -tva, n. appearance; -giri, m. (country beyond the hills), N. of a country: pl. N. of a people; -geham, ad. outside the house; -grâmam, ad. outside the village; -grâma-pratisraya, a. dwelling outside the village; -dris, a. looking at the outside, superficial (person); -dvâra, n. outer door; space outside the door; -dvârin, a. being outside the door; -dh&asharp;, ad. prp. with ab. outside, away from (V.); -nirgamana, n. going out of (ab.); -nihsarana, n. taking out, removal; -bhava, a.external; -bhâga, m. exterior; -mandala-stha, a. being out side the circle; -mukha, a. issuing from the mouth; averting one's face, averse from (--°ree;); having one's mind outward, i.e. directed to wards the external world; -yâna, n. going out; (ír)-loma, a. having the hair turned outwards; -loman, a. id.; -vâsas, n. upper garment; -vikâram, ad. apart from indi vidual existence (Sâmkhya ph.); -vritti, f. occupation with external matters; -vedi, 1. f. space outside the Vedi; 2. ad. (í) outside the Vedi; -vedi-ka, a. being outside the Vedi.
bāhucyuta pp. fallen or dropped from the arm or hand; (u)-tarana, n. cross ing with the arms, i. e. swimming across a river; (ú)-tâ, ad. in the arms (V.); (u)-dan- da, m. long arm; -danta-ka, a. with sâstra, n. N. of a treatise on jurisprudence abridged by Indra; -dant-in, m. ep. of Indra: (-i) putra, m. Indra's son (as the author of a Tantra); -pâsa, m. fetter of the arms, encircling arms; a certain attitude in fighting; -prasâra, m. extension of the arms; -bandhana, n. clasped or encircling arms; -bala, n. strength of arm; m. (Arm-strong), N.; -balín, a. strong-armed; -madhya, a. middle most with the arms: â-ni karmâni=actions with the arms are intermediate; -mûla, n. root of the arm, shoulder; -yuddha, n. hand to hand fight, pugilistic encounter; -yodha, -yodhin, m. pugilist.
bṛhaduktha a. far-praised; m. a certain Agni; N.; (-ád)-diva, a. belong ing to high heaven, heavenly; m. N. of a son of Atharvan and composer of RV. X, 120; the hymn composed by Brihaddiva; -devatâ, f. Index of the many gods (of the RV.), title of an Anukramanî ascribed to Saunaka; -dyuti, a. shining brightly; (-ád)-bhânu, a. of great brilliance; m. a certain Agni; N.; -rathá, m. (having a great chariot), mighty hero (RV.1); (-ád)-rátha, m. N.; -ratham tara, n. du. the Sâmans Brihat and Ratham tara; (-ád)-rayi, a. having abundant wealth (RV.1); -vrata, n. the great vow of chastity; a. practising the great vow of chastity.
brahmaloka m. world or heaven of Brahman (sts. pl.); -laukika, a. inhabit ing the world of Brahman; -vaktri, m. ex pounder of the Vedas; -vat, ad. in accord ance with or like the Veda; -vadya, n.recitation of Vedic texts; -vadha, m. mur der of a Brâhman; -vadhyâ, f. id.: -krita, n. perpetrated murder of a Brâhman; -vark asá, n. pre-eminence in sacred knowledge, sanctity; -varkas-in, a. pre-eminent in di vine knowledge, holy; -varkas-vin, a. id.; -vâdá, m. discourse on sacred matters; -vâd ín, a. discoursing on sacred matters; m. theologian, Vedântin; -vâsa, m. Brahman's abode or heaven; (bráhma)-vâhas, a. to whom prayer is offered; -vit-tva, n. sacred knowledge, theology, philosophy; -víd, a. knowing the Vedas; versed in magic; m. theologian, philosopher; -vidy&asharp;, f. knowledge of Brahman or of sacred things; -vidvas, pt. knowing Brahman; -vivardhana, a. increas ing sacred knowledge, ep. of Vishnu; -vrik sha, m. Brahman as a tree; -vritti, f. sub sistence of a Brâhman; -veda, m. Veda of Spells, Atharva-veda; -vedi, f. N. of a local ity; -vedin, a.knowing the Brahman or the Vedas; -vaivarta: -ka, n. T. of a Purâna; -vrata, n. vow of chastity: -dhara, a. prac tising --; -sâyin, a. resting in Brahman; -sâlâ, f. Brahman's hall; N. of a sacred locality; -siras, -sîrshan, n. kind of mythi cal missile; -samsad, f. Brahman's audience chamber; -samstha, a. devoted to sacred things; -samhitâ, f. collection of prayers; -sattra, n. sacrifice of prayer; -sattrin, a. offering a sacrifice of prayer; -sadana, n. seat of the Brahman priest; abode or heaven of Brahman; -sabhâ, f. hall or audience chamber of Brahman; -sambhava, a. sprung from Brahman; -saras, n. N. of a bathing place; -savá, m. purification of prayer; kind of sacrificial rite; -sât-kri, bring into har mony with Brahman; -sâmá, -sâmán, n. Sâman chanted after a verse recited by the Brahman priest; -sâyugya, n. complete union or identification with the universal soul; -sârshti-tâ, f. equality with Brahman; -sâ varna, m. N. of the tenth Manu; -sâvarni, m. id.; -siddhânta, m. T. of various astrono mical works; -siddhi, m. N. of an ascetic; -suta, m. son of Brahman; -suvarkalâ, f. kind of plant; decoction of this plant (drunk as a penance); -sûtra, n. sacred cord worn by Brâhmans over the shoulder; sacred or theological Sûtra; T. of a Sûtra work on the Vedânta philosophy ascribed to Bâdarâyana or Vyâsa: -pada, n. statement of a theolo gical Sûtra; a. (î) consisting of the state ments of a theological Sûtra; -sûtrin, a. wearing the sacred cord; -srig, m. creator of Brahman, ep. of Siva; -soma, m. N. of a saint; -stamba, m. universe, world; -stena, m. (thief of=) one in unlawful possession of the Veda; -steya, n. (theft of=) unlawful acquisition of the Veda; -sthala, n. N. of a town and of various villages; -sva, n. pro perty of a Brâhman; -haty&asharp;, f. murder of a Brâhman; -hán, m. murderer of a Brâhman; -hridaya, m. n. N. of a star (Capella).
brahmaṇvat a. accom panied by prayer, devout; practising a holy work and having a Brâhman; accompanied by or representing the priesthood; contain ing the word Brahman.
brahma m. priest (only --°ree; with asura-); n. metrical for brahman, the Absolute: -ka, --°ree; a.=brahman, m. the god Brahman; -kara, m. tribute paid to Brâhmans; -karman, n. function of a Brâhman; office of the Brah man priest; -karma-samâdhi, a. intent on Brahman in action; -kalpa, a. resembling Brahman; m. age or cosmic period of Brahman (a primaeval age); -kânda, n. the Brahman section=the dogmatic part of the scriptures; T. of a work or part of a work by Bhartri hari; -kilbishá, n. sin against Brâhmans (RV.1); -kûrka, n. a kind of penance in which the five products of the cow are eaten (=pañka-gavya); -krít, a. offering prayers; (bráhma)-kriti, f. prayer, devotion; -kosá, m. treasury of prayer; -kshatra, n. sg. & du. Brâhmans and nobles: -sava, m. pl. sacri fices offered by Brâhmans and Kshatriyas; -kshetra, n. N. of a sacred locality; -gav&isharp;, f. cow of a Brâhman; -gîtikâ, f. Brahman's song, N. of certain verses; -gupta, m. N. of a son of Brahman; N. of an astronomer born 598 a. d.; N.; -gola, m. universe; -ghât aka, m.Brâhman-killer; -ghâtin, m. id.: -î, f. woman on the second day of her menses; -ghosha, m. murmur of prayer (sts. pl.); sacred word, Veda (coll.): -rava, m. sound of murmured prayer; -ghna, m. Brâhman slayer; -ghnî,f. of -han, q. v.; -kakra, n. Brahman's wheel; kind of mystical circle; -kárya, n. religious study; religious student ship (of a Brâhman youth, passed in celibacy, being the first stage in the religious life of a Brâhman); sp.self-restraint, continence, chastity: -m upa½i, -â-gam, grah, kar, or vas, practise chastity: â, f. chastity, a-tva, n. continence, chastity, -vat, a. practising chastity, -½âsrama, m. order of religious stu dentship; -kârín, a. (n-î) practising sacred knowledge; sp. practising continence or chas tity; m. religious student; -kâri-vâsa, m. living as a religious student; -kâri-vrata, n. vow of chastity; -ganman, n. Veda-birth, regeneration by sacred knowledge; -gîvin, a. subsisting by sacred knowledge; -gña, a. knowing the scriptures or Brahman; -gñâna, n. knowledge of the Veda or of Brahman; -gyá, a. oppressing Brâhmans; -gyotis, n. splendour of Brahman; a.having the splen dour of Brahman or of the Veda.
bhikṣāka m. beggar; -karana, n. begging, mendicancy; -kara, m. N. of a son of Bhoga; -karana, n. mendicancy: -m kar, go about begging; -kárya, n. id.: -m kar, go about begging: â, f. id.; -karya-karana, n. id.; -kâra, a. practising mendi cancy; m. beggar; -½atana, n. wandering about begging, mendicancy: -m kri, beg; -m kâr aya, force any one (ac.) to go begging; -½anna, n. food obtained by begging; -pâtra, n.begging-bowl, alms-dish; -prakâra, m. going forth to beg; -bhânda, n. begging bowl; -bhug, a. living on alms; -½ayana, n. mendicancy; -½arthin, a. begging for charity; m. beggar; -vat, a. receiving charity, beg ging; -vritti, a. subsisting on alms; -½âsi tva, n. eating of begged food, living on alms; -½âsin, a. eating begged food, living on alms; -½âhâra, m. begged food; a. living on alms; m. beggar.
bhūr indec. [vc. of bhû, O earth], one of the three vyâhritis in the formula bh&usharp;r bhúvah svãh, where it is taken to mean earth; when fourteen earths are assumed it is the first of the ascending series of seven.
bhṛśa a. [falling, weighty: √ bhras] mighty, powerful; intense (pain); excessive, rigorous (punishment); abundant (food): -m or °ree;--, exceedingly, violently, greatly, in a high degree, very much; without hesitation: -tâ, f. violence; -danda, a. chastising rigor ously (lc.); -dâruna, a. very terrible; -duh khita, pp. greatly afflicted; -pîdita, pp. exceedingly distressed; -svid, a. perspiring profusely.
bhaikṣacaraṇa n. going about begging: -m kri, practise mendicancy; -karya, n., -karyâ, f. id.; -bhug, a. living on alms.
maṅgala n. [brightness: √ mañg] luck, fortune, happiness, bliss (sts. pl.); prosperity, welfare; auspiciousness; good omen, whateverconduces to an auspicious issue; benediction, blessing; auspicious or lucky object, amulet; solemn ceremony, auspicious festivity (on important occasions); good old custom; good work; a. auspicious, propitious; m. planet Mars; N.: -karana, n. uttering a prayer for theauspicious issue of an undertaking; -ka lasa-maya, a. consisting of festal jars; -kâr aka, a. productive of prosperity, auspicious; -kâla, m. auspicious time; -kshauma, n. du. two festal garments (upper and lower) of linen; -gâthikâ, f. solemn chant; -gîta, n. id.; -ghata, m. N. of an elephant; -kand ikâ, f. a form of Durgâ; -tûrya, n. musical instrument used on festive occasions: -nisva na, m. sound of auspicious musical instruments; -devatâ, f. tutelary deity (only --°ree;); -pattra, n. leaf used as an amulet; -pâthaka, m. pronouncer of benedictions, professional panegyrist; -pâtra, n. auspicious pot or vessel (containing propitious objects); -pura, n. N. of a town; -pushpa-maya, a. made of auspicious flowers (garland); -pra tisara, m. cord of an amulet; -prada, a. auspicious; -maya, a. (î) consisting of no thing but luck etc.; -vat-î, f. N.; -vâdin, a. pronouncing a blessing; -vrishabha, m. bull with auspicious marks; -sabda, m. benediction, greeting; -sûkaka, a. indicative of good luck, auspicious.
manaḥkṣepa m. mental confusion; -pûta, pp. mentally pure; -prasâda, m. mental calm or composure; -priya, a. dear to the heart; -prîti, f. mental satisfaction, delight.
mahāpakṣa a. having many ad herents, having a large following; -pa&ndot;ka, n. (?) deep mud; -pa&ndot;kti, f. a metre of forty-eight syllables; -pandita, a. extremely learned; m. great scholar; -patha, m. prin cipal street; high road; the great journey, pilgrimage to the other world (-m yâ, die); a certain hell; a. having a great path: -giri, m. N. of a mountain; -padma, n. a certain high number; m. one of the eight treasures connected with the magic art padminî; N. of a Nâga: -pati, m. lord of millions, ep. of Nanda, -saras, n. N. of a lake, -salila, n. id.; -padya-shatka, n. T. of a poem (at tributed to Kâlidâsa) consisting of six classi cal verses; -½aparâdha, m. great crime or injury; -parvata, m. high mountain; -pasu, m. large cattle; -pâta, m. long flight; a. flying far (arrow); -pâtaka, n. great crime or sin (of which there are five: killing a Brâhman, drinking spirituous liquor, theft, adultery with a teacher's wife, and asso ciation with persons guilty of those four crimes); -pâtakin, a. guilty of a capital sin; -pâtra, n. prime minister; -pâda, a. large footed; -pâpa, n.great crime; -pâpman, a. very harmful; -pâra, 1. m. a certain per sonification; 2. a. having distant banks, wide (sea); -pârsva, a. having broad sides (leech); N.; -pâsupata, a. with vrata, n. the great vow of a worshipper of Siva Pasupati; m. zealous worshipper of Siva Pasupati; -pîtha, n. high seat; -pumsa, m. great man; -punya, a. very auspicious (day); very good or beau tiful; very holy; -purá, n. great fortress: î, f. great citadel; -purusha, m. great or eminent man; supreme spirit; -pûta, pp. extremely pure; -prishtha, a. broad-backed; -pai&ndot;gya, n. T. of a Vedic text; -prakarana, n. main treatment of a subject; -pragâpati, m. great lord of creatures, ep. of Vishnu; -pratâpa, m. of great dignity, majestic; -pratîhâra, m. head janitor; -pradâna, n. great gift; -prapañka, m. the great world; -prabha, a. of great lustre, very splendid; -prabhâ, f. great brightness;-prabhâva, a. very mighty; -prabhu, m. great lord, sovereign; chief; ep. of Vishnu; -pramâna, a. very exten sive; -pralaya, m. great dissolution of the universe at the end of a cosmic age: -kâla, m. time of the --; -prasna,m. great or im portant question; -prasâda, m. great pre sent; a. very gracious; -prasthâna, n. great departure, decease; -prâgña, a. very wise or prudent (person); -prâna, m. hard breath ing, aspirate sound; great strength; a. pro nounced with a hard breathing, aspirated; of great endurance or physical strength; -plava, m. great flood, deluge; -phala, n. large fruit; great reward; a. producing a great reward; -bala, a. very strong, power ful, or effective; m. N.; -bâdha, a. very in jurious; -bâhu, a. long-armed, strong-armed; m. ep. of Vishnu; N.; -bila, n. deep hole; -buddhi, a. of great intellect, extremely clever; m. N. of an Asura; N.; -brihatî, f. a metre (8+8+8+8+12 syllables); -brah ma: -n, m. the great Brahman (the god); -brâhmaná, m. great Brâhman (also used sarcastically); n. Great (=Tândya) Brâh mana; -bhata, m. great warrior; N.; -bha ya, n. great danger or straits; -bhâga, a. having great good fortune, very lucky, greatly blessed; greatly distinguished, very illus trious (frequently used as a term of address); -bhâgin, a. very fortunate, greatly blessed; -bhâgya, n.high position, great importance or power; a. extremely fortunate: -tâ, f. great good fortune; -bhânda½agâra, n. chief treasury; -bhârata, a. (± a word meaning &open;battle&close;), the Great Battle of the Bharatas; n.(± âkhyâna), the Great Story of the Bharatas, T. of the well-known great Epic (which contains about 100,000 slokas); -bhâshya, n. the Great Commentary of Patañgali on the Sûtras of Pânini and the Vârttikas of Kâtyâyana (probably composed in the second century b. c.); -bhikshu, m. the great mendicant, ep. of Sâkyamuni; -½abhi- gana, m. high descent, noble birth; -½abhi yoga, m. great plaint or charge; -½abhishava, m. N. of a prince; -½abhisheka, m. great inauguration; T. of the fourteenth Lambaka of the Kathâsaritsâgara; -bhîta, pp. greatly terrified; -½abhîsu, a. brilliant, lustrous; -bhuga, a. long-armed; -bhûta, pp. being great, large (E.); m. great creature; n. gross element (ether, air, fire, water, earth); -bhû mi, f. great realm; whole territory (of a king); -½âbhoga, a. of great extent, wide spreading; -bhoga, 1. a. having great coils (serpent); m. serpent; -bhoga, 2. m. great enjoyment; -bhoga, m. great prince; -½abhra, n. great or thick cloud; -makha, m. great sacrifice (=-yagña); -mani, m. costly jewel; -mati, a. of great wit, clever; m. N.; (&asharp;) manas, a. lofty-minded, proud, haughty; high-minded, magnanimous; -manushya, m. great man, man of rank; -mantra, m. very efficacious spell (esp. against snake-poison); -mantrin, m. chief counsellor, prime minister; -mahá, a. high and mighty (RV.); -mah as, n. great luminary; -mahiman, m. true greatness; a. truly great; -mahima-sâlin, a. possessed of true greatness; -mahâ½upâ dhyâya, m. very great preceptor (a desig nation applied to great scholars, e.g. Malli nâtha); -mâmsa, n. delicious flesh (esp. human flesh); -½amâtya, m. prime minister; -mâtra, a. of great measure, great; greatest, best (of, --°ree;); m. man of high rank, high state official, king's minister; elephant-driver; -mânin, a. extremely proud; -mâya, a. at tended with great deception; practising great deception; m. N.; -mâyâ, f. the great illu sion (which makes the world appear really existent and thus in a sense creates it); -mây ûra, n. a kind of medicine; kind of prayer (--°ree;); -mârga, m. main road: -pati, m. chief inspector of roads; -mâhesvara, m. great worshipper of Mahesvara or Siva; -mukha,n. large mouth (also of rivers); a. (î) large mouthed; -muni, m. great sage; -mûdha, a. very stupid; m. great simpleton; -mûrkha, m. great fool; -mûrdhan, a. large-headed (Siva); -mriga, m. large wild animal; ele phant;-mridha, n. great battle; -megha, m. great or dense cloud; -medha, m. great sacrifice; (&asharp;)-meru, m. the great Mount Meru; -moha, m. great mental confusion or infatuation; -mohana, a. causing great men tal confusion; -moha-mantra, m. very effi cacious spell: -tva, n. abst. n.; -yaksha, m. great Yaksha, prince of the Yakshas; -yag- ñá, m. great or chief sacrifice (one of the five daily sacrifices of the householder, called bhûta-, manushya-, pitri-, deva-, and brah ma-yagña); -yantra, n. great mechanical work: -pravartana, n. execution of great mechanical works; -yama-ka, n. a great Yamaka (a stanza, all the four lines of which contain identically the same words but differ in meaning, e.g. Kirâtârgunîya XV, 52); -yasas, a. very famous, illustrious (person); -yâna, n. the Great Vehicle (a later form of Buddhistic doctrine originated by Nâgâr guna: opp.hîna-yâna); N. of a prince of the fairies (having a great car); -yuga, n. a great Yuga (equal to four ordinary Yugas or 4,320,000 years); -yuddha, n. great battle; -½âyudha, a. bearing great weapons (Siva); -ragana, n.saffron; a. coloured with saffron; -rana, m. great battle; -½aranya, n. great forest; -ratna, n. precious jewel: -maya, a. consisting of costly jewels, -vat, a. adorned with costly jewels; -rathá, m. great chariot; great warrior; N.; -rathyâ, f. main road; -½ârambha, m. great under taking; a. enterprising, active; -rava, m. great roar or yell; a. making a loud noise, shouting loud; m. N.; -rasa, a. extremely savoury; -râgá, m. great king, reigning prince, sovereign: -½adhirâga, m. lord of great kings, emperor; -râgñî, f. reigning princess, queen; ep. of Durgâ; -râgya, n. sovereign rule; -râtra, n. advanced time of night, end of the night; -râtri, f. id.; great night follow ing the dissolution of the world; -râva, m. loud yell; -râshtra, m. pl. the Mahrattas: î, f. Mahratta language, Mahrattî: a-ka, a. (ikâ) belonging to the Mahrattas; m. pl. the Mahrattas; -rug, -ruga, a. very painful; -roga, m. dangerous disease; -roman, a. very hairy (Siva); -raudra, a. extremely terrible; -½argha, a. of great price, precious, valuable; expensive: -tâ, f. preciousness, great value, -rûpa, a. having a splendid form; -½arghya, a. precious, valuable: -tâ, f. preciousness; -½arnava, m. great sea, ocean; -½artha, m. great matter; a. having great wealth, rich; of great significance, important; m. N. of a Dânava; -½arha, a.valuable, costly, splen did; -lakshmî, f. the Great Lakshmî, Nârâ yana's Sakti; also=Durgâ or Sarasvatî; -li&ndot;ga, n. a great Li&ndot;ga; -vamsya, a. of high lineage; -vanig, m. great merchant; -vada, m. great teacher (i.e. of the most essential Vedic knowledge); (&asharp;)-vadha, a. having a mighty weapon (RV.); -vana, n. great forest; -varâha, m. great boar (i.e. Vishnu's incarnation as a boar); N. of a prince; -vallî, f. great creeper; -vâkya, n. long composition, literary work; great pro position; -vâta, m. violent wind, gale; -vâyu, m. id.; -vârttika, n. the Great Vârttika, N. of Kâtyâyana's Vârttikas to the Sûtras of Pânini; -vâstu, n. great space; a. occupy ing a great space; -vikrama, a. of great courage, very valiant; m. N. of a lion; -vighna, m. n. great obstacle; -vigña, a. very sensible; -vidagdha, pp. very clever; -viraha, m. grievous separation; -visha,a. very poisonous; -vistara, a. very prolix (book); -vîki, m. (having great waves), a certain hell; -vîrá, m. great hero; large earthenware fire-pot (mostly used at the Pravargya cere mony); N. of various princes; N. of an Arhat, founder of the Jain sect: -karita, n. life of the great hero (Râma), T. of a play by Bhavabhûti, -karitra, n. life of Mahâ vîra (the Arhat), T. of a work; (&asharp;)-vîrya, a. mighty, very potent; -vrikshá, m. great tree; -vriddha, pp. very aged; -vrishá, m. great bull: pl. N. of a people in the western Himâlayas; -vega, a. greatly agitated (sea); very swift; -vaipulya, n. great extent; -vaira, n. great enmity; -vairâga, n. N. of a Saman;-vyâdhi, m. serious disease; -vyâhriti, f. the great exclamation (i.e. bh&usharp;r bhúvah svãh); -vratá, n. great or fundamental duty; great vow; great religious observance; N. of a Sâ man or Stotra to be chanted on the last day but one of the Gavâmayana (also applied to the day and the ceremony); rules of the worshippers of Siva Pasupati; a. having undertaken great duties or a great vow, practising great aus terity, very devotional; following the rules of the Pâsupatas; m. a Pâsupata; -vratika, a. following the rules of the Pâsupatas; m. a Pâsupata; -vratin, a., m., id.; a. practis ing the five fundamental duties of the Jains; -vratîya, a. relating to the Mahâvrata cere mony (day); -vrîhi, m. large rice; -sakti, a. very mighty (Siva); -sa&ndot;kha, m. great conch; -½asana, a. eating much, voracious (leech); m. great eater, glutton; -½asani dhvaga, m. flag with a great thunderbolt; -sabda, m. loud sound; title beginning with &open;mahâ&close; or the corresponding office; -½âsaya, 1. m. ocean; 2. a. high-minded, noble; -sayyâ, f. splendid couch; -sarîra, a. having a large body; -salka,m. kind of sea-crab; -salkalin, a. having large scales (fish); -sastra, n. mighty weapon; -sâka, n. kind of vegetable; -sâkya, m. great or distinguished Sâkya; -sânti, f. great appeasement (a kind of rite to avert evil);(&asharp;)-sâla, possessor of a great house, great householder; -sâlîna, a. very modest; -sâsana, n. great sway; a. exer cising great sway; -siras, a. large-headed; m. kind of serpent; -sûdra, m. Sûdra in a high position, upper servant; -saila, m. great rock or mountain; -½asman, m. precious stone; -smâsâna, n. large cemetery; ep. of Benares; -srotriya, m. great theologian or spiritual teacher; -½asva, m. N.: -sâlâ, f. great stable; office of head groom; -svetâ, f. N. of a god dess; N.; -samkata, n. great danger or straits; -satî, f. extremely faithful wife, pattern of wifely fidelity; -sattrá, n. great Soma sacrifice; -sattva, m. great creature; a. strong-minded; high-minded, noble; very courageous; containing large animals: -tâ, f. strength of character and containing large animals; -½âsana, n. splendid seat; -samdhi- -vigraha, m. office of chief minister of peace and war; -sabhâ, f. great dining hall; -samudra, m. ocean; -sarga, m. great crea tion (after a great dissolution); -sâdhana bhâga, m. head of the executive; -sâdhu, a. extremely good: v-î, f. pattern of wifely fidelity; -sâmtâpana,m. kind of penance; -sâmdhi-vigrah-ika, m. chief minister of peace and war; -sâmânya, n. generality in the widest sense; -sâra, a. strong; valuable, costly; -sârtha, m. great caravan; -sâhas ika, a. very daring, excessively rash; m. highwayman, robber: -tâ, f. great energy: in. with the utmost decision; -simha, m. great lion; N.; -siddha, (pp.) m. great saint; -siddhânta, m. great manual of as tronomy, T. of a work by Âryabhata the younger; -siddhi, f. great magical power; -subhiksha, n. great abundance of provisions, very good times (pl.); -sûkta, n. great hymn: pl. the great hymns of the tenth book of the Rig-veda (1 to 128); m. composer of the great hymns of RV. X; -sûkshma, a. extremely minute; -sûki, a. w. vyûha, m. kind of array of troops in battle; (&asharp;)-sena, a. having a large army; m. ep. of Skanda; N. of various princes; -senâ, f. great army; -stoma, a. having a great Stoma (day); -½astra, n. great or mighty missile; -sthâna, n. high place or position; -sthûla, a. very gross; -snâna, n. great ablution; -½âspada, a. mighty; -sva na, m. loud sound; a. loud-sounding, shout ing loud; loud (noise); -½âsvâda, a. very savoury; -hanu, a. having great jaws; -harm ya, n. great palace; -½âhava, m. great battle; -hava, m. great sacrifice; -hasta, a. large handed (Siva); -hâsa, m.loud laughter; a. laughing loud; -½ahí, m. great serpent: -sayana, n. sleep (of Vishnu) on the great serpent (Sesha); -½ahna, m. advanced day time, afternoon; -hrada, m. great pond.
mahātattva n. the great princi ple, intellect; -tapas, a. greatly distressed; practising great austerities; m. N. of a her mit; -tapasvin, a. greatly afflicted; -tamas, n. great darkness (one of the five stages of Avidyâ); -tala, n. (great-bottom), a cer tain hell; -tikta, a. very bitter; -tithi, f. (the great=) sixth lunar day; -tegas, a. hav ing great lustre, very glorious (of gods and men); m. ep. of Skanda; N.; -taila, n. pre cious oil or N. of a kind of oil; -½âtodya, n. great drum; -½âtman, 1. m. great spirit, uni versal soul; intellect; 2. a. great-souled, high-minded, noble; of great intellect, highly gifted, very wise; exalted, eminent, illus trious (family), mighty; -½âtma-vat, a. highly gifted, very clever; -½atyaya, m. great calamity; -tyâga, m. great liberal ity; a. very liberal: -maya, a. consist ing in great liberality; -tyâgin, a. very liberal (Siva); -damshtra,a. having great tusks; m. N.; -danda, m. great staff or long arm; severe punishment; -daridra, a. extremely poor; -dâna, n. valuable gift; a. attended with great gifts (sacrifice); -dâ ru, n. the Devadâru tree (Pinus Deodora); -dis, f. chief cardinal point (N., S., E., W.); -duhkha, n. great sorrow; -durga, n. great danger; place very difficult of access; -driti, m. great bag; -devá, m. the great god, a term sp. applied to Rudra or to one of the gods connected with him (V.); in C.=Siva; N.: -giri, m. N. of a mountain; -devî, f. the great goddess=Pârvatî; first wife of a king; N.; -½adbhuta, a. very wonderful; n. great marvel; -dyuti, a. of great lustre, brilliant, glorious; -druma, m. large tree; -dvâra, m. n. main gate; -dhana, a. costing much money, costly, expensive; having much money, wealthy; m. N. of a merchant; (á), n. great battle (RV.); great spoil (RV.1); great wealth (C.): -pati, m. (lord of great wealth), very rich man; -dhanur-dhara, -dhanushmat, m. great bowman; -dhanus, a. bearing a great bow (Siva); -dhî, a. of great understanding, very wise; -½ânaka, m. kind oflarge drum; -nakha, a. having great nails or claws; -nagná, m. (stark naked), paramour (V.): î, f. courtesan; -nada, m. great stream; -nadî, f. river; N. of various rivers; -½ânana, a. having a great mouth or face; -½ânanda, m. great joy or bliss; N.; -naraka, m. a certain hell; -narendra, m. great conjurer or magician; -½anasa, n. freight waggon; kitchen: î, f. cook, kitchen-maid; -½anasa½adhyaksha, m. superintendent of the kitchen; -nâgá, m. great serpent; great elephant; -nâtaka, n. great drama; a kind of play; -nâda, m. loud sound, shout, roar, etc.; a. making a loud noise, roaring etc.; m. ep. of Siva; -nâyaka, m. great leader or chief; large central gem in a pearl necklace; -nâsa, a. large-nosed (Siva); -nidra, a. sleep ing soundly or long; -niraya, m. kind of hell; -nis, f. dead of night, second and third watches of the night (9 p.m. to 3 a.m.); -nîla, a.dark blue or black; m. sapphire: -maya, a. consisting of sapphire; -½anubhâva, a. very powerful or glorious; magnanimous, high-minded, noble: -tâ, f., -tva, n. high-minded ness, nobility; -netra, a. large-eyed (Siva); -½andhakâra, m. dense darkness, complete obscuration of the intellect; -nyâya, m. main rule; -½anvaya, a. of high lineage.
mahācakra n. large wheel or discus; -kakravart-in, m. great emperor, universal monarch: (-i)-tâ, f. dignity of a great emperor; -katura-ka, m. (very crafty), N. of a jackal; -kamû, f. great army;-kar yâ, f. the great course of life (i.e. that of a Bodhisattva): -m grah, enter upon the life of a Bodhisattva; -½akala, m. great moun tain; -½âkârya, m. great teacher (Siva); -½agá, m. great he-goat; -gata, a. wearing large braids of hair (Siva); -gatru, a. having a large collar-bone (Siva); -gana, m. sg. (pl.) many people, multitude of men, crowd, popu lace, the people; great or distinguished man or men; a. occupied by many people (house): -virodha, m. hostility of many people or creatures; -gava, a. very swift (horse, arrow); -gihva, a. long-tongued (Siva); -gñânin, a. knowing much (Siva); m. great soothsayer; -gyotis, a. having great lustre (Siva); -gvara, m. great distress; -½atavî, f. great forest; -½âdhya, a. very rich.
māyākapota m. phantom pigeon: -vapus, a. having the body of a --; -kâra, a. acting deceitfully; -kkhadma para, a. intent on deceit and fraud; -devî, f. N. of the mother of Buddha; -dhara, a.versed in jugglery or witchcraft; m. N. of a prince of the Asuras; -½adhika, a. abound ing in magic arts; -patu, a. skilled in witch craft; -pur, -purî, f. N. of a town; -prayoga, m. trickiness; versatility; -batu, m. N. of aprince of the Sabaras; -½abhyudayana, m. N. of a Kâyastha; -maya, a. (î) illusory, unreal; m. N. of a Râkshasa; -yantra, n. en chantment: °ree;--=magical; -vakana, n. hypo critical speech; (&asharp;)-vat, a. practising sorcery (RV.); deceitful, cunning; attended with magical arts: -î, f. kind of personified magi cal art; N. of a fairy's wife; N. of a prin cess; -vâda, m. doctrine of illusion (a term applied to Buddhism and Vedântism); -vid,a. familiar with magical arts; -vín, a. skilled in magic; fraudulent; guileful, deceitful; illusory; m. magician, sorcerer, juggler; -sîla, a. deceitful, fraudulent.
mithunīcārin a. practising cohabitation; -bhâva, m. cohabitation, with (in.).
mūrchā f. congealment, solidifica tion (of quicksilver); faint, swoon; mental stupefaction, delusion; melody: -½âkshepa, m. indication of dissatisfaction with anything by swooning (rh.); -maya, a.swoon-like.
yathākaniṣṭham ad. according to age from the youngest upwards; -kartavya, fp. to be done according to the circumstances; n. proper course of action; -karmá, ad. according to the respective action or actions; -karma-gunam, ad. according to the actions and (three) qualities; -kalpam, ad. according to the ritual; -kândam, ad. according to the sections; -kâma-kâra, m. action according to one'sdesire; -k&asharp;mam (SB. ám), ad. according to wish, at will or pleasure, agreeably; leisurely; -kâma- gyeya, fp. to be oppressed at pleasure; -kâma-prayâpya, fp. to be sent away at pleasure; -kâma-vadhya, fp. to be chastised at pleasure; -kâma-vikârin, a. wandering about at will; -kâma½arkita½arthin, a. satis fying supplicants according to their desire; -kâmin, a. acting according to one's will, unrestrained; -kârya, fp. to be done according to circumstances; -kâla, m. proper time: -m, ad. at the right or usual time, seasonably; -kula-dharmam, ad. according to the family usage; -krita, pp. properly done (--°ree;); agreed upon: (á)-m, ad. as usual (RV.); as it hap pened; as agreed upon; -krama, °ree;--, -m, ena, in due order, successively; -kriyamâna, pr. pt. as being done, usual, customary; -ksham am, ad. according to one's power, as much as possible; -kshipram,ad. as possible; -½âkhyânam, ad. according to the statement, as before stated; -½âgata, pp. by which one came (way): -m, e-na, ad. by the way one came; -½âgama, a. orthodox: -m, ad. in accordance with tradition; -gunam, ad. according to the qualities or virtues; -griham, ad. into one's respective house; -gotra-kula-kalpam, ad. according to the usage of the family or the tribe; -½a&ndot;gám, ad. member by member; -½âkâram,ad. according to usage; -kintita, pp. previously intended; -kkhandas, ad. metre by metre; -gâta, pp. as if born into the world; stupid, foolish; -gosham, ad. to one's heart's content; -gñapta, pp. previously directed orordered; -gñapti, ad. according to command; -gñânam, ad. to the best of one's knowledge; -gñeyam, ad. id.; -gyeshtham, ad. according to age from the eldest downwards, by seniority.
yatrasāyaṃgṛha a. having one's dwelling wherever evening falls; -sâ yam-pratisraya, a. id.; -stha, a. dwelling in which place; -½astamita-sâyin, a. resting wherever sunset overtakes one; -½ikkhaka, a. wherever one likes.
yadṛcchā f. chance: °ree;--, -tas, or in. a-yâ, by chance, accidentally; spontane ously; unexpectedly; -mâtratah, only quite by accident; -lâbha-samtushta, pp. satisfied with earnings obtainedspontaneously; -sab da, m. word of accidental origin, unmeaning word.
yogakaraṇḍaka m. N.; ikâ, f. N. of a mendicant nun; -kshemá, m. sg. & pl. (C. also m. du. & sg. n.) possession or security of property; property; prosperity (ordinarily explained as meaningacquisi tion and preservation of property); property meant for pious uses; -kûrna, n. magic pow der; -ga, a. produced by meditation or Yoga; -tantra, n. Yoga doctrine, treatise on Yoga; -dharmin, a. practising Yoga; -nanda, m. the pseudo-Nanda; -nidrâ, f. sleep induced by the practice of Yoga, somnolent condi tion, dozing; Vishnu's sleep at the end of an age; -m-dhara, m. N.; -pati, m. lord of Yoga (Vishnu); -patha, m. path to Yoga;-bhâraka, m. shoulderyoke for the carrying of burdens; -bhrashta, pp. lapsed from devotion or contemplation; -maya, a. (î) produced from contemplation or Yoga; -mâyâ, f. magic; illusion produced by abstract meditation; -mârga, m. road to Yoga; -yâtrâ, f. recourse to mental ab sorption or Yoga; -yukta, pp. absorbed in meditation, practising Yoga; -ratna, n. magic jewel; -rûdha, pp. having an etymo logical and aconventional meaning (e. g. pa&ndot;ka-ga, growing in the mud and lotus); -rokanâ, f. kind of magical ointment (ren dering invisible or invulnerable); -vat, a. joined, united; practising Yoga; -vartikâ, f. magic wick; -vaha, a. bringing about, furthering (--°ree;); -vâh-in, a. intriguing: (-i) tva, n. intrigue; -vid, a. knowing the right means or method; knowing what is fitting or suitable; versed in Yoga; -vidyâ, f. knowledge of Yoga; -vibhâga, m. splitting of a grammatical rule into two; -sabda, m. the word yoga; etymological word (the mean ing of which results from the derivation); -sâyin, a. somnolent in consequence of medi tation; -sâstra, n.Yoga doctrine (esp. of Patañgali); -samâdhi, m. mental absorp tion resulting from Yoga; -sâra, m. univer sal remedy; -siddha, pp. perfected by Yoga; -siddhi, f. simultaneous accomplishment: -mat, a. versed in magic; -sûtra, n. the Sû tras on the Yoga (attributed to Patañgali).
yoktavya fp. to be employed or practised; -inflicted (punishment); -supplied or provided with (in.); -concentrated (mind); n. imps. one should prepare oneself for (lc.).
yogin a. joined with, accompanied by (--°ree;); being in conjunction with (--°ree;); con nected with, relating to (--°ree;); practising Yoga; m. devotee of Yoga, Yogin: -î, f. female devotee; sorceress, witch; fairy.
rajata a. [√ rag=√ arg] silvery, whitish (V.); made of silver (V.); n. silver: -kûta, N. of a peak in the Malaya range; -damshtra, m. N. of a fairy; -parvata, m. mountain of silver (sp. an artificial one as a gift for Brâhmans); -pâtrá, n. silver vessel; -bhâgana, n. id.; -maya, a. (î) made of sil ver; -½akala, -½adri, m. silver mountain, ep. of Kailâsa.
rati f. [√ ram] rest (V., rare); plea sure, enjoyment, satisfaction, in (lc., --°ree;); sexual enjoyment or union; personified as one of the wives of Kâma, Rati: -m kri, labh, vid, or bandh, find pleasure in (lc.).
rasa m. [√ 2. ras] sap, juice (of plants), fruit-syrup; fluid, liquid; water; essence, pith (of anything); quicksilver; potion, elixir; poisonous draught; taste, flavour (as distinctive quality of fluids: six kinds are distinguished, viz. sweet, salt, bitter, sour, pungent, astringent); object of taste; organ of taste, tongue; relish, inclination, fondness or love for (lc. ± upari, --°ree;); desire; affection; pleasure, delight; charm; (flavour or key note in poetry), sentiment (eight Rasas are generally distinguished: love, heroism, dis gust, wrath, mirth, terror, pity, wonder, a ninth, quietism, and a tenth, tenderness, being sometimes added); prevailing sentiment in human character; sacred syllable om.
rādhya fp. (V.) to be performed; worthy to be won; to be satisfied; to be wor shipped; obtainable.
rāsa m. kind of pastoral festival, dance practised by Krishna with the cowherdesses; sport: -ka, m. kind of dance; kind of song; m. n. kind of drama.
ruciṣya a. pleasing, agreeable; -î, f. metr.=ruki, light, lustre (pl.); -ya, a. pleasing, radiant, beautiful; appetising.
liṅgavat a. having characteristic marks; having various genders; having a phallus (a certain Sivaite sect); -sarîra, n. the subtle body (phil.); -sâstra, n. treatise on grammatical gender; -stha,m. ascetic; -½anusâsana, n. doctrine of grammatical gender.
lauha a. (î) made of copper or metal; red; n. metal, iron: -kâra, m. blacksmith; -sâstra, n. treatise on metals; -½âkârya, m. teacher of metallurgy; -½ayasa, a. made of reddish metal or copper (loha½ayasa).
vadhya fp. to be slain or killed; de serving or liable to be killed; sentenced to death; to be chastised or corporally pun ished; to be destroyed: -tâ, f. penalty of death or corporal punishment; -pataha, m.drum beaten at executions; -bhû, f. place of execution; -bhûmi, f. id.; -mâlâ, f. garland placed on the head of one sentenced to death; -silâ, f. stone used for executing or slaughter ing, block; -sthâna, n. place of execution; -srag, f.=-mâlâ.
vartitavya fp. to be tarried in (country); -practised or observed (conduct); -treated; n. imps. one should stay or remain in (lc.); one should apply oneself to (lc.); live or exist; -proceed or behave (w. ad. or in.), towards any one (g., lc., in. with saha): asmad-vase --, we should be obeyed.
vartamāna pr. pt. (√ vrit) pre sent, existing; n. the present: â, f. (per sonal terminations of) the present tense: (a)-kâla, m. present; (a)-½âkshepa, m. de claration of dissatisfaction with something going on.
vartin a. abiding, staying, resting, being, situated, in (gnly. --°ree;); being in a con dition etc. (--°ree;); practising (--°ree;); engaged in, making (a request, --°ree;); behaving, acting (--°ree; or w. ad.); behaving properly towards (--°ree;); m. meaning of a suffix.
vasati f. staying overnight; dwell ing, abiding, sojourn; nest (V.); residence, abode, house; seat (fig.) of (g., --°ree;); night (rare); -m kri, grah, or bandh, pass the night; take up one's abode, in (lc.);tisro vasatîr ushitvâ, having halted at three stages, having passed three nights: -druma, m. tree under which the night is passed.
vāhin a. driving along (car); --°ree;, drawing; flowing to; causing to flow, shed ding; bearing along (of a river), wafting (of wind); bringing, producing; bearing, carry ing; wearing, possessing, having; perform ing, practising: (ín)-î, f. V., C.: army; C.: division of an army (consisting of 81 ele phants, 81 chariots, 243 horse, 405 foot); river: -pati, m. commander of an army; -½îsa, m. id.
vitasti f. [√ tan] span (as measure of length=12 a&ndot;gulas or about nine inches); -tâna, a. (rare) [√ tan] empty (in a-, not empty); dejected; m. n. expansion, exten sion, extent; quantity, mass; high degree; variety; performance; development; sacri fice; canopy, awning; m. (separation of) the sacred fires: -ka, n. awning, canopy (esp. --°ree;); quantity, -vat, a. provided with a canopy; -tânâ-ya,den. represent a canopy; -tânî-bhû, id.; -tâmasa, a. light, bright; -timira, a. id.; -tîrna, pp. √ trî; -tusha, a. unhusked; -tushta, pp. dissatisfied, dis pleased; -tritîyá, a. intermittent on the third day (fever; AV.1); n.third (Br. S.); -tripta-ka, a. sated (in a-, not yet sated with; g.); -trishna, a. free from thirst; having no desire: -tâ, f. freedom from de sire, satisfaction, contentment; -trishnâ, f. id.; -tolâ, f. N. of a river.
vinaya a. removing (RV.1); m. (C.) removal, withdrawal (of a cloth); guidance, discipline, instruction, training; good beha viour, decorum, discretion, polite manners, good breeding, modest conduct; office (rare); treatise on discipline (B.); instruction; -gyot is, m. N. (conj.), -tâ, f. good behaviour; modesty; -nayana, a. removing, dispelling; n. education, instruction, in (lc.); -nayam dhara, m. N. of a merchant; -naya-pitaka, (basket=) collection of treatises on disci pline (B.); -naya-maya, a. being good breed ing itself; -naya-vat, a. well-behaved (in a-): -î, f. N.; -naya-sûtra, n. Sûtra treat ing of discipline (B.); -naya-svâminî, f. N.; -naya½âditya, m. ep. of Gayâpîda: -pura, n. N. of a town built by Gayâpîda; -naya½âdi-dhara, m. N.; -½avanata, pp. bowing low with modesty; -nayin, a. well bred, well-conducted, modest; -naya½ukti, f. modest speech (pl.).
vinīta pp. √ nî: -tâ, f. good breed ing, decorum, modesty, -tva, n. id., -mati, m. N.; -nîti, f. modesty; -netri, m. educa tor, instructor, teacher (w. ac., g.); trainer, tamer; -netra, 1. m. instructor, teacher; 2. a. eyeless, blind; -neya, fp. to be removed; educated or instructed; -chastised; m. pupil.
vilāsikā f. kind of drama in one act, full of love incidents; -lâsi-tva, n. sportiveness; -lâsin, a. shining, beaming; fluttering (flag); sportive, playful, fond of amusement; delighting in (--°ree;); coquettish; enamoured; m. lover, husband: -î, f. lively or charming woman; woman; mistress, wife; wanton woman, concubine; N.
vilāsa m. manifestation; appear ance, aspect; diversion, sport, fun (common mg.); doings; (female) coquetry, dalliance (ord. mg.); wantonness (rare); liveliness (one of the eight masculine virtues; rare); charm, grace (rare): -kodanda, m. god of love; -griha, n. pleasure house; -kâpa, m. god of love; -dolâ, f. pleasure swing; -dhan van, m. god of love; -pura, n. N. of a town; -bâna, m. god of love; -bhavana, n. plea sure house; -bhitti, f. wall in appearance; -mani-darpana, m. mirror of jewels as a play thing; -maya, a. full of grace; -mekhalâ, f. toy girdle; -vat-î, f. coquettish woman; N.; -vasati, f. pleasure resort; -vâtâyana, n.balcony or terrace for amusement; -vip ina, n. pleasure wood; -vihâra, m. walking for pleasure, promenading; -vesman, n. pleasure house; -sayyâ, f. pleasure couch; -sîla, m. N. of a king; -sadman, n. plea sure house.
vihiṃsaka a. injuring or harm ing (g., --°ree;); -himsa-tâ, f. injury to (lc.); -himsana, n., -himsâ, f. id. (g., --°ree;); -hita, pp. √ dhâ: -kshana, a. intent on (-artham), -tva, n. direction, prescription (vbl. n.), -ni yama, a. having taken a vow, -pratishid dha, pp. enjoined and prohibited, -sena, m. N. of a king; -hiti, f. procedure; accom plishment of (--°ree;).
vṛttakāya a. having a round body; -gandhi: -n, n. kind of artificial prose containing metrical passages; -bandha, m. verse; -bha&ndot;ga, m. violation of good con duct and of metre; -yukta, pp.of good con duct, virtuous; -vat, a. id.; -sampanna, pp. id.; -stha, a. adhering to good conduct, vir tuous; -hîna, pp. destitute of good conduct, ill-conducted; -½âkshepa, m. statement of dissatisfaction with or disbelief in an occur rence (rh.).
vṛtti f. (rolling), gush (of tears); course of action, mode of life, conduct, be haviour (ord. mg.), towards (lc., --°ree;); method, course; respectful or affectionate treatment of (g., --°ree;; E.); general usage, rule (S.); man ner of being, nature, kind; being, occurring, or appearing in (lc., gnly. --°ree; a.); occurrence or existence of (--°ree;); devotion or addiction to, practice of (lc., --°ree;; --°ree; a. devoted to, practis ing); sg. pl. subsistence, maintenance, liveli hood (by means of, in.), profession, occupa tion (ord. mg.); activity, working, function; disposition, mood (of the mind); occurrence or use of a word in a particular sense (lc.); mode of pronunciation or recitation (S.); style of composition (dr.; there are four kinds: kaisikî, sâttvatî, ârabhatî, bhâratî); alliteration (rh.); form or kind of word (gr.); commentary (on a Sûtra): -m kri or kalp aya,subsist by, live on (in.); provide a means of subsistence for (g.).
vedāṅga n. member of the Veda, subsidiary Vedic treatise (six are enumer ated: Sikshâ, Kalpa, Vyâkarana, Nirukta, Khandas, Gyotisha); -½âdi, m. beginning of the Veda; m. n. sacred syllable om; -½adhi gama, m. Vedic study; -½adhyayana, n. id.; -½adhyâya, a. studying or having studied the Veda; -½adhyâyin, a. id.; -½anadhyay ana, n. neglect of Vedic study; -½anuvak aná, n. repetition orrecitation of the Veda; Vedic doctrine.
vedokta pp. mentioned, taught, or contained in the Veda; -½udita, pp. pre scribed by the Veda; -½upakarana, n. sup plementary treatise to the Veda.
vratagrahaṇa n. taking of a religious vow, turning mendicant: -nimittam, ad. in order to fulfil a religious vow; -kary&asharp;, f. performance of a religious work or observance; -kâr-ín, a.practising a religious ob servance, observing a vow: (-i)-tâ, f. observance of a vow.
vrata n. [willed: √ vri: perh. old pp.] 1. V.: will, command, law, ordinance; do minion; service, obedience; realm; regular sphere or function; 2. V., C.: operation, ac tion, doings, conduct, manner, mode of life (with suki=clear conscience); religious rite or service; duty, towards (--°ree;); religious or ascetic observance taken upon oneself, aus terity, vow, rule, holy work (such as fasting and continence); 3. C.: vow (in general), resolve, to (d., lc. of vbl. n., --°ree;): ab. in conse quence of a vow; (á)-m kar, observe a vow, esp. practise chastity.
vratin a. engaged in a religious observance, practising a vow; --°ree;, practising; worshipping; behaving like.
vratadāna n. imposition of a vow; -dhara, a. practising a vow (only --°ree;); -dhâr ana, n. fulfilment of religious observances or of duties, towards (g., --°ree;); (á)-pati, m. lord of religious rites (Agni; V.); -p&asharp;, a. guarding the sacred law (V.); -pârana, n. conclusion of a fast, eating after a fast; -pra dâna, n. imposition of a fast; -bha&ndot;ga, m. breach of a vow; -bhrít, a. bearing the sacred law or rite (Agni); -ruki, a. delighting in vows etc., religious; -lopa, m. breach of a vow; -lopana, n. id.; (á)-vat, a. fulfilling or practising a vow; -sayyâ-griha, n. sleeping apartment for the performance of a vow; -sampâdana, n.fulfilment of a vow or religious duty; -stha, a. practising a vow etc.; -sthita, pp. id.; -snâta, pp. having completed one's vows (but not Vedic study): -ka, a. id.; -snâna, n. completion of one's vows; -hâni, f. neglect of vows; -½âdesa, m. imposition of a vow, esp. of the first vow of the Brahmakârin; -½âdesana, n. initiation into a vow: -visarga, m. pl. initiation into and completion of a vow.
śama m. (mental) tranquillity or calmness, equanimity, quietism; peace, with (sârdham); apathy (rare); tranquillization, calm, pacification, alleviation, cessation, ex tinction: -m kri, show calmness, calm oneself, be tranquil: -gir, f. tranquillizing word; -pradhâna, a. devoted to calmness.
śākta a. belonging or relating to, de rived from, the Saktis of Siva; m. teacher (RV.1); worshipper of the Saktis of Siva (C.).
śāṭyāyana m. (pat. fr. sâtya) N. of a teacher and legislator: -ka, n. doctrine or treatise of Sâtyâyana; i-n, m. pl. followers of Sâtyâyana.
śānta pp. v. √ 2. sam; m. N.: -ketas, a. composed, calm; -gvara, a. having one's grief assuaged; -tâ, f. quietism, freedom from passion; -tva, n. id.; -manas, a. composed.
śikvan a. [√ 1. sak] artistic (V.); -vas, a. [√ 1. sak] mighty (RV.).
śāstra n. RV.1, C.: command, pre- cept; C.: instruction, advice, good counsel; rule, theory; compendium, institutes (of any branch of learning), code, scientific or canon ical work, scripture; learning (rare): -kâ ra, -krit, m. author of a treatise; -gañga, m. N. of a parrot; -kakshus, a. having authoritative works as eyes (king); -gña, a. conversant with the Sâstras, learned; m. specialist; -tas, ad. according to prescribed rules; -darsana, n. mention in an authori tative work: ab. according to prescription; -drishta, pp. (seen=) mentioned or pre scribed in the treatises, scientific, according to precept or rule; -mati, a. trained, learned; m.specialist; -vat, ad. according to prescribed rules; -vargita, pp. subject to no law; -vâ da, m. statement of the treatises; -vâdin, m. teacher; -vid, a. conversant with the Sâstras, learned; -½atiga, a. offending against theSâstras; -½adhyâpaka, m. teacher; -½an anushthâna, n. neglect of instructive works.
śāsanīya fp. to be instructed or taught, by (g.); -i-tavya, fp. to be taught or prescribed; -i-tri, m. punisher, chastiser; ruler, of (--°ree;); instructor, teacher; -in, a. pun ishing, chastising; ruling over (--°ree;); teach ing, instructing; (s&asharp;s)-us, n. command (RV.); -ti, 1. f. punishment; command; 2. m. (3 sg. used as n.) the root 1. sâs; -trí, m. punisher, chastiser; ruler; teacher, instructor; ep. of Buddha.
śāsana a. (î) chastising; instruct ing; m. chastiser; instructor; n., C.: chas tisement, punishment; government, sway, rule, over (--°ree;); royal decree, edict, charter, grant; instruction, teaching (rare); precept, rule, counsel (rare); doctrine, faith, religion (rare); V., C.: direction, command, order, to any one (--°ree;): -m kri, obey the orders of (g.); e vrit or sthâ, obey any one (g., --°ree;); ab. sâsanât, by command of (g.): -dhara, m. bearer of a message, messenger; -vartin, a. obeying the orders of (g.); -vâhaka, m. mes senger; -silâ, f. edict engraved on stone; -hâraka, -hârin, m. messenger.
śilpa n. variegated appearance, decoration, ornament (V.); work of art (C.); artistic skill, art, craft (Br., C.); N. of cer tain Sastras (Br., S.).
śilpopajīvin m. artist, craftsman.
śilpin a. skilled in an art; m. artist, craftsman; fashioner of (--°ree;): -î, f. female artist.
śilpakārī f. female artisan; -kârikâ, f. id.; -griha, n. workshop of an artisan; -vidyâ, f. knowledge of the arts or crafts; -vritti, f. subsistence by a craft; -sâstra, n. work on arts or crafts.
śīlin a. honourable, moral (per son); --°ree; (=sîla) habituated to, practising, etc.
śīlaya den. P. practise, cultivate; give one's whole attention to; wear, put on; inhabit, frequent: pp. sîlita, inhabited, fre quented, visited; prepared. anu, act like any one (ac.). pari, cultivate, practise; study; inhabit; cherish.
śīla n. habit, custom; disposition, character; behaviour; good conduct or habits, noble character, uprightness, morality: very common --°ree; a. habituated, disposed, prone, or addicted to, practising: -khandana, n. viola tion of morality or honour; -gupta, pp. crafty by character, cunning; -tata, a. having good conduct for its bank; -tas, ad. in regard to character, in conduct; -tâ, f. nobility, vir tuousness; -tyâga, m.abandonment of moral ity or integrity; -dhara, a. honourable; m. N.; -nidhi, m. treasure of her virtue.
śubha a. splendid, beautiful, hand some; pleasant, agreeable; useful (animals); serviceable, good (land, seed, etc.); able (artist); correct, true (law, etc.); auspicious, lucky (day, etc.); good, virtuous; pure (ac tion); m. N.; n. charm, grace (rare); wel fare, prosperity, good fortune, happiness (ord. mg.; sts. pl.); benefit, service (rare); good or virtuous action.
śekhara m. [cp. sikhara] crown of the head (very rare); mountain-peak (rare); chaplet worn on the head, crest, diadem; --°ree;, best or most beautiful of: -gyotis, m. N. of a king.
śraddhā a. putting faith in, trusting (d.; V.); f. confidence, trust, faith, belief, in (lc., --°ree;), faithfulness, sincerity (V., C.); de sire, longing, for (lc., prati, inf., or gnly. --°ree;; C.); curiosity (V., C.): -m âkhyâhi nas tâvat, pray satisfy our curiosity and tell us.
śliṣṭaparaṃparitarūpaka n. continuous chain of ambiguities (a kind of metaphor); -rûpaka, n. ambiguity as a metaphor; -½âkshepa, m. expression of dissatisfaction by means of equivocation (rh.); -½ukti, f. ambiguous expression.
saṃśayita pp. √ sî; n. doubt, un certainty; -sayitavya, fp. dubious; -saya½u pamâ, f. comparison expressed in the form of a doubt; -sarana, n. taking refuge with any one; -sânti, f. extinction;-sita, pp. √ sâ: -vâk, a. speaking sharply, -½âtman, a. firmly resolved; -siti, f. sharpening (Br.); -sîta, a. cold; -sîti, f. doubt; -sîlana, n. practice; frequent intercourse with (in.); -suddhi, f. purity; -sushka, a. dried up, dry, withered, sere, emaciated; -soka-ga, a. produced from moist heat; m. vermin pro duced from damp heat; -sodhana, a. (î) purifying; n. purification; -sraya, m. con nexion, association with (g., --°ree;); league for mutual protection; refuge, shelter, protec tion, asylum; residence, habitation; reference, relation; resorting to (lc., --°ree;; rare); recourse, addiction or devotion to: ab. in consequence of (--°ree;); with the help of, by means of (--°ree;): --°ree; a. dwelling, living in, staying with (a teacher), standing in (a boat), being in or on, growing (tree) near; relating or referring to; devoted to, practising; -srayanîya, fp. to be resorted to, -taken refuge with: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -srayitavya, fp. to be sought refuge in (fortress); -srayin, a. having sought the protection or entered the service of any one; dwelling, resting or standing in, being in or on (--°ree;); m.dependent, servant; -srava, m. hearing; ear-shot (lc. within hearing of, g.); promise; -sravana, n. hearing, -about (--°ree;); ear-shot: lc. within hearing, aloud; (sám)- srita, pp. √ sri; m. dependent, servant: -vat, pp. act. clinging to, having wedded (in.); -sri tavya, fp. incorr. for -srayitavya; -slish- ta-karman, a. in whose actions good and evil are not kept apart, indifferent as to the morality of his actions; -slesha, m. con nexion, union, contact, with (in., --°ree;); em brace: -m labh, attain; -sleshana, n. con necting; means of binding together, bond; -sleshin, a. connecting.
saṃstha a. standing, staying, resting, existing, or contained in (lc., gnly. --°ree;); being in or with=belonging to (lc. or --°ree;); based or dependent on (--°ree;); being in possession of (--°ree;); lasting (--°ree;; rare); á, m. (RV.): only lc. in the midst or presence of (g.); -sth&asharp;, f. remaining or abiding with (--°ree;; E., rare); form, appearance (C.); established order, standard, rule (C.); condition, state, nature (C.); completion, conclusion (V.); end, death (P.); complete liturgical course (being the basis of a sacrifice; the Gyotishtoma, the Haviryagña, and Pâkayagña consist of seven such forms); spy in one's own country (rare): --°ree; a. a, having the form of, appearing as; -sthâna, n. position, situation in a place (--°ree;); standing firm (in battle); existence; life; strict adherence to (--°ree;); abode; public place in a town; form, shape, appearance (ord. mg.; often with rûpa); condition, state, nature (rare); aggregate (rare): -vat, a. ex isting; having various forms; -sthâpaka, a. establishing; -sthâpana, n. fixing, setting up, erecting; establishment, of (g., --°ree;); re gulation of (--°ree;): â, f. cheering up, encourage ment; -sthâpayitavya, fp. to be cheered or consoled; -sth&asharp;pya, fp. C.: to be placed in (subjection) to (g.); -impressed on the mind (lc.) of (g.); V.: to be concluded (sacrifice); (sám)-sthiti, f. C.: union with (in., lc.); standing or resting on (lc., --°ree;); position; abid ing, residence in (lc.); duration, continuance; perseverance (rare); attaching importance to (lc.); existence, possibility, of (g., --°ree;); form; established order; condition, nature; V.: conclusion (rare); P.: end, death (rare).
saṃskāra m. [√ kri] preparation, dressing (of food); refining (of metals etc.); polishing (of gems); cleansing, purifying; embellishment, decoration, adornment; rear ing (of animals or plants); toilet, attire (rare); correct formation or use (of a word); train ing, education; correctness (of pronuncia tion or expression); purificatory rite, domes tic consecration (applicable to all members of the first three castes), sacrament; sacrament of the dead, cremation (rare); mental impres sion (left by causes no longer operative and sts. dating from a previous birth; there are three kinds, vega, impulse, sthiti-sthâpaka, elasticity, andbhâvanâ, reproductive ima gination); after-effect; creation of the mind (regarded by it as real though actually non existent, such as material phenomena and all connected therewith; B.): -tâ, f. abst. n. of a cpd. ending insamskâra (=mental impres sion); -tva, n. decoration: kakshushâm samskâra-tvam sam-âp, become a feast to the eye; -nâman, n. sacramental name (= our baptismal name); -maya, a. (--°ree;) con sisting in the consecration of (rite); -vat, a. grammatically correct; -visishta, pp. better prepared (food).
sakalika a. provided with buds; -kala½indu, m. full moon; -kalpa, a. includ ing the Kalpas (sacrificial Sûtras); -kasmîra, a. together with Cashmere; -kashâya, a. dominated by passion; -kâkola,a. together with the hell Kâkola; -kâtara, a. cowardly, dastardly; (sá)-kâma, a. satisfying desires (rare); having one's wish fulfilled, satisfied; consenting, willing (girl); desiring (--°ree;); full of love, enamoured; amorous (speech); -kâra, 1. m. letter s; a. incorr. for sâkâra; 2. a. ac tive, courageous; -kârana-ka, a. (ikâ) due to a specific cause; -kâsa, m. (visibleness), pre sence, vicinity: ac. -m, to (gnly. a prs.; w. vbs. of coming, going, taking, or sending); lc. in the presence of, before, near; ab. or -tas, from (come, go, be produced, deprive of, be freed from, hear, ask, buy; w. g. or --°ree;); -kâ shâya, a. wearing a brownish-red garment; -kutumba, a.together with his family; -kutûhala, a. impelled by curiosity: -m, ad. with curiosity; -kula, a. along with his family; m.=nakula, ichneumon (as a pun): -ga, a. belonging to the same family as (g.); -kulya, a. id.; m.relation; -kusa, a. hold ing Kusa grass in one's hand; -kusu ma½âstarana, a. strewn with flowers.
sacchāstra n. good or genuine doctrine or treatise: -vat, a. possessed of a --; -khloka, a. having a good reputation.
sajya a. [gyâ] furnished with a string (bow); placed on the bowstring (arrow); -gyotis, ad. according to the heavenly bodies =during the twilight (between the disappear ance of the stars and sunrise or sunset and the appearance of the stars; -gyotishi, lc. ad. id.); as long as the sun is above the horizon.
saṃtoṣa m. satisfaction, content ment, with (in., lc.): -m kri, content oneself with (in.): -vat, a. satisfied, contented; -toshin, a. id.; delighting in (--°ree;); -toshtav ya, fp. n. one should be contented.
saṃdaṃśa m. compression (of the lips); connexion; tongs; thumb and fore-finger; nippers (of a crab); section, chapter: -ka, m., i-kâ, f. pair of tongs; -darpa, m. arrogance, boasting of (--°ree;); -darbha, m. weaving (of a garland); piling (of arms); mixture; artistic combination (of words, notes etc.); literary composition; -darsana, n. seeing, beholding, viewing (ord. mg.); vision; gaze, look (rare); inspection, con sideration; appearance, manifestation; meet ing with (in. ± saha); showing, display (of or to, --°ree;): -m gam svapne, appear to (g.) in a dream; -m pra-yam, show oneself to (g.); lc. in view of; -d&asharp;na, n. bond, fetter, halter (V.); m. (?) fettering place (below the knee of an elephant); -dâna-tâ, f. condition of a fetter; -dânita, den. pp. bound, fettered: -ka, n. combination of three Slokas consisting of a single sentence; -digdha,pp. (√ dih) doubtful etc.; n. ambiguous expression: -tva, n. uncertainty, -punar-ukta-tva, n. uncer tainty and tautology, -buddhi, a. doubtful minded; -dîpaka, a. setting aflame, making jealous (--°ree;); -dîpana, a.kindling; exciting, provoking; m. one of the five arrows of Kâma; n. kindling, exciting, stimulating; -dûshana, a. (î) corrupting, ruining; n. de filing, violating; cause of ruin; -drís, f. (V.) sight; appearance; view, direction; -dríse, V. d. inf. of sam + √ dris.
sadharma m. similar nature; a. subject to the same law, similar: -kârinî, f. (practising the same duties), wife; -tva, n. homogeneousness.
sapadi ad. on the spot, instantly, in a moment; -padma, a. provided with lotuses: -ka, a. provided with a lotus and splendid (padmâ = srî); -parâkrama, a. mighty; -parikrama, a. accompanied byone's retinue; -parikkhada, a. together with one's belongings, -goods and chattels; -pa ritosham, ad. with satisfaction; -parivâra, a. together with one's retinue; -parihâsa, a. jocose.
saṃpriya a. mutually dear, being on good terms with (in.; V.); n. satisfaction (E., rare); -prîti, f. joy, delight, in (lc., --°ree;); good will, friendship (with, for, in. ± saha), love for (g., lc.); -preshana, n.sending, de spatch (sts. pl.); dismission; -praishá, m. summons, direction to an officiating priest (V.); -plava, m. flowing together of waters, flood, deluge; swell, surge (of the sea); dense mass, multitude, shower; tumult (of battle, --°ree;); submersion, ruin; -phulla, pp. expanded, blooming; -pheta, m. altercation.
sarvadeva m. pl. all the gods; -devatâ-maya, a. (î) containing all deities; -devatyã, a. sacred to or representing all the gods; -deva-maya, a. (î) containing or representing all gods; -desîya, a. coming from every country; -daivatya, a. representing all gods; -dravya, n. pl. all things; -dhar ma-maya, a. containing --, -vid, a. knowing all laws; -nara, m. every one; -nâma-tva, n. pronominal nature; -nâman, n. (general name), pronoun; -nâma-sthâna, n. case termination added to the strong base; -nâsa, m. complete lack; loss of everything, com plete ruin: -m kri, lose everything; -niyan tri, m. all-subduer: -tva, n. abst. n.; -patta maya,a. made of fabrics of all kinds; -path îna, a. occupying the whole road; -prabhu, m. lord of all; -prâna, m.: in. with all one's might; -prâyaskittá, a. (&isharp;) atoning for every thing (Br.); n. (V.) expiation for everything; a certain libation in the Âhavanîya; -prâ yaskitti, f. complete atonement; -bhaksha, a. eating or devouring everything, omnivor ous; -bhakshin, a. id.; -bhâva, m. whole heart or soul; complete satisfaction:in., °ree;--, with one's whole soul (love etc.): pl. all ob jects; -bhûta, pp. being everywhere; n. pl. °ree;--, all beings: with na, no being: -krit, a. framing all beings, -maya, a. (î) containing or representing all beings, -½âtman, m. soul of all beings; -bhûmi, a. owning the whole earth; -bhogya, fp. advantageous to all; -ma&ndot;gala, a. universally auspicious: â, f. ep. of Durgâ (sts. also of Lakshmî); -manorama, a. delighting every one; -máya, a. (î) con taining everything; -mahat, a. greatest of all: -tara, cpv. greater than all the rest; -mâmsa½ada, a. eating every kind of flesh; -mâya, m. N. of a Râkshasa; -medhá, m. universal offering (a ten days' Soma sacrifice); -medhya-tva, n. universal purity; -yagña, m. every sacrifice: pl. all sacrifices; -yatna, m. every effort: in. with all one's might, to the best of one's ability; -yatna- vat, a. making every possible effort; -yoni, f. source of all; -yoshit, f. pl. all women; -ratna, m. N.: -maya, a. formed of all gems; entirely studded with jewels, -samanvita, pp. possessed of all jewels; -rasa, m. all kinds of juices or fluids (pl. or °ree;--); every taste: pl. all kinds of palatable food; -râtra, m. (?) the whole night: °ree;-or -m, ad. the whole night through; (sárva- AV., or sarvá- SB.)-rûpa, a. (V.) having all colours; having or assum ing all forms; of all kinds; -½ritu-ka, a. habitable in every season (house); -li&ndot;ga, a. having all genders, adjectival; -loká, m. V., C.: the whole world; C.: the whole people; every one: pl. or °ree;--, all beings; every one: -bhayamkara, a. appalling to the whole world, -mahesvara, m. ep. of Siva and of Krishna; -loha, a. entirely red; n. metals of all kinds (°ree;--): -maya, a. (î) entirely of iron; -vâram, ad. all at once, simultaneously; -vikrayin, a. selling all kinds of things; -vigñân-in, a. knowing everything: (-i)-tâ, f. omniscience; -víd, a. omniscient; -vinâsa, m. entire destruction; -vinda, m. a certain mythical being; -vishaya, a. relating to everything, general; (sárva)-vîra, a. all-heroic, consisting of, relating to, accompanied by or leading all men or heroes (V.); -ved asá, a. attended by a gift of all one's goods (sacrifice; V.); bestowing all his property on priests after a sacrifice (C., rare); n. en tire property (V.): -dakshina, a. attended with a gift of all one's property as a sacrificial fee (sacrifice; V., C.); -vedin, a. omniscient; knowing all the Vedas; -vainâsika, a. be lieving in complete annihilation; m. Bud dhist; -vyâpad, f. complete failure; -vyâp in, a. all-pervading; -vrata, n. universal vow; a. all-vowing; -sakti, f. entire strength: in. with all one's might; -sa&ndot;kâ, f. suspicion of every one.
salakṣaṇa a. having the same characteristics, similar; (sá)-lakshman, a. id.; -lagga, a. ashamed, (coquettishly) bash ful; embarrassed; -laggita-sneha-karunam, ad. with embarrassment, love, and compassion.
salīla a. playing, without exerting oneself; sportive, coquettish (ord. mg.): -m, ad. as it were in play (± iva); coquettishly.
sācivya n. [sakiva] companion ship, assistance, help; office of a minister: -½âkshepa, m. expression of dissatisfaction with anything though seeming to favour it (rh.).
sābhikāma a. loving; -gñâna, °ree;-or -m, ad. together with tokens of recog nition; -nivesa, a. attended with a great predilection for sthg.; -prâya, a. having a distinct aim, knowing one'smind; spoken with a purpose (words); -mâna, a. full of self-satisfaction, proud, of (lc.); self-interested (action): -m, ad. proudly; -lâsha, a. full of longing, for (esp. the opposite sex, lc., prati, --°ree;); -sara, a. together with companions.
sāmya n. [sama] equality, identity, likeness (with, to, in. ± saha, g., lc., --°ree;); equality (of rank or position); equilibrium, normal condition; equability, towards (lc., prati); justice: -m kri, act justly towards (lc.); -m nî, quench (fire); appease, satisfy: -tâ, f. equality, with (g., --°ree;); -½avasthâ, f. condition of equilibrium, normal state; -½avasthâna, n. id.
sātireka a. excessive; -½atisaya, a. superior, particularly good, pre-eminent.
sārva a. [sarva] beneficial to all: -kâm-ika, a. (î) satisfying or granting every wish; -kâla, a. occurring at all times; -kâl ika, a. (î) everlasting; -ganya, a. general, universal; -gñya, n. [sarva-gña] omniscience.
siddhāṅganā f. female Siddha; -½añgana, n. magical ointment; -½âdesa, m. prediction of a soothsayer; (whose predic tions are fulfilled), soothsayer; -½anta, m. established conclusion, demonstrated truth, settled doctrine; true logical conclusion (following on the refutation of the objection raised: phil.); astronomical treatise; a class of works among Buddhists and Jains: -kau mudî, f. Moonlight (=elucidation) of settled conclusions: T. of a grammar by Bhattogi, -dharma½âgama, m. canonical law.
sujña a. knowing well; -gñâna, n. good knowledge; a. possessing good know ledge; easy to know; -gyótis, a. (or ís) radiant (V.); -ta&ndot;ka, a. sharp, piercing (sound).
sugama a. easy to traverse; easy of access; easy to find or understand, obvious; m. N. of a Dânava; -gamana, a. easy of access; going well; -galâ, f. (fair-neck), N.; -gávya, n. possession of good cattle (RV.); -gâ&ndot;ga, N. of a palace; -g&asharp;tu, m. welfare; -gâtuy&asharp;, f. desire for prosperity: in. (y&asharp;) through -(RV.1); -gâtra, a. (î) fair-limbed: î, f. beautiful woman; -gîtha, m. N. of a Rishi; -gú, a.having good cattle (V.); -guna, a. virtuous; -gun-in, a. having great merits; (sú)-gupta, pp. well-guarded or looked after; well-concealed, kept very secret (C.): -m, ad. (C.) very carefully; very se cretly: -lekha, m. very secret letter; -gupti, f. great secrecy: -m â-dhâ, observe great se crecy; -guptî-kri, guard carefully; -guru, a. very grave (crime); -gûdha, pp. well-con cealed: -m, ad. very secretly; -grihin, a. well-housed (bird); -grihîta,pp. held firmly; adhered to; well practised or learnt; used auspiciously: -nâman, -nâmadheya, a. bear ing (a well-uttered=) an auspicious name; -gehinî, f. good mistress of the house; -gop&asharp;, m. good protector(RV.); a. well-guarded (RV.); -graha, a. having a good handle; easy to obtain; easy to understand; -grîva, m. (beautiful-necked) N. of a horse of Krish na; N. of a monkey-chief (brother of Vâlin, confederate of Râma); -grîshma, m. beau tiful summer; -ghata, a. easy to accomplish; -ghatita, pp. well put together, -devised: -ghatita, pp. id.; -ghana, a. very dense (forest); -ghora, a. very dreadful; -ghosha, a. making a loud noise; having a pleasant sound; m. N. of Nakula's conch; N. of an Agrahâra.
sudina a. (RV.) clear, bright (day, morning); n. (V., C.) bright sky, fine day, clear weather; good day, happy time: -tâ, f. clear weather, -tva, n. brightness (of days), fig. happy time (RV.); -dív, a.shining brightly (Agni; RV.); -divá, n. beautiful day (AV.); -divasa, n. id. (C.); -dîtí, f. bright flame (RV.); a. brilliant, flaming (RV.); -dîrgha, a. very long (of time and space); -duhkha, a. very laborious or diffi cult, to (inf.): -m, ad. very sorrowfully; -duhkhita, pp. greatly afflicted, very unhappy; -dukûla, a. made of very fine ma terial; -dúgha, a. (V.) milking well (cow); nourishing, bountiful: â, f. good milch-cow (V.); -durgaya, a.very hard to overcome or conquer; m. kind of military array; -dur bala, a. extremely weak; -durbuddhi, a. very foolish; -durmanas, a. very despon dent; -durlabha, a. very hard to obtain; very difficult to (inf.); -duskara, a. very inaccessible; very hard to perform (penance); -duhsrava, a. very unpleasant to hear; -dushprasâdhya, fp. very hard to over come; -dustara, a. very difficult to cross; very hard to perform; -duhsaha, a.very difficult to bear; invincible; -duha, a. willingly milked (cow); -dûra, a. very distant: -m or °ree;--, ad. very far; greatly, altogether, very; ab. from afar; (sú)-dridha, pp. very firm or strong; -retentive (memory); vehe ment, intense; -dris, a. (f. C. id.; V. -î) keen-sighted (V., C.); fair, considerable (RV.); fair-eyed, gnly. f. (fair-eyed) woman (C.); -drishta, a. keen-sighted; -devá, m. good or true god (V.); a. (V.) favoured by the gods; meant for the right gods; m. N.; -devyã, n. host of the good gods (RV.); -dyút, a. shin ing brightly (RV.); -dyumná, a. id. (RV.1); m. (C.) N.; -dviga, a. having beautiful teeth; -dhánvan, a. having an excellent bow; m. a mixed caste (offspring of outcast Vaisya); N.; assembly hall of the gods; -dharman, a. practising justice; m. assembly hall of the gods; -dharmâ, f. id.
suprakāśa a. well-lighted; dis tinctly visible; -praketá, a. bright, con spicuous, notable (RV.); -práketa, a. id. (RV.1); -prakshâlita, pp. well-washed; -pra gupta, pp. very secret; -prakkhanna, pp.well-concealed; -pragá, a. having good or numerous children; -pragás, a. id.; -pragña, a. very wise (person); -pránîti, f. safe guidance (V.); a. guiding safely (V.); following good guidance (RV.); -pratara, a. easy to cross (rivers); -pratarka, m. sound judgment; -pratikara, a. easy to requite; -pratigña, m. N. of a Dânava; -prativarman, m. N.; -pratishtha, a. standing firm; firmly sup porting; m. kind of military array; -pra tishthâpita, cs. pp. well set up (image); (sú)-pratishthita, pp. standing firm; pro perly set up (stone); thoroughly implanted in (lc.); well-established (fame, Pr.); n. N. of a town in Pratishthâna; -prátîka, a. having a beautiful countenance, handsome, lovely; m. N.; N. of a mythical elephant; -pratîta, pp. well-known; -pratúr, a. (nm. t&usharp;s) advancing victoriously (RV.1); -prá tûrti, a. id. (V.); -prapâná, n. good drink ing-place (RV.); -prabha, a. having a good appearance, fine, excellent; m. N. of a Deva putra: -deva, m. N.; -prabhâta, pp. beau tifully illuminated by dawn; n. beautiful dawn; -prayás, a. well-regaled (V.); -pra y&asharp;, a. pleasant to tread on (RV.1); -pra yukta, pp. well-discharged (arrow); well recited; well-planned (fraud); -pravâkaná, a. praiseworthy (RV.); -prasanna, pp. very clear (water); very bright or pleased (face etc.); very gracious; -prasava, m. easy par turition; -prasâda, a. placable; -prasâdh ita, pp. well-adorned; -prasiddha, pp. well known; -prahâra, m. N. of a fisherman.
sumanomattaka m. N.; -mano-latâ, f. flowering creeper; -mano hara, a. very charming or attractive; -mán tu, a. easily known, well-known (RV.); m. N. of a teacher; -mantra, a. following good counsels; m. N. of various men; -mantrita, pp. well-deliberated: n. imps. good counsel has been taken; n. good counsel: -m kri, take good counsel; -mantrin, a. having a good minister; -mánman, a. uttering good wishes, very devout (RV.); -marma-ga, a. deeply penetrating the joints, causing great agony (arrow); -marshana, a. easy to bear; (sú)-mahat, a. very great, huge, vast (of time, space, quantity, number, degree); very important; -mahas, a. glorious (RV., always vc.); -mahâ, °ree;--: a. extremely great; ad. very greatly; -mahâ-kaksha, a. very high-walled; -mahâ-tapas, a. extremely ascetic or pious; -mahâ-tegas, a. very glorious; -mahât man, a. very noble-minded or high-souled; -mahâ-bala, a. extremely powerful or effica cious; -mahâ-manas, a. very high-minded; -mahârha, a. very splendid; -mahausha dha, n. herb of marvellous efficacy; -mâyá, a. having noble counsels (Maruts; RV.); m. N. of a prince of the Asuras; N. of a fairy: â, f. N. of a daughter of Maya: (a)-ka, m. N. of a fairy; -mitrá, m. kind friend; N., esp. of kings: â, f. N. of a Yakshinî; N. of a wife of Dasaratha, mother of Satrughna and Lakshmana; -mukha, n. beautiful mouth; bright face: in. cheerfully; a. (î) fair-faced; bright-faced, glad; inclined or disposed to (--°ree;); m. N. of a king; -mundîka, m. N. of an Asura; -mridîká, -mrilîká, V. a. com passionate, gracious; -mrishta, pp. well polished; very dainty: -pushpa½âdhya, a. abounding in very bright flowers; -méka, V. a. well-established, firm; unvarying; -medhás, a.having a good understanding, intelligent, wise (ac. also -medh&asharp;m, RV.); -meru, m. N. of a mtn. (=Meru); N. of a fairy; -mná, a. [√ mnâ=√ man] well-dis posed, gracious (V.); n. (V.) benevolence, favour, grace; devotion, prayer; satisfac tion, gladness, peace: -yú, V. a. devout, be lieving; favourable; -mnâ-várî, a. f. gracious, bringing gladness (Dawn, RV.1).
suradāru n. a tree (=Deva-dâru); -druma, m. celestial tree; -dvipa, m. celes tial elephant; -dvish, m. foe of the gods, demon; ep. of Râhu; -dhanus, n. bow of the gods, rainbow; -nadî, f. river of the gods, Ganges; -nâyaka, m. leader of the gods, ep. of Indra; -nimnagâ, f. river of the gods, Ganges; -pati, m. lord of the gods, Indra: -tva, n. sovereignty of the gods, -dhanus, n. bow of Indra, rainbow; -patha, m. path of the gods (a part of the sky); -pâmsulâ, f. Apsaras: -gana, m. Apsaras folk; -pâdapa, m. celestial tree; -pura, n. city of the gods, Amarâvatî; -purodhas, m. domestic priest of the gods=Brihaspati; -pushpa, n. celestial flower: -vrishti, f. shower of celestial flowers; -pratishthâ, f. erection of a divine image.
suhata pp. thoroughly beaten; justly killed; -hána, a. easy to slay (V.); -hántu, a. id. (RV.); -háva, a. (V.) easily invoked, listening willingly; invoking well; n. (V.) successful invocation; -hásta, a. (V.)fair handed; deft of hand; (sú)-hita, pp. C.: very suitable; very salutary; perfectly satis fied, fully sated (esp. with food and drink; Br., S.; rare in C.); (sú)-huta, pp. V., E.: well offered (sacrifice); well sacrificed to (C.); n.right sacrifice (V.): -hut, a. offering a right sacrifice (S.); -hrik-khoka-vivardha na, a. increasing the sorrow of one's friends; -hrig-gana, m. sg. friend, friends: pl. friends; -hrit-tama, spv. best of friends; -hrit-tâ, f., -hrit-tva, n. friendship; -hrit-tyâga, m. desertion of a friend: -hrid, m. [good hearted] friend; ally (-hrido ganâh, friends): --°ree; a. fond of, addicted to; closely resembling; -hridaya, a. kind-hearted (V.): -tama, spv.; -hrid-bheda, m. separation of friends; -hrid vadha, m. slaying a friend; -hrid-vâkya, n. speech or advice of a friend; -hrin-nârî, f. female friend; -hrin-mitra, n. sg. friends and allies; -hemanta, m. good winter (S.); -hótri (orsú-), m. good sacrificer (V.); -hotra, m. N.
susakhi m. (nm. â) good friend; -samkruddha, pp. greatly enraged; -sam gatâ, f. N.; -samgama, m. pleasant (place of) meeting; -samgrihîta, pp. well-controlled or governed (kingdom); -sakiva, m.good minister; a. having a good minister; -saggî kri, make perfectly ready; -samkita, pp. well-gathered, carefully accumulated: -m sam-ki, collect carefully; -sattra, n. good hospital; -sattva, a. very resolute; -sadrisa, a.(î) very like (g.); -samtushta, pp. per fectly satisfied; -samtosha, a. easy to satisfy; -samdîpta, pp. flaming brightly; -samdrís, a. fair to see; -samdha, a. true to one's word; -sanna, pp. [√ sad] completely at an end, foiled; -sama, a. perfectly level or smooth; (sú)-samâhita, pp. [√ dhâ] well laden (waggon, Br.); C.: well-adorned; very attentive or intent, thoroughly concentrated; (sú)-samiddha, pp. [√ idh] well-kindled;(sú)-samriddha, pp. [√ ridh] V.: quite per fect; C.: very abundant; very wealthy; -samriddhi, f. great wealth; -sampad, f. affluence, great prosperity; (sú)-sampish- ta, pp. completely shattered (car; RV.1); -sampratapta, pp. thoroughly harassed; -sambaddha, pp. intimately connected; -sambhriti, f. due collection of requisites; -sambhrama, m. great agitation or confu sion, excessive haste; -sambhrânta, pp. completely bewildered; (sú)-sarva, a. quite complete (Br.); -sahâya, a. having a good companion or assistant: -vat, a. id.; -sâdh ana, a. easy to prove; -sâdhita, pp. well trained; -sâdhya, fp. easy to control, amen able; -sâman, n.very conciliatory words; -sârathi, a. having a good charioteer; -sita, a. pure white; -siddha, pp. well-cooked; very efficacious, of great magical power; completely supplied with (in.): -½artha, a. having completely attained one's object; -sî ma, a. having a good parting (woman).
sūrya m. [svar] sun; sun-god; N. (C.): -ka, m. N.; -kara, m. sunbeam; -kân ta, m. (beloved of the sun), sun-stone, sun crystal; -kandra, m. N.; -tapas, m. N. of a sage; -tegas, n. sunshine;(s&usharp;rya)-tvak, a. having a sun-bright skin or covering (RV.); -pâda, m. sunbeam; -putra, m. son of the sun, pat. of the Asvins, planet Saturn, and Yama: î, f. daughter of the sun, the Yamu nâ; -prabha, a. sun-bright; m. N. among others of the king after whom the eighth Lambaka of the Kathâsaritsâgara is called: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -prabhava, a. sprung from the sun (race); -prabhîya, a. belonging to king Sûryaprabha; -prasishya, m. ep. of Ganaka; -bimba, m. or n. disc of the sun; -mandala, n. id.; -matî, f. N. of a princess; -ratha, m. car of the sun; -rasmi, m. sun beam; -ruk, f. sunlight; -vamsa, m. solar race of kings; -vams-ya, a.belonging to the solar race; -varman, m. N. of a Dâmara; -vâra, m. Sunday; -sishya, m. ep. of Yâgña valkya: -½antevâsin, m. ep. of Ganaka; -samkrama, m. entrance of the sun into a new sign of the zodiac; -samkrânti, f. id.; -siddhânta, m. T. of an astronomical trea tise ascribed to the Sun; -suta, m. (son of the sun) planet Saturn; the monkey Sugrîva; -stuti, f., -stotra, n. praise of the sun.
sevita pp. frequented etc.; -i-tavya, fp. to be practised, performed, or obeyed; -tended; -i-tri, m. attendant, servant; -i-tva, n. (--°ree;) resorting to, frequenting; honouring, deference towards (--°ree;);-in, a. (--°ree;) frequenting, haunting, dwelling in, re sorting to; serving; honouring, paying hom age to, deferential towards; having sexual intercourse with; addicted to, practising; enjoying; employing; m. servant of (--°ree;); -ya, fp. to be frequented, worthy to be re sorted to, by (g.); to be followed (path); -approached; -waited upon or served, by (g.); -honoured or paid homage to; -en joyed carnally;--indulged in, cultivated, prac tised, employed, or enjoyed; m. master (opp. servant): -tâ, f. state of being honoured, en joyed, etc., -tva, n. state of being served etc., -sevaka, m. du. master and servant.
sevaka a. (--°ree;) inhabiting; practising, indulging in, addicted to, employing; tend ing (a plant); honouring; m. servant; votary, worshipper of (--°ree;).
sauhitya n. [suhita] satiety, satis faction; friendliness, kindness.
skandha m. V., C.: shoulder; C.: branching part of the stem, trunk of a tree (also S.); division, part; tract, path, region (of the winds; rare); section of a treatise (rare); quantity, aggregate (rare); often incorr. for skanda: -ka, n. kind of Aryâ metre; -desa, m. (region of the) shoulder; region of the trunk; -pîtha, n. shoulder-blade; -vat, a. having a (thick) trunk or many trunks; -siras, n. shoulder-blade.
stha stha, ṣṭha a. --°ree; [√ sthâ] standing, sitting, situated, staying, abiding, existing (in, on, among); being in (an age or condition); engaged in, occupied with, devoted to, practising.
sthita pp. [√ sthâ] standing, -up (opp. walking, sitting, lying); standing firm (in battle); staying, remaining, situated, in a place (lc., ad., --°ree;; common mg.); being in a condition or position (in., ab., lc., --°ree;, n. in app.; more commonly ad., pp., pr. pt., gd.; w. pr. pt. or gd.=continually; ord. mg.); engaged in, intent on, addicted or devoted to, practising, persevering in (lc., --°ree;); abiding in, conforming to, following (command etc., lc.); being in office; steady, kept (agreement, counsel); settled, generally accepted (also Br.); determined, resolved upon; firmly con vinced; firmly resolved to (inf., lc. of vbl. n.); ready to (d.); being there, existing, present, come (time); directed to (lc., --°ree;; effort, gaze); resting or dependent on (lc.); conducing (oppression) to (d.); remaining, left (rare); having desisted or stopped; un accompanied by iti (in the Padapâtha); stand ing alone: -m, n. imps. it was stood by (in.) =he waited; anityam sthitah, not remain ing permanently, staying only a short time; purah --, =imminent; parasparam sthitau, standing face to face (as foes); muktâ½âkâ ra-tayâ --, resting in the form of (=like) a pearl (drop of water); pade sthite,=in the Padapâtha; n. standing still, staying: -vat, pp. act. being, in (lc.).
smaradaśā f. stage of love (there are ten: delight of the eye, pensiveness, long ing, sleeplessness, emaciation, indifference to worldly objects, abandonment of shame, in fatuation, swoon, death; see Mallinâtha on Meghadûta 90); -dahana, m. burner of Kâma, Siva; -dâyin, a. arousing love; -dîpana, a. kindling love; -maya, a. produced by love; -lekha, m. love-letter; -sara-maya, a. (î) abounding in Kâma's arrows (certain flowers); -sâsana, m. chastiser of Kâma, Siva; -sâstra, n. treatise on erotics; -sakha, m. friend of Kâma, ep. of spring; -saha, a. capable of arousing love; -sâyaka-lakshya, n. target of the arrows of Kâma: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -½ari, m. foe of Kâma, Siva; -½ishudhî-kri, turn into the quiver of Kâma.
svapas a. doing good work, indus trious, artistic (V.); m. artificer (RV.).
haya m. [speeder: √ hi] steed, horse; a. urging on (in asva-hayá); -kovida, a. skilled in horses; -grîva, a. having the mane of a horse; m. a form of Vishnu; N. of an Asura and of various men; -gña,a. skilled in horses: -tâ, f. knowledge of horses; -gñâ na, n. id.; -tattva-gña, a. knowing the true nature of horses; -pa, m. groom; N. of a king; -pati, m. N. of a king; -medha, m. horse sacrifice; -lîlâvatî, f. T. of a treatise on horses; -vidyâ, f. art of managing horses; -sâstra, n. id.; -siras, n. horse's head; -sisu, m. foal; -samgrahana, n. curbing of horses.
ij. of pain, astonishment, or satisfac- tion, ah! alas! used before or after a vc., sts. with following ac.=alas for; also com- bined with kashtam, dhik, and hanta: -kash- ta-sabda, m. exclamation hâ kashtam (ah, alas!); -kâra, m. exclamation hâ.
hetvākṣepa m. statement of dis satisfaction in spite of the reason adduced (rh.); -½âbhâsa, m. fallacious reason or proof, fallacy.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
260 resultsResults for tis5 results
tisṛdhanva ‘A bow with three (arrows),’ is mentioned as a gift to the priest at the sacrifice in the Taittirīya Samhitā and in the Brāhmanas.
pratisara Is used in several passages of the Atharvaveda and later to denote an amulet, according to Roth, because it was a band, and so returned on itself (prati-sγ, ‘go back’). The sense is doubtful; perhaps ‘ attacking ’ may really be the root idea. Cf Punahsara.
pratīpa prātisatvana Is the name of a man mentioned in a hymn of the Atharvaveda. Zimmer, with great ingenuity, compares the fact that Parikṣit is mentioned as a Kuru king in the Atharvaveda, and that, according to the Epic genealogies, his grandson was Pratiśravas, with which name Prātisutvana, as very possibly a Prākritized version of Prātiśrutvana may be compared, and his great-grandson was Pratīpa. The identification cannot, however, be regarded as at all certain, and while the Epic may have derived its genealogy from the Atharvaveda, it may have preserved an independent tradition. Bohtlingk renders prātisatvanam as ‘ in the direction opposed to the Satvans’, and this may be right.
prātisutvana See Pratīpa.
bṛhaspatisava Is the name of a sacrifice by which, according to the Taittirīya Brāhmaṇa, the priest who desired to become a Purohita obtained that office. According to the Aśvalāyana śrauta Sūtra, it was the sacrifice to be performed by a priest after the Vājapeya, while the king performed the Rājasūya. In the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa, on the other hand, the Brhaspati- sava is identified with the Vājapeya; but such identity is clearly not primitive.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
260 resultsResults for tis5 resultsResults for tis135 results
tisra ājānīr uṣasas te agne RV.3.17.3b; TS.3.2.11.2b; MS.4.11.1b: 161.12; KS.2.15b.
tisra iḍā sarasvatī VS.21.19a; KS.38.10a; TB.2.6.18.3a. See tisro devīr iḍā.
tisra imāḥ pṛthivīr uta AVś.19.32.4b; AVP.11.12.4b. Cf. under imā yās tisraḥ.
tisra u te tanvo (TS. tanuvo) devavātāḥ RV.3.20.2c; TS.3.2.11.1c; MS.2.4.4c: 42.11; KS.9.19c.
tisraḥ kṛṣṇā vaśā vāruṇyaḥ TS.5.6.11.1; KSA.9.1.
tisraḥ kṣapas (TA. kṣapās) trir ahātivrajadbhiḥ RV.1.116.4a; TA.1.10.3a.
tisraḥ paṣṭhauhyo viśveṣāṃ devānām TS.5.6.17.1; KSA.9.7.
tisraḥ pṛthivīr adho astu viśvāḥ RV.7.104.11b; AVś.8.4.11b.
tisraḥ pṛthivīr upari pravā divaḥ RV.1.34.8c.
tisraḥ prajā āryā jyotiragrāḥ RV.7.33.7b; JB.2.241b (bis). Cf. tisro vācaḥ.
tisraḥ śilpā vaśā vaiśvadevyaḥ TS.5.6.13.1; KSA.9.3.
tisraḥ śyāmā vaśāḥ pauṣṇiyaḥ (KS. -ṣṇyaḥ) TS.5.6.12.1; KSA.9.2.
tisraḥ śyenīḥ parameṣṭhine TS.5.6.13.1; KSA.9.3.
tisraḥ śvetā vaśāḥ sauryaḥ TS.5.6.11.1; KSA.9.1.
tisraḥ sarasvatīr aduḥ AVś.6.100.1c.
tisraḥ sidhmā vaśā vaiśvakarmaṇyaḥ TS.5.6.14.1; KSA.9.4.
tisraś ca me trayastriṃśac ca me KS.18.12.
tisraś ca me triṃśac ca me (AVP. omits me) AVś.5.15.3a; AVP.8.5.3a.
tisraś ca me pañca ca me VS.18.24.
tisraś camvaḥ supūrṇāḥ RV.8.2.8b.
tisraś ca rājabandhavīḥ (HG. -vaiḥ) HG.2.16.8d; ApMB.2.17.26d. See prajāḥ sarvāś, and sarvāś ca rāja-.
tisras turyauhyaḥ sādhyānām TS.5.6.17.1; KSA.9.7.
tisras te jihvā ṛtajātā pūrvīḥ RV.3.20.2b; TS.3.2.11.1b; MS.2.4.4b: 42.10; KS.9.19b.
tisras trivṛdbhir mithunāḥ prajātyai TB.1.2.1.8d; Apś.5.6.1d.
tisras tredhā sarasvatī VS.20.63a; MS.3.11.3a: 144.7; KS.38.8a; TB.2.6.12.4a.
tisṛbhir astuvata VS.14.28; TS.4.3.10.1; MS.2.8.6: 110.6; KS.17.5; śB.8.4.3.4.
tisṛbhir gharmo vibhāti MS.4.9.13a: 134.7. See triśug, triśrud, and gharmas triśug.
tisṛbhiś ca vahase triṃśatā ca AVś.7.4.1c; VS.27.33c; MS.4.6.2c: 79.6; śB.4.4.1.15c; TA.1.11.8c; Aś.5.18.5c; śś.8.3.10c.
tisṝṇāṃ saptatīnām RV.8.19.37c.
tisro 'jā malhā indrāṇyai TS.5.6.19.1; KSA.9.9.
tisro jihvasya (var. lect. yahvasya) samidhaḥ parijmanaḥ MS.1.3.35a: 42.6. P: tisro jihvasya (var. lect. yahvasya) Mś.2.3.2.33. See tisro yahvasya.
tisro jihvā varuṇasya AVś.10.10.28a.
tisro dadhur (KS. dadur) devatāḥ saṃrarāṇāḥ VS.19.81b; MS.3.11.9b: 153.3; KS.38.3b; TB.2.6.4.1b.
tisro divaḥ pṛthivīs tisra invati RV.4.53.5c.
tisro divaḥ prati mahnā svarciḥ RV.2.3.2b.
tisro divas tisraḥ pṛthivīḥ AVś.4.20.2a; 19.27.3a; AVP.8.6.2a; 10.7.3a. Cf. under imā yās tisraḥ.
tisro divo aty atṛṇat (AVP. atṛṇaḥ) AVś.19.32.4a; AVP.11.12.4a.
tisro devīr agna (MS. agnā) ājyasya vyantu (MS. vyantu svāhā) MS.4.10.3: 149.5; KS.20.15; Aś.2.6.19; śś.3.13.20.
tisro devīr iḍā mahī MS.3.11.11a: 158.12. See tisra iḍā.
tisro devīr barhir idaṃ varīyaḥ RV.10.70.8a.
tisro devīr barhir edaṃ sadantu (AVś. sadantām) RV.3.4.8d; 7.2.8d; AVś.5.27.9a; AVP.9.1.8a; VS.27.19a; TS.4.1.8.2a; KS.18.17a. See next.
tisro devīr barhir edaṃ syonam RV.10.110.8c; AVś.5.12.8c; VS.29.33c; MS.2.12.6a: 150.14; 4.13.3c: 202.10; KS.16.20c; TB.3.6.3.4c; N.8.13c. See prec.
tisro devīr mayobhuvaḥ RV.1.13.9b; 5.5.8b.
tisro devīr mahi naḥ śarma yachata (AVP. me śarma yachan) AVś.5.3.7a; AVP.5.4.12a; KS.40.10a.
tisro devīr haviṣā vardhamānāḥ VS.20.43a; MS.3.11.1a: 140.10; KS.38.6a; TB.2.6.8.3a.
tisro devīr hiraṇyayīḥ (TB. hiraṇmayīḥ) VS.28.31b; TB.2.6.17.6b.
tisro devīḥ supeśasaḥ RV.9.5.8d.
tisro devīḥ svadhayā barhir edam RV.2.3.8c.
tisro deṣṭrāya nirṛtīr upāsate RV.10.114.2a.
tisro dyāvas tredhā sasrur āpaḥ RV.7.101.4b.
tisro dyāvaḥ savitur dvā upasthā RV.1.35.6a.
tisro dyāvo nihitā antar asmin RV.7.87.5a.
tisro dhātre pṛṣodarā aindrāpauṣṇāḥ (KSA. pṛṣodarāḥ pauṣṇāḥ) śyetalalāmās tūparāḥ TS.5.6.14.1; KSA.9.4.
tisro dhenavo rākāyai TS.5.6.18.1; KSA.9.8.
tisro nāsatyā rathyā parāvataḥ RV.1.34.7c.
tisro bhūmīr adhikṣitāḥ RV.8.41.9b.
tisro bhūmīr uparāḥ ṣaḍvidhānāḥ RV.7.87.5b.
tisro bhūmīr dhārayan (MS. -yaṃs) trīṃr (MS. trīnr) uta dyūn RV.2.27.8a; TS.2.1.11.5a; MS.4.14.14a: 239.2; KS.11.12a; Aś.3.8.1. P: tisro bhūmīr dhārayan TB.2.8.1.6.
tisro bhūmīr nṛpate trīṇi rocanā RV.1.102.8b.
tisro mahīr uparās tasthur atyāḥ RV.3.56.2c.
tisro mātṝs trīn pitṝn bibhrad ekaḥ RV.1.164.10a; AVś.9.9.10a.
tisro mātrā gandharvāṇām AVś.3.24.6a; AVP.5.30.8a.
tisro meṣya ādityāḥ TS.5.6.19.1; KSA.9.9.
tisro yad agne śaradas tvām it RV.1.72.3a; TB.2.4.5.6a.
tisro yahvasya samidhaḥ parijmanaḥ RV.3.2.9a; Apś.12.7.10a. P: tisro yahvasya Apś.12.7.13. See tisro jihvasya.
tisro rātrīḥ surāsutā VS.19.14d.
tisro 'ruṇā dityauhyas tā rudrāṇām TS.5.6.15.1; KSA.9.5.
tisro rohiṇīr vaśā maitriyaḥ (KSA. rauhiṇyo vaśā maitryaḥ) TS.5.6.12.1; KSA.9.2.
tisro rohiṇīs (KSA. -ṇyas) tryavyas tā vasūnām TS.5.6.15.1; KSA.9.5.
tisro vaśā atihitāḥ sadhasthe AVP.12.9.3b.
tisro vahanti sādhuyā RV.10.33.5b.
tisro vāca īrayati pra vahniḥ RV.9.97.34a; SV.1.525a; 2.209a; JB.3.46a; PB.12.3.6; N.14.14a.
tisro vāca ud īrate RV.9.33.4a; SV.1.471a; 2.219a; JB.3.51a; PB.12.5.1; Svidh.1.4.4.
tisro vācaḥ pra vada jyotiragrāḥ RV.7.101.1a. Cf. BṛhD.6.25; Rvidh.2.30.1. Cf. tisraḥ prajā.
tisro vāco nihitā antar asmin AVś.7.43.1c.
tisro vāco makhasyuvaḥ RV.9.50.2b; SV.2.556b.
tisro ha prajā atyāyam āyan (JB. īyuḥ) AVś.10.8.3a; JB.2.229a (ter). See prajā ha tisro.
tistire barhir ānuṣak RV.3.41.2b; AVś.20.23.2b.
atisargaṃ dadato mānavāya # MS.2.13.22a: 167.18; KS.40.12a; Apś.17.13.2a.
atisṛtyātisarāḥ # AVP.7.18.5a.
atisṛṣṭā agnayo divyāḥ # AVś.16.1.1.
atisṛṣṭo apāṃ vṛṣabhaḥ # AVś.16.1.1; Kauś.9.9.
atisṛṣṭo gavāṃ bhāgaḥ # MS.1.1.2: 1.8; Apś.1.3.9; Mś.1.1.1.31.
atisṛṣṭo dveṣṭā yo 'smān dveṣṭi yaṃ ca vayaṃ dviṣmaḥ # Kauś.90.6.
atisthūlaṃ cātikṛśaṃ ca # VS.30.22; VSK.34.22. See atikṛśam.
aditis te kakṣāṃ badhnātu vedasyānuvaktavai medhāyai śraddhāyā anūktasyānirākaraṇāya brahmaṇe brahmavarcasāya # HG.1.4.6.
aditis te bilaṃ etc. # see aditiṣ ṭe bilaṃ.
aditis tvā etc. # see aditiṣ ṭvā.
aditis sadohavirdhānābhyām # KS.9.10. See marutaḥ sado-.
antisumne mahivrate # AVś.7.112.1b; 14.2.45b.
ardhāhutis tu sauviṣṭakṛtī # Kauś.73.12a.
aṣṭāśītisahasrāṇi # AB.8.22.5a.
citpatis tvā punātu # TS.1.2.1.2; 6.1.1.9; MS.1.2.1: 10.6; 3.6.3: 62.15; KS.2.1; 23.1; Apś.10.7.10. P: citpatis tvā Mś.2.1.1.40.
jyotis tad yad etc. # see jyotis tena yena etc.
jyotis tamaso vayunāvad asthāt # RV.4.51.1b.
jyotis tena yena gāyatrī # ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tena yena chandaḥ # ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tena yena jyotiḥ # ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tena yena devatā (JB. jyotis tad yad devatā) # JB.1.76; ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tena yenark (JB. jyotis tad yad ṛk) # JB.1.76; ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tena yena sāma (JB. jyotis tad yad sāma) # JB.1.76; ṣB.1.4.9.
jyotis tvā jyotiṣi # TS.1.1.10.3; TB.3.3.4.6.
dṛtis turīyo madhuno vi rapśate # RV.4.45.1d.
paṅktis triṣṭubhe # Vait.1.18. Cf. gāyatrī triṣṭubhe.
paṅktis tvā chandasām avatu (KS. tvā chandasāvatu; VS.śB. tvāvatu) # VS.10.14; TS.1.8.13.2; MS.2.6.10: 70.1; KS.15.7; śB.5.4.1.7.
prajāpatisṛṣṭānāṃ prajānām # TB.1.2.1.3a; Apś.5.1.7a.
prajāpatisṛṣṭo maṇiḥ # AVś.10.6.19c.
prajāpatis tanvaṃ me juṣasva # MG.1.14.16a. See prajāpate etc.
prajāpatis tapasā brahmaṇe 'pacat # AVś.4.35.1b.
prajāpatis tṛpyatu # śG.4.9.3; 6.6.10. Cf. AG.3.4.1, and prajāpatiṃ tarpayāmi.
prajāpatis te hastam agrabhīt # HG.1.5.9.
prajāpatis tvā (sc. yunaktu) # Lś.2.5.21.
prajāpatis tvā sādayatu # TS.5.5.2.4 (bis); TB.3.10.2.1 (quater); 11.1.1--21; TA.4.17.1; 18.1; 19.1; 6.7.3 (bis); 8.1 (bis); Apś.16.21.6; 17.25.1; 19.11.7.
prajāpatis tvā sādayatu divaḥ pṛṣṭhe jyotiṣmatīm # TS.4.4.6.1; KS.17.10; 39.1; Apś.17.4.4.
prajāpatis tvā (MSṃś. -patiṣ ṭvā) sādayatu pṛthivyāḥ pṛṣṭhe (KS. pṛṣṭhe jyotiṣmatīṃ vyacasvatīṃ prathasvatīm; TS. pṛṣṭhe vyacasvatīṃ prathasvatīm) # TS.4.2.9.1; KS.39.3; MS.2.8.14: 117.15; 4.9.16: 135.3; Apś.16.23.1; Mś.6.1.5.34. P: prajāpatiṣ ṭvā sādayatu Mś.6.1.7.9. See prajāpatiṣ ṭvā sādayatu pṛṣṭhe.
pratisaro 'si # AVś.2.11.2; AVP.1.57.2.
pratispāśanam anti tam # AVś.8.5.11e.
bṛhaspatisutasya ta (MS. tā; omitted in KS., with hiatus between -sutasya and inda) indo (KSṃS. inda) indriyāvataḥ patnīvantaṃ (KS. -vato) grahaṃ gṛhṇāmi (KS. graham ṛdhyāsam; MS. grahaṃ rādhyāsam) # TS.1.4.27.1; MS.1.3.29: 40.3; KS.4.11. Ps: bṛhaspatisutasya tā inda indriyāvataḥ MS.4.7.4: 97.10; bṛhaspatisutasya ta indriyāva (iti !) TS.6.5.8.3; KS.28.8; bṛhaspatiprasutasya te Apś.13.14.7; bṛhaspatisutasya te Mś.2.5.2.10. See next.
bṛhaspatisutasya deva soma ta indor (VSK. inda) indriyāvataḥ patnīvato grahāṃ ṛdhyāsam # VS.8.9; VSK.8.6.1; śB.4.4.2.12. P: bṛhaspatisutasya Kś.10.6.16. See prec.
bṛhaspatis tanutām imaṃ naḥ # TS.1.5.3.2c; 6.3.3c; 7.1.5; TB.3.7.6.16c. See under bṛhaspatir yajñam imaṃ.
bṛhaspatis tam akṛṇot # AVP.7.5.2a.
bṛhaspatis tam ava jaṅghanītu # AVP.2.65.3c.
bṛhaspatis tamasi jyotir ichan # RV.10.67.4c; AVś.20.91.4c.
bṛhaspatis tara āpaś ca gṛdhraḥ # RV.1.190.7d.
bṛhaspatis te hastam agrabhīt # HG.1.5.9.
bṛhaspatis triṣadhastho raveṇa # RV.4.50.1b; AVś.20.88.1b; MS.4.12.3b: 193.3; KS.9.19b.
bṛhaspatis tvā niyunaktu etc. # see bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā etc.
bṛhaspatis tvā prajāpataye jyotiṣmatīṃ (KS. jyotiṣmate jyotiṣmatīṃ) juhotu (KS. adds svāhā) # TS.3.3.10.1; KS.13.11,12.
bṛhaspatis tvā viśvair etc. # see bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā etc.
bṛhaspatis tvā sādayatu etc. # see bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā etc.
bṛhaspatis tvā sumne etc. # see bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā etc.
bṛhaspatis tvopariṣṭād abhiṣiñcatu pāṅktena chandasā # TB.2.7.15.8. Cf. bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā viśvair.
bṛhaspatis tvopasīdatu # see bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvo-.
bṛhaspatis savitā devo agniḥ # KS.16.12b. See bṛhaspatir vo yunaktu.
yathāgamaprajñāśrutismṛtivibhavād anukrāntamānād avivādapratiṣṭhād abhayaṃ śaṃ bhave no astu # śG.6.6.16.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"tis" has 354 results
ātisparśaexcess of contact, which to a certain extent spoils the pronunciation and leads to.a fault. अतिस्पर्श is the same as दुःस्पर्श, the letter ळ being called दुःस्पृष्ट on account of excess of contact. This excess of contact ( अतिस्पर्श) in the case of the utterance of the letter र् results into a fault as it practically borders on stammering; confer, compare अतिस्पर्शो बर्बरता च रेफे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 26.
atisvārya(अतिस्वार also)name of the seventh musical note in the singing of Sāman. confer, compareक्रष्टुप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातिस्वार्याः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 13.
anubhūtisvarūpācāryaa writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The grammar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India.
aprakṛtisvaratvanon-retention of the original word accents; confer, compare तत्र यस्य गतेरप्रकृतिस्वरत्वं तस्मादन्तेादात्वं प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI.2.49. See the word प्रकृतिस्वरत्व.
kāśikāvṛttisāraa commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti named अमृतसूति by Vāraṇāvateśa-śāstrin.
gatisamāsaa compound with the preceding gati word prescribed by the rule कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18; confer, compare गतिसमास । निष्कौशाम्बिः, निर्वाराणसि: M.Bh. on II. 4. 26 .
tisvarathe acute accent for the last vowel of a word ending with क्त of the past passive participle. denoting a genus; confer, compare P. VI. 2.170.
durghaṭavṛttisaṃskaraṇaa grammar work on the formation of difficult words attributed to शर्वरक्षित or सर्वरक्षित.
nivṛttisthānaplaces where the substitutes गुण and वृद्धि do not apply ; weak terminations; kit or nit affixes in Panini's grammar; confer, compare अथाप्यस्तेर्निवृत्तिस्थानेष्वादिलेापो भवति । स्तः सन्तीति । Nirukta of Yāska.II. 1. The word संक्रम is also used in this sense by ancient grammarians.
pūrvapadaprakṛtisvararetention of the original acute accent of the first member in a compound as is generally noticed in the bahuvrihi compound and in special cases in other compounds; cf बहुव्रीहौ प्रकृत्या पूर्वपदम् and the following rules P. WI. 2.1 to 63.
prakrutisvarathe accent id est, that is the acute accent ( उदात्त ) possessed by the original word as contrasted with the accent of the afix ( प्रत्ययस्वर ) which (latter) is looked upon as more powerful; confer, compare (बहुव्रीहौ) पूर्वपदं प्रकृतिस्वरं भवति M.Bh, on II.I.24, II. 2.29 Vart. 17, See Panini Sutras VI.2.1 to 63.
pratisaṃskaraṇaediting with improvement, with an attempt to restore the correct version or the original text in the place of the corrupt one sometimes suitable additions and improvements are also made; e. g. चरकप्रतिसंस्करण attributed to Patanjali.
bahuvrīhiprakṛtisvarathe accent peculiar to, or specifically mentioned in the case of the Bahuvrihi compound viz. the retention of its own accents by the first member, in spite of the general rule that a compound word has the last vowel accented acute id est, that is उदात्त. confer, compare बहुव्रीहौ प्रकृत्या पूर्वपदम्. P. VI. 2.1. The expression बहुव्रीहिस्वर in this very sense is used in the Mahabhasya confer, compare बहुव्रीहिस्वरं शास्ति समासान्तविधेः सुकृत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 2.1.
vibhāktisvarapratirūpakasimilar in form to a word ending in a case-affix or to a vowel. Such words are looked upon, and are treated as indeclinables exempli gratia, for example शनै:, चिरेण, अस्ति, उ, ए et cetera, and others; confer, compare the usual expressions तिडन्तप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम् et cetera, and others confer, compare विभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाता भवन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII.3.1: confer, compare also उपसर्गविभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाताः । a gaṇasūtra inside the चादिगण mentioned in P.I.4.57.
vṛtisaṃgrahaname of a gloss on Panini's Astadhyayi written by Ramacandra.
vṛttisamavāyaserial arrangement of letters in a specific way ( as for instance in the Mahesvara Sutras) for the sake of grammatical functions; confer, compare वृत्तिसमवायार्थं उपदेशः | वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः। समवायॊ वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण सांनवेशः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika I.
vṛttisamuddeśaname given to the last of the fourteen sections of the third chapter of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya ( viz. the संकीर्णकाण्ड ) in which the taddhita affixes and their interpretations are discussedition
vṛttisūtraa rule forming the basis of a vrtti, i. e. a rule on which glosses are written, as contrasted with वार्तिकसूत्र or वार्तिक a pithy Sutralike statement composed as an addition or a modification of the original Sutra; confer, compare केचित्तावदाहुर्यद् वृत्तिसूत्रे इति | संख्ययाव्ययासन्नादूराधिकसंख्यां: संख्येये ( P. II. 2.25 ) इति | M, Bh. on P. II. 2. 24,
śratisāmānyacommon hearing; common form of technically different wordings, such as अा of टाप्, डाप् and चाप् feminine affixes, or ई of ङिप्, ङिष्, and ङीन् feminine. affixes; confer, compare र इति श्रुतिसामान्यमुपादीयते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.VIII. 2.18: confer, compare also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VIII. 2.42 and VIII. 4.1.
a(1)the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.
aṃ(ं)nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.
akṣarasamāmnāyaalphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ,ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.
anākṛtinot capable of presenting (on its mere utterance) any tangible form or figure the word is used in connection with a technical term (संज्ञाशब्द) which presents its sense by a definition actually laid down or given in the treatise: confer, compare अनाकृति: संज्ञा । अाकृतिमन्तः संज्ञिनः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1.
aniṭkārikā(1)name given to Stanzas giving a complete list of such roots as do not allow the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. For such Kārikās see Sid. Kaum. on VII.1.5 as also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a short treatise enumerating in 11 verses the roots which do not admit the augment इट् before the ārdhadhatuka affixes. The work is anonymous, and not printed so far, possibly composed by a Jain writer. The work possibly belongs to the Kātantra system and has got short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि, विवरण, टीका, टिप्पणी and the like which are all anonymous.
appayadīkṣitaअप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.
artha(1)literally signification,conveyed sense or object. The sense is sometimes looked upon as a determinant of the foot of a verse: confer, compare प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII 16. It is generally looked upon as the determinant of a word (पद). A unit or element of a word which is possessed of an independent sense is looked upon as a Pada in the old Grammar treatises; confer, compare अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; confer, compare also अर्थः पदम् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.2, explained by उव्वट as अर्थाभिधायि पदम् । पद्यते गम्यते ज्ञायतेSर्थोनेनेति पदम् । There is no difference of opinion regarding the fact that, out of the four standard kinds of words नाम, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात, the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात do possess an independent sense of their own. Regarding possession of sense and the manner in which the sense is conveyed, by the other two viz. the Upasargas (prepositions) and Nipātas (particles) there is a striking difference of opinion among scholars of grammar. Although Pāṇini has given the actual designation पद to words ending with either the case or the conjugational affixes, he has looked upon the different units or elements of a Pada such as the base, the affix, the augment and the like as possessed of individually separate senses. There is practically nothing in Pāṇini's sūtras to prove that Nipātas and Upasargas do not possess an independent sense. Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसत्वे, which means that च and other indeclinables are called Nipātas when they do not mean सत्त्व, presents a riddle as to the meaning which च and the like should convey if they do not mean सत्त्व or द्रव्य id est, that is a substance. The Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal activity and if they do not mean सत्व or द्रव्य, too, they will have to be called अनर्थक (absolutely meaningless) and in that case they would not be termed Prātipadika, and no caseaffix would be applied to them. To avoid this difficulty, the Vārtikakāra had to make an effort and he wrote a Vārtika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम् । P. I.2.45 Vār. 12. As a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा and others do possess a sense as shown by their presence and absence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense, however, is conveyed rather in a different manner as the word समूह, or समुदाय, which is the meaning conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot be substituted for च as its Synonym in the sentence राम: कुष्णश्च. Looking to the different ways in which their sense is conveyed by nouns and verbs on the one hand, and by affixes, prepositions and indeclinables on the other hand, Bhartṛhari, possibly following Yāska and Vyāḍi, has developed the theory of द्योतकत्व as contrasted with वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum that indeclinables, affixes and prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not directly convey any specific sense as their own, but they are mere signs to show some specific property or excellence of the sense conveyed by the word to which they are attached; confer, compare also the statement 'न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेगद्योतका भवन्ति । Nir 1.3. The Grammarians, just like the rhetoricians have stated hat the connection between words and their senses is a permanent one ( नित्य ), the only difference in their views being that the rhetoricians state that words are related; no doubt permanently, to their sense by means of संकेत or convention which solely depends on the will of God, while the Grammarians say that the expression of sense is only a natural function of words; confer, compare 'अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम्' Vārttika No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्योतकत्व see Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari II. 165-206.
avyayasaṃgrahaname of a treatise ondeclinable words attributed to Sākaṭāyana.
akhyātaprakriyāa work dealing with verbs, written by Anubhūtisvarūpācārya on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa.
aākhyātavyākaraṇaa treatise on verbs discussing verbal forms by VaṅgaSena.
ācāryadeśīyaa partisan of the preceptor Pāṇini or the Sūtrakāra who is looked upon as having approxmately the same authority as the Sūtrakāra; confer, compare अाचार्यदेशीय अाहन वक्तव्य इति l Kaiyaṭa on I.4.105, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.
ātiśāyikāntaa word ending with an atisāyika affix; confer, compare अातिदायिकान्तात्स्वार्थे छन्दसि आतिशायिको दृश्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 3.55.
āraḍeKRISHNASHASTRI a reputed Naiyāyika of Banaras of the nineteenth century, who wrote, besides many treatises on Nyāya, a short gloss on the Sutras of Pāṇini, called Pāṇini-sūtra-vṛtti.
indraname of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an exhaustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; confer, compare the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commencement of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by Pāṇini. Many quotations believed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in grammar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing various topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjugation, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on followed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya edition by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127.
iṣṭaa word frequently used in the Vārttikas and the Mahābhāṣya and other treatises in the senses of (1) a desired object, (2) a desired purpose, (3) a desired statement, (4) a desired form id est, that is the correct form : confer, compare इष्टान्वाख्यानं खल्वपि भवति: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).I.1. Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. 1. योगविभागादिष्टसिद्धिः Pari.Śek. Pari. 114.
iṣṭatantravyākaraṇaa short treatise on grammar ascribed to Jayadeva.
īśvarakāntaauthor of 'Dhātumāla', a short metrical treatise on roots.
īśvarānandaauthor of (l) a gloss on Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣya-pradīpa, and (2)an independent treatise Śābdabodhataraṅgiṇī. He is believed to have been a pupil of सत्यानन्द and iived in the latter part of the 16th century A.D.
uktipadaउक्तिपदानि a short anonymous treatise on case-relations, compounds et cetera, and others written mostly in Gujarati.
udayakīrtiauthor of a treatise giving rules for the determination of the pada or padas of roots; the treatise is named पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकाटीका He was a Jain grammarian, and one of the pupils of Sādhusundara.
udāttathe acute accent defined by Pāṇini in the words उचैरुदात्त: P.I.2. 29. The word उच्चैः is explained by Patañjali in the words 'आयामो दारुण्यं अणुता स्वस्य इति उचैःकराणि शब्दस्य' where आयाम (गात्रनिग्रह restriction of the organs), दारुण्य (रूक्षता rudeness ) and स्वस्य अणुता ( कण्ठस्य संवृतता closure of the glottis) are given as specific characteristics of the acute accent. The acute is the prominent accent in a word-a simple word as also a compound word-and when a vowel in a word is possessed of the acute accent, the remaining vowels have the अनुदात्त or the grave accent. Accent is a property of vowels and consonants do not possess any independent accent. They possess the accent of the adjoining vowel connected with it. The acute accert corresponds to what is termed 'accent' in English and other languages.
upasargavādaa treatise on upasargas, by Harikṛṣna.
vupasargavicāraa treatise on upasargas by Gadādhara Cakravartin.
upasargavṛttia treatise on upasargas by Bharatamalla in the Sixteenth Century A.D.
ekadeśin( a thing or a substance )composed of parts; cf the term एकदेशिसमास or एकदेशितत्पुरुष, used in connection with compounds of words such as पूर्व, पर and others with words showing the constituted whole ( एकदेशिन्) prescribed by the rule पूर्वपराधरोत्तरमेकदेशिनेकाधिकरणे P. II. 2.1 ; (2) a partisan; confer, compare the word सिद्धान्त्येकदेशिन् used often by commentators.
aindraname of an ancient school of grammar and of the treatise also, belonging to that school, believed to have been written under instructions of Indra. The work is not available. Patañjali mentions that Bṛhaspati instructed Indra for one thousand celestial years and still did not finish his instructions in words': (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.1 ). The Taittirīya Saṁhitā mentions the same. Pāṇini has referred to some ancient grammarians of the East by the word प्राचाम् without mentioning their names, and scholars like Burnell think that the grammar assigned to Indra is to be referred to by the word प्राचाम्. The Bṛhatkathāmañjarī remarks that Pāṇini's grammar threw into the background the Aindra Grammar. Some scholars believe that Kalāpa grammar which is available today is based upon Aindra,just as Cāndra is based upon Pāṇini's grammar. References to Aindra Grammar are found in the commentary on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa, in the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as also in the commentary upon the Mahābhārata by Devabodha.Quotations, although very few, are given by some writers from the work. All these facts prove that there was an ancient pre-Pāṇinian treatise on Grammar assigned to इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyākaraṇa.For details see Dr.Burnell's 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' as also Vol. VII pages 124-126 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya, edited by the D.E.Society, Poona.
aauṇādikaan afix mentioned in the class of affixes called उणादि in treatises of Pāṇini and other grammarians; confer, compare नमुचि । मुचेरौणादिकः केिप्रत्ययः Kāś.on P.VI.3.75; फिडफिड्डौ अौणादिकौ प्रत्ययौ M.Bh. on Māheśvarasūtras. 2. See the word उणादि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
kaṇṭhaglottis: cavity in the throat holding vocal cords; the place of the production of the sounds अ, अI and ह; confer, compare अहविसर्जनीयाः कण्ठे V, Pr.I. 71; cf, also कण्ठ्योsकारः प्रथमपञ्चमौ च R.Pr.I.18.
kaṇṭhyaproduced at the throat or at the glottis; the vowel अ, visarga and the consonant ह् are called कण्ठ्यं in the Prātiśākhyas, while later grammarians include the guttural consonants क्, ख् ग्, घ् and ङ् among the Kaṇṭhya letters; confer, compare अकुहविसर्जनीयानां कण्ठः Sid. Kau.on तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P.I.1.9. See कण्ठ.
karmadhārayaname technically given to a compound-formation of two words in apposition i. e. used in the same case, technically called समानाधिकरण showing the same substratutm; confer, compare तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः I 2.42. The karmadhāraya compound is looked upon as a variety of the tatpuruṣa compound. There is no satisfactory explanation of the reason why such a compound is termed कर्मधारय. Śākaṭāyana defines Karmadhāraya as विशेषणं व्यभिचारि एकार्थं कर्मधारयश्च where the word विशेषण is explained as व्यावर्तक or भेदक (distinguishing attribute) showing that the word कर्म may mean भेदकक्रिया. The word कर्मधारय in that case could mean 'कर्म भेदकक्रिया, तां धारयति असौ कर्मधारयः' a compound which gives a specification of the thing in hand.
kalāpa(कलाप-व्याकरण)alternative name given to the treatise on grammar written by Sarvavarman who is believed to have lived in the days of the Sātavāhana kings. The treatise is popularly known by the namc Kātantra Vyākaraṇa. The available treatise,viz. Kalpasūtras, is much similar to the Kātantra Sūtras having a few changes and additions only here and there.It is rather risky to say that Kalāpa was an ancient system of grammar which is referred to in the Pāṇini Sūtra कलापिनोण् P. IV.3.108. For details see कातन्त्र.
kavikalpadrumaa treatise on roots written by Bopadeva, the son of Keśava and the pupil of Dhaneśa who lived in the time of Hemādri, the Yādava King of Devagiri in the thirteenth century. He has written a short grammar work named Mugdhabodha which has been very popular in Bengal being studied in many Tols or Pāṭhaśālās.
kavicandraauthor of a small treatise on grammar called Sārasatvarī. He lived in the seventeenth century A.D. He was a resident of Darbhaṅgā. Jayakṛṣṇa is also given as the name of the author of the Sārasatvarī grammar and it is possible that Jayakṛṣṇa was given the title, or another name, Kavicandra.
kātantraname of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.
kātantrottaraa treatise on the Kātantra Grammar believed to have been written by Vidyānanda.
kārakaliterally doer of an action. The word is used in the technical sense ; 1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारकशब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्थान्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I. 4.23: confer, compare also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः । साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in short, means 'the capacity in which a thing becomes instrumental in bringing about an action'. This capacity is looked upon as the sense of the case-affixes which express it. There are six kārakas given in all grammar treatises अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and कर्तृ to express which the case affixes or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया, द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively used which, hence, are called Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with Upapadavibhaktis, which show a relation between two substantives and hence are looked upon as weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis; confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as a very important and difficult chapter in treatises of grammar and there are several small compendiums written by scholars dealing with kārakas only. For the topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to 55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pp.262-264 published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
kārakakārikāpossibly another name for the treatise on Kārakas known as कारकचक्र written by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva the reputed grammarian of Bengal who lived in the latter half of the twelfth century A. D. See कारकचक्र.
kārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍanaalso called षट्कारक-खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of theauthor's bigger work named त्रिलो-चनचन्द्रिका. The work is a discourse on the six kārakas written by Maṇikaṇṭha, a grammarian of the Kātantra school. He has also written another treatise named Kārakavicāra
kārakatattvaa treatise on the topic of Kārakas written by Cakrapāṇiśeṣa, belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who lived in the seventeenth century A. D.
kārakanirṇayaa work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.
kārakavāda(1)a treatise discussing the several Kārakas, written by Kṛṣṇaśāstri Ārade a famous Naiyāyika of Benares who lived in the eighteenth century A. D; (2) a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below. a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below.
kuppuśāstrina famous grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote some works on grammar of which the परिभाषाभास्कर is an independent treatise on Paribhāṣās.
kṛdvṛttia short treatise by a grammarian named मोक्षेश्वर who lived in the fifteenth century. The work deals with verbal derivatives.
kodṇḍarāmaa scholar of Sanskrit Vyākaraṇa who composed शब्दसिद्धान्तमञ्जरी a small treatise dealing with the declension of nouns.
kaumāra,komāravyākaraṇa(1)an alternative name of the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa given to it on the strength of the traditional belief that the original inspiration for writing it was received by Sarvavarman from Kumara or Kārtikeya; (2) small treatises bearing the name Kaumāravyākaraṇa written by Munipuṅgava and Bhāvasena. The latter has written Kātantrarūpamāla also.
khataddhita affix. affix, always changed into ईन, (l) applied to the word कुल in the sense of a descendant, exempli gratia, for example कुलीनः, आढ्यकुलीन:; confer, compare P. IV. 1.139; (2) applied to the words अवार, पार, पारावार and अवारपार in the Śaīṣika senses, e. g. अवारीणः, पारीणः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.93 and Vārttikas 2, 3 on it; (3) applied to words ending in the word वर्ग ( which does not mean 'sound' or 'letter' ) in the sense of 'present there,' e. g. वासुदेववर्गीणः, युधिष्ठिरवर्गीणः; confer, compare P. IV. 3.64; (4) applied to the words सर्वधुर and एकधुर in the sense of 'bearing,' and to ओजसू , वेशोभग, यशोभग and पूर्व, exempli gratia, for example ओजसीनः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.IV.4.78, 79, 130, 132, 133; (5) applied in the sense of 'favourable to' to the words आत्मन् , विश्वजन, et cetera, and others (P.V.1.9), to विंशतिक, (32) to अाढक, अाचित, पात्र and others (53-55), to समा (85-86), to रात्रि, अहन् , संवत्सर and वर्ष (87-88) and संवत्सर and परिवत्सर (92); e. g. आत्मनीनः, आढकीनः पात्रीणः, समीनः, संवत्सरीणः et cetera, and others; (6) to the words सर्वचर्मन्, यथामुख et cetera, and others e. g. सर्वचर्मीणः confer, compare P.V. 2.5 to 17; (7) to the words अषडक्ष, अशितंगु et cetera, and others confer, compare P.V.4.7,8. e. g. अषडक्षीणः. (8) ख is also a technical term in the sense of elision or लोप in the Jainendra Grammar confer, compare Jain I. 1.61. (9) The word ख is used in the sense of 'glottis' or the hole of the throat ( गलबिल ) in the ancient Prātiṣākhya works.
gaṇapāṭhathe mention individually of the several words forming a class or gaṇa, named after the first word said to have been written by Pāṇini himself as a supplementary work to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka or Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., the Sikṣā,the Dhātupātha and the Lingānuśāsana being the other ones. Other grammarians such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others have their own gaṇapāthās. The gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascribed to Pāṇini; the issue is questioned, however, by modern scholars. The text of the gaṇapāṭha is metrically arranged by some scholars. The most scholarly and authoritative treatise on gaṇapāṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī of Vardhamāna.
gārgyaan ancient reputed grammarian and possibly a writer of a Nirukta work, whose views, especially in.connection with accents are given in the Pratisakhya works, the Nirukta and Panini's Astadhyayi. Although belonging to the Nirukta school, he upheld the view of the Vaiyakaranas that all words cannot be derived, but only some of them: cf Nirukta of Yāska.I. 12.3. cf, also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 167, Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.5, III. 14.22: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 13; XIII. 12: P. VII. 3.99, VIII. 3.20, VIII. 4.69.
guṇa(1)degree of a vowel; vocalic degree, the second out of the three degrees of a vowel viz. primary degree, guna degree and vrddhi degree exempli gratia, for example इ, ए and ऐ or उ, ओ and औ. अ is given as a guna of अ; but regarding अ also,three degrees can be stated अ, अ and आ. In the Pratisakhya and Nirukta ए is called गुण or even गुणागम but no definiti6n is given ; confer, compare गुणागमादेतनभावि चेतन R.Pr.XI.6;शेवम् इति विभीषितगुणः। शेवमित्यपि भवति Nir.X.17: (2) the properties of phonetic elements or letters such as श्वास,नाद et cetera, and others: confer, compareṚgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) Ch.XIII : (3) secondary, subordinate;confer, compare शेषः,अङ्गं, गुणः इति समानार्थाः Durgācārya's commentary on the Nirukta.on Nirukta of Yāska.I.12: (4) properties residing in a substance just as whiteness, et cetera, and others in a garment which are different from the substance ( द्रव्य ). The word गुण is explained by quotations from ancient grammarians in the Maha bhasya as सत्वे निविशतेsपैति पृथग्जातिषु दृश्यते । अाघेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोSसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः ॥ अपर आह । उपैत्यन्यज्जहात्यन्यद् दृष्टो द्रव्यान्तरेष्वपि। वाचकः सर्वलिङ्गानां द्रव्यादन्यो गुणः स्मृतः ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.44;cf also शब्दस्पर्शरूपरसगन्धा गुणास्ततोन्यद् द्रव्यम् ,M.Bh.on V.1.119 (5) properties of letters like उदात्तत्व, अनुदात्तत्व, स्वरितत्व, ह्र्स्वत्व, दीर्घत्व, प्लुतत्व, अानुनासिक्य et cetera, and others; confer, compare भेदकत्वाद् गुणस्य । आनुनासिक्यं नाम गुणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1.. Vart, 13: (6) determinant cf भवति बहुव्रीहौ तद्गुणसंविज्ञानमपि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.27; (7) technical term in Panini's grarnmar standing for the vowels अ, ए and ओ, confer, compare अदेङ्गुणः P.I.1.2. For the various shades of the meaning of the word गुण, see Mahabhasya on V.1.119. " गुणशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः । अस्त्येव समेष्ववयवेषु वर्तते ।...... चर्चागुणांश्च ।
gopāla( देव )known more by the nickname of मन्नुदेव or मन्तुदेव who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote several commentary works on well-known grammatical treatises such as the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, Laghusabdendusekhara, Paribhasendusekhara et cetera, and others He is believed to have written a treatise on Ganasutras also; (2) a grammarian different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. मन्नुदेव who has written an explanatory work on the Pratisakhyas;.(3) a scholar of grammar, different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. who is believed to have written a gloss named Visamarthadipika on the Sarasvata Vyakarana at the end of the sixteenth century.
gopīcandraknown also by the name गेयींचन्द्र who .has written several commentary works on the grammatical treatises of the Samksipatasara or Jaumāra school of Vyakarana founded by Kramdisvara and Jumaranandin in the 12th century, the well-known among them being the संक्षिप्तसाटीका, संक्षितसारपरिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका. He is believed to have lived in the thirteenth century A. D.
golḍsṭyūkaraa well known German scholar who made a sound study of Paini's Sanskrit Vyakarana and wrote a very informative treatise entitled 'Panini, his place in Sanskrit Literature.' He lived in the latter half of the 19th century.
gotrinda( चक्रवर्तिन् )writer of Samasavada, a short treatise on the sense conveyed by compound words.
gautamaan ancient sage referred to in the Pratisakhya works as a Pratisakhyakara; confer, compare T.Pr. V.38.
ghantaddhita affix. affix अ applied to the words शुक्र, तुग्र, पात्र, and to multisyllabic words in specified senses, causing the acute accent on the first vowel of the word so formed; confer, compareIV.2.26, IV.4. 115, V.1.68, V.3.79, 80.
ghanaa variety of the क्रमपाठ or recital of the Vedic hymns to show the serial order of words there; one of the eight vikrtis of the padapātha.
caṅgadāsaa grammarian who has written a work on the topic of the five vrttis. The work is named चङ्गवृति.
caṅgavṛttia short treatise written by वङ्गदास, dealing with the topic of the five compact expressions or Vrttis viz. कृत्, तद्वित, समास, एकशेष, and सनादिधातु.
caṅgudāsaor चाड्गुदास a scholar of grammar who has written an independent work on Sanskrit Vyakaana called वैयाकरणजीवातु. The treatise is also known as चाङ्गुसूत्र or चाङ्गु-व्याकरण.
candrācāryaa grammarian mentioned by Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya as one who took a leading part in restoring the traditional explanation of Panini's Vyakarana which, by the spread of rival easy treatises on grammar, had become almost lost: confer, compare यः पतञ्जलिशिष्येभ्यो भ्रष्टो ब्याकरणागमः । काले स दाक्षिणात्येषु ग्रन्थमात्रे व्यवस्थित: ॥ पर्वतादागमं लब्ध्वा भाष्यबीजानुसारिभि: । स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः ॥ Vakyapadiya II. 488-489. See चन्द्र and चन्द्रगोमिन्.
cavargathe group of consonants of the palatal class,.wiz.च् , छ् , ज् , झ् , and ञ्. The word च is used in the same sense in the Pratisakhya works.See the word च.
cāṅgusūtraa treatise on the grammar Written by चाडगुदास in the Sutra form,which was named वैयाकरणजीवातु by him.
cāndraname of a treatise on grammar written by Candra, who is believed to have been the same as Candragomin. The Grammar is based upon that of Panini, but it does not treat Vedic forms and accents. See the word चन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see pp. 375376 Patanjali Mahabhasya. Vol. VII, D.E. Society's Edition.
ciccandrikāname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Vishnu Shastri Bhat, in reply to the treatise named दूषकरदोद्भेदः See विष्णुशास्त्रिन्. For details see pp. 39, 40 of Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
jagannātha(1)the well-known poet and scholar of Vyakarana and Alam kara who wrote many excellent poetical works. He lived in the sixteenth century. He was a pupil of कृष्णशेष and he severely criticised the views of Appaya Diksita and Bhattoji Diksita. He wrote a sort of refutation of Bhattoji's commentary Praudha-Manorama on the Siddhānta Kaumudi, which he named प्रौढमनेारमाखण्डन but which is popularly termed मनोरमाकुचमर्दन. His famous work is the Rasagangadhara on Alankrasastra; (2) writer of a commentary on the Rk-Pratisakhya by name Varnakramalaksana; (3) writer of Sarapradipika, a commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.
jayadevaa grammarian, ( of course different from well-known poet), to whom a small treatise on grammar by name इष्टतन्त्रव्याकरण is attributedition
jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya(1)a famous Bengalee scholar of Vyakarana and Nyaya who has written a small treatise dealing with syntax. The treatise is named कारकवाद.
jayādityaone of the famous joint authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini, popularly called काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is mentioned by It-sing, who has also mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya, as a grammer treatise Written some 40 years before his visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed as the middle of the 7th century A.D. Some scholars believe that जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a king of Kasmira and बामन was his minister. For details, see pp. 386388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII published by the D.E. Society, Poona. See काशिका.
jit(l)literally affix marked with the mute letter ज्; e. g. जस्, जसि, जुस्. the word जित् is not however found used in this sense; (2) a word supposed to be marked with the mute indicatory letter ज्.The word is used in this sense by the Varttikakara saying that such a word does not denote itself but its synonyms; confer, compare जित् पर्यायवचनस्यैव राजांद्यर्थम् P.I.1.68 Vart. 7. In the Sutra सभा राजामनुष्यपूर्वा P.II. 4. 23, the word राजन् is supposed to be जित् and hence it denotes इन्, ईश्वर et cetera, and others; but not the word राजन् itself; (3) In the Pratisakhya works जित् means the first two consonants of each class (वर्ग); exempli gratia, for example क्, ख्,च्, छ्. et cetera, and others which are the same as खय् letters in Panini's terminology; confer, compare द्वौ द्वौ प्रथमौ जित्, V. Pr.I.50;III.13.
jihvāmūlasthāna(l)having the root of the tongue as the place of its production;the phonetic element or letter called जिह्वामूलीय; (2) name given to that phonetic element into which a visarga is changed when followed by क् or ख्; cf X क इति जिह्वामूलीयः V.Pr.VIII.19. The जिह्वामूलीय letter is called जिह्व्य also; see Nyasa on I. 1.9. The Rk. Pratisakhya looks upon ऋ, लृ, जिह्वामूलीय, and the guttural letters as जिह्वामूलस्थान.
jaumāra( व्याकरण )a treatise on vya'karana written by Jumaranandin. See जुमरनन्दिन् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. The Jaumara Vyakarana has no Vedic section dealing with Vedic forms or accents,but it has added a section on Prakrita just as the Haima Vyakaraha.
jaumārasaṃskaraṇathe revised version by Jumuranandin of the original grammar treatise in verse called संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara, The Jaumarasamskarana is the samc as.jaumara Vyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
ṭa(1)the consonant ट्, the vowel अ being added for facility of utterance; confer, compare अकारो व्यञ्जनानाम्, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 21; (2) short term, (प्रत्याहार) standing for टवगे or the lingual class of consonants, found used mostly in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare RT. 13, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 64, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 27: (3) taddhita affix. affix ( अ ) added to the word फल्गुनी in the sense ' तत्र जातः' e. g. फल्गुनी, confer, compare P. IV. 3.34, Vart. 2; (4) krt affix ( अ ) added to the root चर्, सृ and कृ under certain conditions; e. g. कुरुचर:, अग्रेसुर:, यशस्करी ( विद्या ) दिवाकरः, वेिभकरः कर्मकरः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. III. 2.16-23.
ṭhacataddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) with the vowel अ accented acute applied to (1) कुमुद and others as a Caturarthika affix; confer, compare P. IV.2.80; (2) to multisyllabic words and words beginning with उप which are proper nouns for persons; confer, compare P. V.3.78, 80; and (3) to the word एकशाला in the sense of इव; confer, compare P. V.3.109. The base, to which टच् is added, retains generally two syllables or sometimes three, the rest being elided before the affix ठच् e. g. देविकः, वायुकः, पितृकः शेबलिकः et cetera, and others from the words देवदत्त, वायुदत्त, पितृदत्त, शेवलदत्त et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. V,3.83, 84.
ṭhañtaddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) causing Vrddhi and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, applied (1) to महृाराज, प्रोष्ठपद and क्वाचिन् in the specifieditionsenses, confer, compare P. IV.2.35, 4l e. g. माहृाराजिक, प्रौष्ठपदिक et cetera, and others; (2) to words काशि, चेदि, संज्ञा and others, along with ञिठ, e. g. काशिकी, काशिका, also with ञिठ to words denoting villages in the Vahika country exempli gratia, for example शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as also to words ending in उ forming names of countries in all the Saisika senses confer, compare P. IV.2.116-120; (3) to compound words having a word showing direction as their first member, to words denoting time, as also to the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the Saisika senses; cf P. IV.3.6, 7, 1115; (4) to the words वर्षा (1n Vedic Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P.IV.3.1921; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words having अन्तः as the first member, to the word ग्राम preceded by परि or अनु, to multisyllabic words having their last vowel accented acute, to words denoting sacrifices, to words forming names of sages, to words ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज in the specific senses which are mentioned; confer, compare P. IV.3.50, 60, 61, 67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, आक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध, compound words having a multisyllabic words as their first member, and to the words गुड et cetera, and others in the specified senses;confer, compareP.IV.4.6,II, 38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word as a general taddhita affix. affix (अधिकारविहित), unless any other affix has been specified in the specified senses ' तेन क्रीतम् ' ' तस्य निमित्तम्' ... ' तदर्हम्' mentioned in the section of sutras V. 1. 18. to 117; (8) to the words अय:शूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words having एक or गो as their first member as also to the words निष्कशत and निष्कसहस्र; confer, compare P.V.2.76, 118,119.
(1)fifth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्यः (2) the mute letter ण् indicating the substitution of vrddhi ( confer, compare P. VII. 2. 115-117) when attached to affixes; (3) the consonant ण् at the beginning of roots which is changed into न्; the roots, having ण् at the beginning changeable to न्, being called णोपदेशः (4) ण् as a substitute for न् following the letters ऋ, ॠ, र्, and ष् directly, or with the intervention of consonants of the guttural and labial classes, but occurring in the same word, Such a substitution of ण् for न् is called णत्व; confer, compare P.VIII.4. I-39. For णत्व in Vedic Literature; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)V.20-28, T.Pr.VII.1-12. V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ण् added as an augment to a vowel at the beginning of a word when it follows the consonant ण् at the end of the previous word; confer, compare P. VIII. 3. 32. In the Vedic Pratisakhyas this augment ण् is added to the preceding ण् and looked upon as a part of the previous word.
ṇicaffix इ causing Vrddhi (1) applied to roots of the tenth conjugation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित् et cetera, and others e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; confer, compare P. III. 1.25: (2) applied to any root to form a causal base from it, e. g. भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: confer, compare हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the sense of making, doing, practising et cetera, and others ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति, व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति et cetera, and others; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल, श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण in the various senses given by the Varttikakara to form denominative roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति, पाशयति etc; confer, compare P. III.1.25: (5) applied to suitable words in the sense of composing, exempli gratia, for example सूत्रं करोति सूत्रयति, et cetera, and others: (6)applied to a verbal noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'narrating' with the omission of the krt affix and the karaka of the verbal activity put in a suitable case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति, पुष्येण योजयति et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त) take the conjugational endings of both the Parasmaipada and the, Atmanepada: confer, compare णिचश्च P. I. 3.74. They have perfect forms by the addition of अाम् with a suitable form of the perfect tense of the root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्, the word ending with अाम् and the verbal form after it being looked upon as separate words e. g. कारयां चकार कारयां चक्रे et cetera, and others; cf P. III.1.35, 40. They have the aorist form, with the substitution of the Vikarana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which the root is reduplicated; e. g. अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.III.1.48, VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
ṇyataddhita affix.affix य (l) applied in the sense of 'descendant' as also in a few other senses, mentioned in rules from IV. 1. 92 to IV.3.168, applied to the words दिति, अदिति, अादित्य and word; with पति as the उत्तरपद in a compound, c. g. दैत्यः, आदित्यः, प्राजापत्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV.1 84; (2) applied in the sense of a descendant ( अपत्य ) applied to the words कुरु, गर्ग, रथकार, कवि, मति, दर्भ et cetera, and others, e.gकौरव्यः, गार्ग्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kas:, on P. IV. I.15I ; (3) applied in the sense of अपत्य or descendant to words ending in सेना,to the word लक्षण and to words in the sense of artisans, e.gकारिषेण्यः, लाक्षण्यः, तान्तुवाय्यः, कौम्भकार्यः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.152; (4) applied in the Catuararthika senses to the words संकाश, काम्पिल्थ, कश्मीर et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example साङ्काश्यम्, काम्पिल्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.80; (5) applied to the word परिषद् and optionally with the affix ठक् to the word सेना in the specified senses; e. g. परिषदं समवैति, परिषदि साधुर्वा पारिषद्य्ः, सेनां समवेति सैन्यः सैनिको वा; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 44, 45, 101 ; (6) applied as a taddhita affix. affix called ' tadraja , to the word कुरु and words beginning with न e. g. कौरव्यः नैषध्यः; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 1.172; कुरवः, निषधाः et cetera, and others are the nominative case. plural formanuscript.
tthe first consonant of the dental class of consonants which has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When used as a mute letter by Panini, त् signifies the Svarita accent of the vowel of that affix or so, which is marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्, पयस्यम् confer, compare P. VI.1.185. When appied to a vowel at its end, त् signifies the vowel of that grade only, possessed by such of its varieties which require the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands for अा with any of the three accents as also pure or nasalised; अात् does not include अं or अ 3 confer, compare तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indicatory mute त् for the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. purpose is seen also in the Pratis akhya works; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 114 Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 234.
taddhitaa term of the ancient prePaninian grammarians used by Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय without giving any specific definition of it. The term occurs in the Nirukta of Yaska and the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya ; confer, compare अथ तद्वितसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; also confer, compare तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम् Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted that the word तद्वित is used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of a word derived from a substantive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application of suffixes like अ, यत् et cetera, and others, and not in the sense of words derived from roots by affixes like अन, ति et cetera, and others which were termed नामकरण, as possibly contrasted with the word ताद्धित used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has used the word तद्धित not for words, but for the suffixes which are added to form such words at all places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17, 76, VI.1.61 et cetera, and others). in fact, he has begun the enumeration of taddhita affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1. 76) by putting the term तद्धित for affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् et cetera, and others which are mentioned thereafter. In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart. 41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27 quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word तद्धित appears to be actually used for words derived from nouns by secondary affixes, along with the word कृत् which also means words derived from roots, although commentators have explained there the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which, although it is not the first Sutra there were possibly long lists of secondary nouns with the senses of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was perhaps,the first sense given there. The number of taddhita suffixes mentioned by Panini is quite a large one; there are in fact 1110 rules given in the taddhita section covering almost two Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76 to the end of the fifth Adhyaya. The main sub-divisions of taddhita affixes mentioned by commentators are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to 178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to 91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133), Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168), Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74), Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109), Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikarastha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhavakarmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136), Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93), Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2. 140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes (V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be included in the Svarthika affixes.
timaṇṇāa southern grammarian who wrote a short treatise on the pratyaharas like अण्, इण् et cetera, and others in the grammar of Panini.
taittirīyaprātiśākhyacalled also कृष्णयजुःप्रातिशाख्य and hence representing possibly all the different branches or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is not attributed definitely to a particular author but is supposed to have been revised from time to time and taught by various acaryas who were the followers of the Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divided into two main parts, each of which is further divided into twelve sections called adhyayas, and discusses the various topics such as letters and their properties, accents, euphonic changes and the like, just as the other Pratisakhya works. It is believed that Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhasyas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, but at present, only two important commentary works on it are available(a) the 'Tribhasyaratna', based upon the three Bhasyas mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as the title shows, written by Somayarya and (b) the 'Vaidikabharana' written by Gopalayajvan. For details see Introduction to 'Taittiriya Pratisakhya' edition Govt Oriental Library Series, Mysore.
tripādīterm usually used in connection with the last three Padas (ch. VIII. 2, VIII. 3 and VIII. 4) of Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, the rules in which are not valid by convention to rules in the first seven chapters and a quarter, as also a later rule in which (the Tripadi) is not valid to an earlier one; confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical treatise on Panini's grammar ("The Tripadi") written by Dr. H. E. Buiskool recently.
tribhāṣyaratnaname of a commentary on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya written by Somayarya. The commentary is said to have been based on the three Bhasya works attributed to the three ancient Vedic scholarsVararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya.
trilokanāthason of Vaidyanatha who wrote a small treatise on karakas called षट्कारकनिरूपण.
thīma(THIEME, PAUL)a sound scholar of the present day, well versed in Sanskrit Grammar and Vedic Literature, who has written a critical treatise named "Panini and the Veda."
dantamūlīyathe letters त्, थ् द् ध् and न्: confer, compare दन्तमूलीयस्तु तकारवर्गः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 19. The Rk. Pratisakhya calls र् (रेफ ) also as दन्तमूलीय.
dntyaproduced at the teeth, dental; formed at the teeth by the tip of the tongue; exempli gratia, for example the letters लृ ल् ,स् and तवर्ग; confer, compare लृलसिता दन्ते V.Pr.I.69. According to Panini's grammar लॄ(long) does not exist. According to Taittirya Prtisakhya र् is partly dental and partly lingual; cf T.Pr.II.41, while व् is partly dental and partly labial; confer, compare T.Pr. II.43; confer, compare दन्त्या जिह्वाग्रकरणाः V. Pr.I. 76; confer, compare लुग्वा दुहदिहलिहगुहामात्मनेपदे दन्त्ये P. VII. 3.73.
dayāpālaa.Jain writer who wrote a treatise named रूपसिद्धि.
dayāratnaa.Jain scholar who has written a grammar treatise on the Sarasvata Grammar called सारस्वतपरिभाषा.
daśakaa name given to the treatise on grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which consisted of 10 chapters; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P V. 1.58. The word also means students reading the work दशक; confer, compare दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.2.65.
daśagaṇī(1)a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.
daśabalakārikāa short treatise on the roots belonging to more than one conjugation; the name of the author is not given.
dānavijayaa Jain grammarian, who wrote a small grammar treatise named शब्दभूषण.
daśagaṇī(1)a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.
daśabalakārikāa short treatise on the roots belonging to more than one conjugation; the name of the author is not given.
dānavijayaa Jain grammarian, who wrote a small grammar treatise named शब्दभूषण.
dāruṇyaexplained by the commentators on the Pratisakhya works as दृढत्व (firmness) or कठिनता (hardness,) and given as a characteristic of the acute or उदात्त tone; confer, compare अायामो दारुण्यमणुता खस्येत्युच्चैःकराणि शब्दस्य, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII.9, quoted in the Mahabhasya on P.I. 2.29, where दारुण्य is explained as स्वरस्य दारुणता रूक्षता ।
durvalācāryaa grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar दुर्वलीयव्याकरण, named after him. Besides this treatise, he has written commentaries on Nagesa's Laghumanjusa and Paribhasendusekhara.
devanandincalled also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् believed to have lived in the fifth century A. D. and written the treatise on grammar, of course based om Panini Sutras, which is known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याकरण or जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन. The writer of this grammar is possibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र in the usually guoted verse of Bopadeva :इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्र जयन्त्यष्टादेिशाब्दिकाः. देवनन्दिन् was a great Jain saint and scholar who wrote many works on Jain Agamas of which सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.
drutabodhaname of a treatise on grammar written for beginners by Bharatasena or Bharatamalla of Bengal in the sixteemth century.
drutāone of the three Vrttis or styles of utterance mentioned in the Pratisakhya works and quoted in the Mahabhasya; confer, compareतित्रो वृत्तीरुपदिशन्ति वाचो विलम्बितां मध्यमां च दुतां च । अभ्यासार्थे दुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् । शिष्याणामुपदेशार्थे कुर्याद् वृत्ति विलम्बिताम् । Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 18, 19; confer, compare ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तौ वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायां, ये मध्यमायां वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलाम्बितायाम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.70, Vart. 4. The utterance of a letter takes ,1/3 rd time more in the मध्यमवृत्ति than in the द्रुतवृत्ति, while in the विलम्बितवृत्ति it takes 1/3 rd more than in the मध्यमवृत्ति. In short, the utterance of the same letter takes in the three vrttis, Druta, Vilambita and Madhyama the quantity of time in the proportion of 9:12:16 respectively.
dvia term used for the dual number in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare नो नौ मे मदर्थे त्रिद्व्येकेषु Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II. 3 where Uvvata has explained the words त्रि, द्वि and एक as बहुवचन, द्विवचन and एक्वचन respectively.
dhanajitname of the author of a short metrical treatise on roots named धातुक्रल्पलतिका.
dhamekīrtia Jain scholar called by the name कीर्ति also, who was the author of धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिक्रा and रूपावतार a well-known treatise on roots; confer, compare बोपदेवमहाग्राहग्रस्तो वामनदिग्गजः । कीर्तेरेव प्रसङ्गेन माधवेन समुद्धृतः । He is believed to have been the first grammarian who arranged the sutras of Panini according to the subject matter.
dhātua root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
dhātukalpalatikāa short treatise on the roots of the different conjugations written by a grammarian named Dhananjaya.
dhātupāṭha(1)name given in general to the several collections of roots given generally with their meanings by grammarians belonging to the various different schools of grammar. These collections are given as necessary appendices named खिल to their grammars by the well known grammarians of Sanskrit such as Panini, Sakatayana, and others; (2) a small treatise on roots written by Bhimasena of the 14th century.
dhātupārāyaṇaa grammatical treatise dealing with roots written as a supplementary work by Jumaranandin to his grammar work called Rasavati,which itself was a thoroughly revised and enlarged edition of the रसवती a commentary written by Kramadisvara on his own grammar named संक्षिप्तसार.Jumaranandin is believed to have been a Jain writer who lived in the fifteenth century A.D.
dhāturatnamañjarīa treatise dealing with roots believed to have been written by Ramasimhavarman.
dhātuvṛttia general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.
dhi(1)a technical term used for sonant consonants in the Pratisakhya and old grammar works; confer, compare धि शेषः V. Pr.I.53, explained by Uvvata as वर्गाणां उत्तरास्त्रय: यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr. I.53; the term धि corresponds to हश् of Panini; (2) personal ending धि substituted for हि of the imperative 2nd singular. exempli gratia, for example जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि, श्रुधि, रारन्धि et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4.101-103.
dhṛta or dhṛtapracayaa kind of original grave vowel turned into a circumflex one which is called प्रचय unless followed by another acute or circumflex vowel. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya has mentioned seven varieties of this 'pracaya' out of which धृतप्रचय or धृत is one. For details see Bhasya on धृतः प्रचयः कौण्डिन्यस्य, T.Pr.XVIII.3.
natacerebralized; changed into ण्. The change of the consonant न् into ण् is called नति in the old Pratisakhya works; confer, compare स्पर्शे वोष्मणि चानते Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 11.
natiliterallyinclination, bending down; the word is used generally in the technical sense of 'cerebralization' but applied to the change of न् into ण् as also that of स् into ष्; confer, compare दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिर्नतिः, V. Pr.I. 42. The root नम् is used in the sense of 'cerebralizing ' or 'being cerebralized' very frequently in the Pratisakhya works; exempli gratia, for example the word नम्यते is used in the sense of 'is cerebralized'; नमयति in the sense of 'cerebralizes' and नामिंन् in the sense of 'causing cerebralization'; confer, compare ऋकारादयो दश नामिन: स्वराः, पूर्वो नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 27.
nandikeśvarakārikāa short treatise of 28 stanzas, attributed to an ancient grammarian नन्दिकेश्वर, which gives a philosophical interpretation of the fourteen sutras attributed to God Siva. The authorship of the treatise is assigned traditionally to the Divine Bull of God Siva. See नन्दिकेश्वर. The treatise is also named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र.
nāda(1)voice; resonance; tone; the sound caused by the vibration of the vocal chords in the open glottis when the air passes through them; confer, compare वर्णाोत्पत्त्यनन्तरभावी अनुरणनरूपः शब्दः नादः Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.9; confer, compare also संवृते कण्ठे यः शब्दः क्रियते स नादसंज्ञो भवति Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 4; (2) sound, articulate sound generally without sense, which is momentary; (3) the highest sound. See परा.
nāmaliṅgānuśāsanaa treatise in which words with their genders are given. The term is usually used in connection with the great dictionary by अमरसिंह which is called नामालिङ्गानुशासन or अमरकोष.
nāmin(vowels)which cause cerebralization; the ten vowels ऋ, ॠ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ए, ओ, ऐ, औ; confer, compare ऋकारादयो दश नामिनः स्वराः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 27, confer, compare also R.T. 94. See the word नति. The word भाविन् is used for नामिन् in the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya; confer, compare अकण्ठ्यो भावी Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 46; confer, compare also नामिपरो रम् Kat. I.5.12.
nārāyaṇavandyaa grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a treatise on grammar named Saravali, and a treatise on roots named Dhatuparayana.
nighaṇṭua name given to a collection of words which are mainly Vedic. In ancient times such collections were possibly very general and numerous and the works or treatises on derivation such as the Nirukta of Yaska were based upon them; confer, compare निघण्टवः कस्मात् । निगमा इमे भवन्ति । छन्दोभ्यः समाहृत्य समाहृत्य समाम्नातास्ते निगन्तव एव सन्तो निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्ते इत्यौपमन्यवः । अपि वा आहननादेव स्युः | समाहता भवन्ति । यद्वा समाहृता भवन्ति (Nir.I.1) where the word is derived from गम्,or हन् or हृ. The word निघण्टु is taken as synonymous with निगम by Durgacarya.
nighātatoning down; the grave accent; the root निहन् in its various forms is used in the sense of toning down the voice and the word निघात is used in the sense of the grave accent (अनुदात्तस्वर) in the Vyakarana and Pratisakhya works; confer, compare also the words शेषनिघात, सर्वनिघात, et cetera, and others; confer, compare समानवाक्ये निघातयुष्मदस्मदादेशाः P. VIII. I.18 Vart. 5.
nityasamāsaan invariably effective compound; the term is explained as अस्वपदविग्रहो नित्यसमासः i. e. a compound whose dissolution cannot be shown by its component words as such; e. g. the dissolution of कुम्भकारः cannot be shown as कुम्भं कारः, but it must be shown as कुम्भं करोति स: । The upapadasamasa, the gatisamsa and the dative tatpurusa with the word अर्थ are examples of नित्यसमास.
nipātaa particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
nipātanaa word given, as it appears, without trying for its derivation,in authoritative works of ancient grammarians especially Panini;confer, compareदाण्डिनायनहास्तिनयनo P. VI.4.174, as also अचतुरविचतुरo V.4.77 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others The phrase निपातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequently used by Patanjali to show that some technical difficulties in the formation of a word are not sometimes to be taken into consideration, the word given by Panini being the correct one; confer, compare M.Bh.on I.1.4, III.1.22 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others; cf also the usual expression बाधकान्येव निपातनानि. The derivation of the word from पत् with नि causal, is suggested in the Rk Pratisakhya where it is stated that Nipatas are laid down or presented as such in manifold senses; cf Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XII.9; cf also घातुसाधनकालानां प्राप्त्यर्थं नियमस्य च । अनुबन्घविकाराणां रूढ्यर्थ च निपातनम् M. Bh Pradipa on P. V.1.114: confer, comparealso Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.27.
nipātāvyayopasargavṛttiashort treatise explaining and illustrating the use of indeclinables, written by a grammarian named तिलक who probably lived in Kasmira.
nimada mode of utterance of words at the performance of a sacrifice. Seven such modes are given in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya; confer, compare उपांशुध्वाननिमदोपव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि T.Pr.XXIII. 5
niruktaname of a class of works which were composed to explain the collections of Vedic words by means of proposing derivations of those words from roots as would suit the sense. The Nirukta works are looked upon as supplementary to grammar works and there must have been a good many works of this kind in ancient times as shown by references to the writers of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatayana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others, but, out of them only one work composed by Yaska has survived; the word, hence has been applied by scholars to the Nirukta of Yaska which is believed to have been written in the seventh or the eighth century B. C. i. e. a century or two before Panini. The Nirukta works were looked upon as subsidiary to the study of the Vedas along with works on phonetics ( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar (व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astronomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them is found made in the Chandogyopanisad. As many of the derivations in the Nirukta appear to be forced and fanciful, it is doubtful whether the Nirukta works could be called scientific treatises. The work of Yaska, however, has got its own importance and place among works subsidiary to the Veda, being a very old work of that kind and quoted by later commentators. There were some glosses and commentary works written upon Yaska's Nirukta out of which the one by Durgacarya is a scholarly one.It is doubtful whether Durgacarya is the same as Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti or gloss on the Katantra Vyakarana. The word निरुक्त is found in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'explained' and not in the sense of derived; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV 6; V.Pr. IV. 19, 195.
naikācmultisyllabic, possessed of many syllables, as contrasted with एकाच्.
patañjalithe reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.
padmanābhaa grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar known as the Supadma Vyākaraņa. He is believed to have been an inhabitant of Bengal who lived in the fourteenth century A. D. Some say that he was a resident of Mithilā.
para(l)subsequent,as opposed to पूर्व or prior the word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a rule or an operation prescribed later on in a grammar treatise; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; ( 2 ) occurring after ( something ); confer, compare प्रत्ययः परश्च P. III. 1.1 and 2; confer, compare also तत् परस्वरम् T.Pr. XXI.2.(3)The word पर is sometimes explained in the sense of इष्ट or desired, possibly on the analogy of the meaning श्रेष्ठ possessed by the word. This sense is given to the word पर in the rule विप्रातिषेधे परं कार्यं with a view to apply it to earlier rules in cases of emergency; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं यदिष्टं तद्भवति M.Bh. on I.1.3.Vārt, 6; परशब्दः इष्टवाची M.Bh. on I. 2.5, I. 4.2. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; II. 1.69 et cetera, and others
parakramaa term used in the Praatisaakhya works for'doubling' of a consonant; | confer, compare सान्तःस्थादौ धारयन्तः परक्रमम् | Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XIV. 23.
paratvaposteriority; mention afterwards; the word is frequently used in works on grammar in connection with a rule which is mentioned in the treatise after another rule; the posterior rule is looked upon as stronger than the prior one, and is given priority in application when the two rules come in conflict although technically they are equally strong: confer, compare परत्वादल्लोप: ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.4 Vaart 7; 'परत्वाच्छीभाव: I. 1.11 et cetera, and others
parigaṇanaliterally enumeration. The word is used in grammar treatises in the sense of a definite or complete enumeration' with a view to exclude those that are not included in the enumeration : cf परिगणनं कर्तव्यम् | यङ्यक्यवलोपे प्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on I.1.4 Vaart. 1.
paribhāṣāan authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.
paribhāṣāprakāśāan independent treatise explaining the various Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar, written by Visnusesa of the famous SeSa family.
paribhāṣāpradīpārcisa scholarly independent treatise on Vyakarana Paribhasas written by Udayamkara Pathaka, called also Nana Pathaka, a Nagara Brahmana, who lived at Benares in the middle of the 18th century A. D. He has also written commentaries on the two Sekharas of Naagesa.
paribhāṣābhāskara(1)a treatise on the Paribhasas in Panini's grammar written by Haribhaskara Agnihotri, son of Appajibhatta Agnihotri, who lived in the seventeenth century : (2) a treatise on Paniniparibhasas, as arranged by Siradeva, written by Sesadrisuddhi,
paribhāṣārthasaṃgrahṛa treatise on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar written by Vaidyanatha Sastrin.
paribhāṣāvṛttia general name given to an explanatory independent work on Paribhasas of the type of a gloss on a collection of Paribhasas,irrespective of the system of grammar, whether it be that of Panini, or of Katantra, or of Jainendra or of Hemacandra. The treatises of Vyadi (Panini system), Durgasimha and BhavamiSra (Katantra system), Purusottamadeva and Siradeva (Panini system), Abhyankar (Jainendra system) and others are all known by the name Paribhasavritti.
paribhāṣenduśekharathe reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.
parilopaelision ofa phonetic member: the same as lopa in the Grammar of Panini. The term परिलोप and the verbal forms of the root परिलुप् are found in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare उष्मा परिलुप्यते त्रयाणाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 4.
parvanword, pada; literally member of a sentence; the word is found used in the sense of पद in the old Pratisaakhya Literature: confer, compare अन्तरेण पर्वणी । पर्वशबेदन पदमुच्यते । पदयोर्मध्ये पद अागमो भवति । यथा प्राङ्कसोमः, प्राङ्क्सोम: । Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 138.
paśyantīname of the second out of the four successive stages in the origination or utterance of a word from the mouth. According to the ancient writers on Phonetics, sound or word ( वाक् ) which is constituted of air ( वायु ) originates at the Mulaadhaaracakra where it is called परा. It then springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती in the second stage. Thence it comes up and is called मध्यमा in the third stage; rising up from the third stage when the air strikes against the vocal chords in the glottis and comes in contact with the different parts of the mouth, it becomes articulate and is heard in the form of different sounds. when it is called वैखरी; confer, compare वैखर्या मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीर्थभेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vaakyapadiya I. 144, and also confer, compare पश्यन्ती तु सा चलाचलप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिविष्टज्ञेयाकारा प्रतिलीनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्ययवभासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वार्थप्रत्यवभासा चेत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूपमनपभ्रंशामसंकीर्ण लोकव्यवह्यरातीतम् । commentary on Vaakyapadiya I. 144. confer, compare also तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती तु लोकव्यवहारातीता। योगिनां तु तत्रापि प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति | परायां तु न इति त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on चत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.
paspaśācalled also पस्पशाह्निक; name given to the first or introductory chapter ( अाह्निक ) of the Maahabhaasya of Patanjali. The word occurs first in the SiSupaalavadha of Maagha. The word is derived from पस्पश् , the frequentative base of स्पर्श to touch or to see (ancient use). Possibly it may be explained as derived from स्पश् with अप; cf . शब्दबिद्येव नो भाति राजनीतिरपस्पशा Sis.II.112. Mallinatha has understood the word पस्पश m. and explained it as introduction to a Saastra treatise; confer, compare पस्पशः शास्त्रारम्भसमर्थक उपेद्वातसंदर्भग्रन्थः । Mallinaatha on SiS. II.112.
pāṇinithe illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
pāṇinisūtravṛttia gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.
puṣkaraṇaa popular term used for the treatise on grammar by an ancient grammarian Apisali. confer, compare अापिशलं पुष्करणम् Kas on P. IV. 3. 15. It was called Puskarana probably because it was very extensive and widely read before Panini. For the reading दुष्करण for पुष्करण, and other details see Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 132-133, D. E. Society's edition.
pūrvasūtraliterally previous rule: a rule cited erlier in a treatise. The word is however, frequently used in the Mahabhasya in the sense of 'a rule laid down by an earlier grammarian': confer, compareवर्ण वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे M. Bh, Ahnika 1, पूर्वसूत्रे गोत्रस्य वृद्धमिति संज्ञा क्रियते M. Bh on I. 2.68; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.14 Vart. 3, VI.I. 163 Vart. 1, VII.1.18, VIII. 4.7.
pṛktaliterally mixedition The term is used in the Pratisakhya works in connection with the vowel ऋ or ऌ which is looked upon as a पृक्तस्वर being mixed with the consonant र् or ल्; confer, compare पृक्तस्वरो नाम ऋकारः ऌकारश्च रेफलकारसंपृक्तत्वात् commentary on T.Pr.XIII.16.
pṛthvīdharācāryaa grammarian of the Eastern school who wrote the treatise कातन्त्रविवरण on Katantra Grammar.
pedubhaṭṭaa grammarian.who has written a treatise named औणादिकपदार्णव on the Unadi sutras.
pauṣkarasādian ancient grammarian who belonged to the dynasty of पुष्करसद्, whose views are quoted by the Varttikakara and the writers of the Pratisakhya works: cf चयो द्वितीयाः शारि पौष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48 Vart. 3; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न पूर्वश्च ञकारम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V: confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.
pragṛhyaa term used in the Pratisakhya works and by Panini, in the sense of a vowel which is not combined with the following vowel by rules of euphony; e. g सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अमी अत्र etc; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 28 and 29; P. I. 1.11-19 and VI.1.125.
pragrahaabsence of euphonic change; the. term is frequently used in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.60, IV.1.1-54.
pratyayaaffix, suffix, a termination, as contrasted with प्रकृति the base; confer, compare प्रत्याय्यते अर्थः अनेन इति प्रत्ययः; confer, compare also अर्थे संप्रत्याययति स प्रत्ययः M.Bh. on III. 1.l Vart. 8; The word प्रत्यय is used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'following' or 'that which follows', e. g. स्पर्शे चोषः प्रत्यये पूर्वपद्यः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 30 which is explained by Uvvata as उषः इत्ययं ( शब्दः ) पूर्वपदावयवः सन् स्पर्शे प्रत्यये परभूते इति यावत्; रेफिसंज्ञो भवति; Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.30; confer, compare प्रत्येति पश्चादागच्छति इति प्रत्ययः परः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 7; cf also V. Pr, III. 8. Pratyaya or the suffix is generally placed after the base; cf, प्रत्ययः, परश्च P. III. I. 1,2; but sometimes it is placed before the base; e. g. बहुपटुः confer, compare विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्तात्तु P. V. 3.68. The conjugational signs (शप् , श्यन् et cetera, and others), the signs of tenses and moods ( च्लि, सिच् , स्य, ताम् et cetera, and others) and the compound endings(समासान्त) are all called pratyayas according fo Panini's grammar, as they are all given in the jurisdiction(अधिकार) of the rule प्रत्ययः III.1.1, which extends upto the end of the fifth chapter ( अध्याय ). There are six main kinds of affixes given in grammar सुप्प्रत्यय, तिङ्प्रत्यय, कृत्प्रत्यय , तद्धितप्रत्यय, धातुप्रत्यय (exempli gratia, for example in the roots चिकीर्ष, कण्डूय et cetera, and others) and स्त्रीप्रत्यय. The word प्रत्यय is used in the sense of realization, in which case the root इ in the word त्यय means'knowing' according to the maxim सर्वे गत्यर्था ज्ञानार्थाः; confer, compare मन्त्रार्थप्रत्ययाय Nirukta of Yāska.I.15.
pratyāmnāyaliterally, repetition in a contrary way; in the Pratisakhya literature, the word refers to the repetition of a Vedic passage; repetition by pupils after hearing from the preceptor ; confer, compare प्रत्याम्नायः पुनर्वचनं Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV. 9.
pratyāhārasūtravicāraa short treatise explaining the pratyharas अण् , अट्, अश् et cetera, and others in the grammar of Panini; one such work is written by a southern grammarian named तिमण्णा.
prathamalit, premier, first; the word is used in connection with the personal affixes तिप् , तस्, झि ( अन्ति ) of verbal formanuscript. See the word पुरुष a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रयुज्यमानोप्यस्तीति । वृक्षः प्लक्षः। Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 3.1 and 4. The word प्रथम is used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the first consonants of the five vargas or groups of consonants; confer, compare प्रथमैर्द्वितीयास्तृतीयैश्चतुर्थाः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 110 confer, compare प्रथमतृतीयादीनामादेशादित्वादेत्वाभावः, M.Bh. on P. VI. 4.120 Vart 3, also confer, compare Katantra I. 4.1 and Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. I. 3.35. The word is also used (in the feminine gender) in the sense of the case affixes सु ( स् ), औ, जस् ( अस् ) of the nominative case. The word is also used in the sense of the premier accent उदात्त (acute); confer, compare प्रथमभाविनः उदात्तभाविनः Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 8.
prapāṭhakaa term used for a division of a work by an ancient writer, as for instance in the case of the Atharvapratisakhya.
prayuktākhyātamañjarīa small treatise on verbal forms by सारङ्गकवि.
prayogapallavaa small treatise in verses on the conjugation of roots, written by Bhavanatha Misra, son of Ramapati.
prayogamukhamaṇḍanaknown also by the name प्रयोगविवेक, an elementary treatise on syntax, attributed to वररुचि, who must, of course, have been different from the ancient grammarian वररुचि.
prayogaratnamālāname of a recognised treatise on grammar written by पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the fourteenth century. The treatise explains many words which, although current in language and literature, cannot be easily formed by rules of grammar. The author has tried to form them by applying rules of grammar given in the grammatical systems of Panini and Katantra. The alphabet given in this treatise is according to the system of the Tantra Sastra which shows a scholarship of the author in that branch The grammar was studied much in Bengal and Assam.
prākṛtasarvasyaa treatise on the grammar of Prakrta Languages attributed to Markandeya
prātipadikaliterallyavailable in every word. The term प्रातिपादिक can be explained as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf P.IV. 4. 39. The term प्रातिपदिक, although mentioned in the Brahmana works, is not found in the Pratisakhya works probably because those works were concerned with formed words which had been actually in use. The regular division of a word into the base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is available, first in the grammar of Panini, who has given two kinds of bases, the noun-base and the verb-base. The noun-base is named Pratipadika by him while the verb-base is named Dhatu. The definition of Pratipadika is given by him as a word which is possessed of sense, but which is neither a root nor a suffix; confer, compare अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45. Although his definition includes, the krdanta words,the taddhitanta words and the compound words, still, Panini has mentioned them separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as secondary noun-bases as compared with the primary noun-bases which are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्, Thus,Panini implies four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत, कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास, The Varttikakara appears to have given nine kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त, कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See Varttikas 39 to 44 on P. I. 4. 1. Later on, Bhojaraja in his SringaraPrakasa has quoted the definition अर्थवदधातु given by Panini, and has given six subdivisions.: confer, compare नामाव्ययानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr. Prak. I. page 6. For the sense conveyed by a Pratipadika or nounbase, see प्रातिपदिकार्थ.
prātiśākhyaa work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.
plākṣāyaṇaan ancient Vedic scholar who presumably wrote a work on Vedic grammar (of the type of the Pratisakhya works).For a difference of view he is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya: confer, compareन प्लाक्षिप्लाक्षायणयेाः T.Pr. IX.6.
plākṣian ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya.See प्लाक्षायण a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The words प्लाक्षि and प्लाक्षायण as also प्लाक्षी ( feminine ) occur in the Mahabhasya also, but not in the Ganapatha of Panini.
plutaprotracted, name given to vowels in the protracted grade. The vowels in this grade which are termed protracted vowels are possessed of three matras and in writing they are marked with the figure 3 placed after them. In pronunciation they take a longer time than the long or दीर्घ vowels; confer, compare ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The word is derived from प्लु (प्रु also) I Atmane to go, and explained as प्लवते इति, The word प्लवते is often found for प्लुतो भवति in the Pratisakhya works; cf also मात्रा ह्रस्वरतावदवग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धस्तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः । अधः स्विदासी३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्लुतिर्भीरिव विन्दती३त्रिः ll Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.16.
bahvacmultisyllabled, a word which contains three, or more than three vowels; the word occurs many times in the sutras of Panini. confer, compare P. II. 4.66, IV. 2.73, IV. 2.109, IV. 3.67; V. 3.78, VI. 2.83, VI. 3.118.
bopadevaa great Sanskrit scholar and grammarian belonging to Devagiri in the greater Maharastra who was supported by Hemadri of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम on the river Varada in the first half of the thirteenth century. He wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit Grammar, which has a number of peculiar abbreviations for the usual well-known grammatical termanuscript. His grammar had a wide spread in Bengal and it is today a very common text on Grammar Bengal. On this account some scholars believe that he lived in Bengal. He was the son of Kesava and pupil of Dhanesa. He is also the author, of the well-known work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has written a commentary named कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.
bhakti(1)name given to two of the five divisions of a Saman which are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव and निधानभाक्ति; (2) the vowel portion surrounding, or placed after, the consonant र् or ल् which (consonant) is believed to be present in the vowel ऋ or ऌ respectively forming its important portion, but never separately noticed in it. The vowels ऋ and ऌ are made up of one matra each. It is contended by the grammarians that the consonants र् and ल् forming respectively the portion of ऋ and ऌ, make up halfa-matra, while the remaining half is made up of the भाक्ति of the vowel surrounding the consonant or situated after the consonant. The word which is generally used for this 'bhakti is 'ajbhakti' instead of which the word स्वरभक्ति is found in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare यत्तद्रेफात्परं भक्तेस्तेन व्यवहितत्वान्न प्राप्नेति | ...... यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भुक्तेर्न तत् क्वचिदपि व्यपवृक्तं दृश्यते | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; confer, compare स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 17; also confer, compare रेफात्स्वरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णी स्वरभक्तिरुत्तरा ) Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 13.
bhāṣāṃmañjarīa small treatise on grammar written by Vyaṅkaṭa Subbā Shastrī.
bhāṣāvṛttia short gloss on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini in the l2th century by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, a reputed scholar belonging to the Eastern school of grammarians which flourished in Bengal and Behar in the 10th, 11th and 12th centuries, The gloss is very useful for beginners and it has given a clear explanation of the different sūtras without going into difficult niceties and discussions. The treatise does not comment upon Vedic portions or rules referring to Vedic Language because, as the legend goes, king Lakṣmaṇa Sena, for whom the gloss was written, was not qualified to understand Vedic Language; confer, compare वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com. on Bhāṣāvṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara. There is a popular evaluation of the Bhāṣāvṛtti given by the author himself in the stanza "काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ! तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातर्भाषावृत्तिरियं मम " at the end of his treatise; for details see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
bhīmasenacalled भीमदास also, who flourished in the fourteenth century and wrote a treatise on grammar called भैमव्याकरण.
bhaimavyākaraṇaa grammar treatise written by भौमसेन in the fourteenth century A. D.
bhojathe well-known king of Dhārā who was very famous for his charities and love of learning. He flourished in the eleventh century A.D. He is said to have got written or himself written several treatises on various śāstras. The work Sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa which is based on the Astādhyāyi of Pāṇini, but which has included in it the Vārttikas and Paribhāṣās also, has become in a way a Vyākaraṇa or a general work in grammar and can be styled as Bhoja-Vyākaraṇa.
maṅgalārthafor the sake of auspiciousness at the beginning of a treatise or work; confer, compare भूवादीनां वकारोयं मङ्गलार्थः प्रयुज्यते M.Bh. on P.I.3.1.;confer, compareमङ्गलादीनि हि शास्त्राणि | M.Bh. on P.I.1.1.
madhyakaumudīcalled also मध्यमकौमुदी a work on grammar which is an abridgment, to a certain extent, of Bhaṭṭojī's Siddhāntakaumudī. The treatise was written by Varadarāja, a pupil of Bhaṭṭojī for facilitating the study of the Siddhānta-kaumudi.
madhyamakaumudī(1)name of a treatise on grammar by Rāmaśarman; (2) the same as मध्यकौमुदी.
manoramā(1)the popular name given to the commentary प्रौढमनेारमा on the Siddhāntakaumudī of भट्टोजीदीक्षित by the author himself the commentary is a scholarly one and very extensive; and its first portion only upto the end of Kāraka is generally read in the Sanskrit Pāṭhaśālās;(2) name of a commentary on the Madhyasiddhāntakaumudī by Rāmasarman; (3) name given to a treatise discussing roots given in the Kātantra Grammar written by रमानाथशर्मा in the sixteenth century. The work is called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also.
manoramākucamardananame given in a bantering tone to the treatise प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन written by जगन्नाथपण्डित:
mahābhāṣyaliterally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
mahīdharaa grammarian of the sixteenth century who, besides many small treatises on other subjects, wrote a commentary on the SarasvataPrakriya Vyakarana.
mākṣavyaname of an ancient writer of Pratisakhya works mentioned in the Rk Pratisakhya: confer, compare R.Pr.I.2.
mācākīyaan ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work, who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya as one, holding the view that य and व् preceded by अ and followed by उ and ओ respectively, are dropped provided they stand at the beginning of a Pada ( word ). माचाकीय, who belonged to the Yajurveda school, is said to have held this view which is generally held by the followers of the Rgveda: confer, compare उकारौकारपरौ लुप्यते माचाकी यस्य(Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.X.29) on which the commentator adds वह्वृचानामयं पक्षः.
māṇḍūkeyaname of an ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work referred to in the Rk Pratisakhya, confer, compare R.Pr.I.2. मातृकावर्ण letters of the alphabet. See अक्षरसमाम्नाय.
mādhavathe well-known epoch-making scholar of the 14th century who has written a number of treatises in various Saastras. His धातुवृम्त्ति is a well-known work in grammar
mukhanāsikāvacanadefinition of अनुनासक, a letter which is pronounced through both-the mouth and the nose-as contrasted with नासिक्य a letter which is uttered only through the nose; exempli gratia, for example ड्, ञ् , ण्, न् , म् and the nasalized vowels and nasalized य् , व् and ल्; confer, compare मुखनासिक्रावचनेीSनुनासिकः Paan. I. 1.8: confer, compare also अनुस्वारोत्तम अनुनासिकाः (Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II.30), where the fifth letters and the anusvaara are called anunaasika. According to Bhattoji, however, anusvaara cannot be anunaasika as it is pronounced through the nose alone, and not through both-the mouth and the nose. As the anusvaara is pronounced something like a nasalized ग् according to the Taittiriyas it is called a consonant in the Taittiriya Praatisaakhya: confer, compare ' अनुस्वारोप्युत्तमवह्यञ्जनमेव अस्मच्छाखायाम् ! अर्धगकाररूपत्वात् / Com. on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 30.
mugdhabodhaliterally instructions to the ignorant: a treatise on grammar similar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but much shorter, written by Bopadeva or Vopadeva an inhabitant of the greater Maharastra in the Vardha district, in the thirteenth century. After the fall of the Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises like भाषावृत्ति and others written by eastern grammarians fell into the back-ground and their place was taken up by easier treatises written by Bopadeva and others.Many commentaries were written upon the Mugdhabodha, of which the Vidyanivsa is much known to grammarians
muda technical term for the sibilants श् , ष् and स् given in the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya: confer, compare मुच्च Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.52, cf also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.9,III.13,IV.122.
mṛdu(1)soft in utterance ; the term is used in the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya for the क्षैप्र, प्रश्लिष्ट, तैरोव्यञ्जन, and पादवृत्त varieties of the circumflex accent (स्वरित) out of which the पादवृत्त is the softest ( मृदुतम ) and consequently always called मृदु, while the others are called मृदु only with respect to the preceding one in the order given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; viz.अभिनिहत, क्षैप्र et cetera, and othersconfer, compareसर्वतीक्ष्णोभिनिहत:प्राश्लिष्टस्तदनन्तरम् । ततो मृदुतरौ स्वरौ जात्यक्षेप्रावुभौ स्मृतौ | ततो मृदुतर: स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन उच्यते | पादवृत्तो मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम् Uvvata on V.Pr. I. !25; (2) soft, as opposed to hard; the term is used in connection with the first,third and fifth consonants of the five classes.
maitrāyaṇīya prātiśākhyaa Pratiskhya or :Parsada work giving the peculiarities of Sandhi, accent and the like, in changing the Maitrayaniya Samhitaapatha into the Padapatha.
mokṣeśvaraa grammarian of the fourteenth century who has written a commentary on the Katantra Vrtti of Durgasimha. He has written a commentary on the Akhyatavrtti of the Katantra school as also a short treatise dealing with the krt affixes called Krdvrtti.
yathānyāsaṃas it is actually put in the rule or a treatise by the author. The phrase is often used in the Mahaabhaasya when after a long discussion, involving further and further difficulties, the author reverts to the original stand and defends the writing of the sUtra as it stands. सिध्यत्येवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति or सूत्रं भिद्यते । तर्हि यथान्यासमेवास्तु is the usual expression found in the Mahaabhaasya; cf, M.Bh. I.1. Aahnika 1, I.1.1, 9, 20, 62, 65 et cetera, and others
yaśa:kavia grammarian, the author of a treatise named Bhasanusasana. यश:सागर a Jain grammarian, the author of a work named Samasasobha.
yāskaa reputed ancient Niruktakara or etymologist, of the 6th century B.C. or even a few centuries before that, whose work, the Nirukta, is looked upon as the oldest authoritative treatise regarding derivation of Vedic words. Yaska was preceded by a number of etymologists whom he has mentioned in his work and whose works he has utilisedition Yaska's Nirukta threw into the back-ground the older treatises on etymology, all of which disappeared gradually in the course of time.
r(1)second letter of the यण् class ( semi-vowels ) which has got the properties नादभागित्व, घोषवत्त्व,' संवृतत्व and अल्पप्राणता i. e. it is a sonant, inaspirate consonant. Regarding its स्थान or place of production, there is a difference of opinion : generally the consonant र् is looked upon as a cerebral or lingual letter (मूर्धन्य); cf ऋटुरषाणां मूर्धा, S.K.also Pāṇini. Siksa; but it is called by some as दन्त्य or दन्तमूलीय: cf रेफस्तु दस्त्ये दन्तमूले वा RT. 8, by others as दन्तमूलीय and and by still others as वर्स्त्य gingival. In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya it is described as दन्तमूलीय: cf रो दन्तमूल I. 68, while in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya it is said to be produced by the touch of the middle part of the tip of the tongue just a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the root of the teeth;confer, compare रेफे जिह्वाग्रमध्येन प्रत्यग्दन्तमूलेभ्यः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 41; (2) substitute र् (रेफ ) for the final letter of the word अहन्, as also for the final of अम्रस्, ऊधस्, अवस् and भुवस् optionally with रु, which ( रु) is dropped before vowels, and changed to ओ before अ and soft consonants, while it is changed into visarga before hard consonants and surds.exempli gratia, for example अम्नरेव, अम्र एवः ऊधरेव, ऊधएव: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII, 2-70: (3) the consonants र् (technically) called र् in Panini's grammar ) which is substituted for the consonant स् and for the consonant न् of the word अहन् when the consonant स् or न् stands at the end of a word. This substitute रु, unlike the substitute र् is liable to be changed into visarga, or the consonant य्, or the vowel उ by P. VIII.3.15, 17, VI.1.113, 114.
ratnapāṇia grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote a short treatise on the Karaka relations named षट्कारकविवरण.
ranu[RENOU,LOUIS]a sound Sanskrit scholar of France of the present time who has written some treatises and many articles on Sanskrit grammar out of which his works on the Terminology of Sanskrit Grammar, Kasika and Durghatavrtti reguire a special mention.
rapratyāhārakhaṇḍanaa small article showing that the short term र for the consonants र् and ल् need not be advocated as done by the learned old grammarians.The treatise was Written by Vaidyanatha Paya-gunde, the prominent pupil of Nagesabhatta.
rājārāmaśāstrī( कार्लेकर )a reputed scholar of Sanskrit grammar who resided at Varanasi and established a school of Sanskrit Grammarians there in the nineteenth century. He wrote a treatise on grammar named शब्दव्युत्पत्तिकौमुदी.
rādhākṛṣṇa( गोस्वामी )a grammarian who wrote two elementary graumar treatises (1) अव्ययार्थे and (2) वैयाकरणसर्वस्वसूची.
rāmakiṃkasarasvatīa grammarian who wrote a small grammar treatise named अायुबोधव्याकरण which is different from the well-known अाशुबोध of तारानाथतर्कवाचस्पति.
rāmakṛṣṇaa grammarian who wrote a treatise on Karaka relations known by the name शाब्दबोधप्रक्रिया.
rāmacandra(1)रामन्वन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य) the well-known author of the Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to the Sesa family and the latter half of the fifteenth century is assigned as his date. He is believed to have been a resident of Andhra. His work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a popular grammar treatise for some time before Bhattoji's SiddhantaKaumudi got its hold, and it had a number of commentaries written upon it especially by his descendants and members of his family which became well-known as the Sesa family of grammarians. The Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्किकरप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a grammarian named Ramacandra who wrote a small treatise on grammar named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was another grammarian of the same name who was a pupil of Nagesabhatta of the eighteenth century and who wrote a small commentary called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadhyayi. (4) There was also another Ramacandra who was a scholar of Vedic grammar and who wrote the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on the Vjasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
rāmatarkavāgīśaa learned grammarian who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय and भट्टाचार्य, He was an advocate of the Mugdhabodha School and wrote commentaries on (1) the Mugdhabodha, (2) the Kavikalpadruma, (3) the Amarakosa and (4) the Unadi sutras. He also wrote a short gloss on case-relations, his treatise on the subject being named कारकटिप्पणी,
rukmanthe primary Yama letter; a term used in the Śikșā treatises.
laghuprakriyāname of a grammar treatise based on the Sabdānuśāsana of Hemacandra written by Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of Hemacandra are arranged in different topics as in the Siddhāntakaumudī of Bhoțțojī.
liṅgānuśāsanaliterally science of genders; a short comprehensive old treatise on the gender of words attributed to Pāņini as its author. Other works with the same designation are attributed to वामन, दुर्गोत्तम and others.
vararuci(1)a reputed ancient grammarian who is identified with Katyayana, the prominent author of the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. Both the names वररुचि and कात्यायन are mentioned in commentary works in connection with the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and it is very likely that Vararuci was the individual name of the scholar, and Katyayana his family name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन are found used in Slokavarttikas in the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and III.2.118 where references made are actually found in the prose Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart. 1)indicating that the Slokavarttikakara believed that the Varttikas were composed by Katyayana. There is no reference at all in the Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a writer of the Varttikas; there is only one reference which shows that there was a scholar by name Vararuci known to Patanjali, but he was a poet; confer, compare वाररुचं काव्यं in the sense of 'composed' ( कृत and not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also mentioned as the author of the Prakrta Grammar known by the name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by Gotra name, was a grammarian later than Patanjali, who has been associated with Sarvvarman, (the author of the first three Adhyayas of the Katantra Sutras), as the author of the fourth Adhyaya. Patanjali does not associate वररुचि with Kityayana at alI. His mention of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya is a sufficient testimony for that. Hence, it appears probable that Katyayana, to whom the authorship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya and many other works allied with Veda has been attributed, was not associated with Vararuci by Patanjali, and it is only the later writers who identified the grammarian Vararuci,who composed the fourth Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and some other grammar' works, with the ancient revered Katyayana, the author of Varttikas, the Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the Puspasutra; (3) There was a comparatively modern grammariannamed वररुचि who wrote a small treatise on genders of words consisting of about 125 stanzas with a commentary named Lingavrtti, possibly written by the author himselfeminine. (4) There was also another modern grammarian by name वररुचि who wrote a work on syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss^ ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित and कृदन्त.
varṇapāṭhaserial mention or enumeration of letters in the fourteen Siva Sutras. The word is also used in the sense of the alphabet given in the Pratisakhya and grammar works; confer, compare एवं तर्हि वर्णपाठ एव उपदेश: करिष्यते M.Bh. on P. I. 1.69.
varṇarāśithe collection of letters as mentioned in works on grammar and Pratisakhyas; confer, compare इति वर्णराशिः क्रमश्च Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 10.
varṇasamāmnāyaa collection of letters or alphabet given traditionally. Although the Sanskrit alphabet has got everywhere the same cardinal letters id est, that is vowels अ, इ et cetera, and others, consonants क्, ख् etc : semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व, sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few additional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others, still their number and order differ in the different traditional enumerations. Panini has not mentioned them actually but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on which he has based his work, mention only 9 vowels and 34 consonants, the long vowels being looked upon as varieties of the short ones. The Siksa of Panini mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); confer, compare त्रिषष्टि: चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the forty three given in the Siva Sutras and mentions 47. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters viz. 16 vowels, 25class consonants, 4 semivowels,six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्, ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions 65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ, औ, 25 class-consonants, four semivowels, four sibilants, and जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार, विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters; confer, compare एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57 letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibilants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya, Anunasika, 4_yamas and two Anusvaras. The Rk Tantra gives two different serial orders, the Uddesa (common) and the Upadesa (traditional). The common order or Uddesa gives the 14 vowels beginning with अ, then the 25 class consonants, then the four semivowels, the four sibilants and lastly the eight ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya and others. The traditional order gives the diphthongs first, then long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ ) then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and lastly अ ), then semivowels, then the five fifth consonants, the five fourths, the five thirds, the five seconds, the five firsts, then the four sibilants and then the eight ayogavaha letters and two Ausvaras instead of one anuswara. Panini appears to have followed the traditional order with a few changes that are necessary for the technigue of his work.
vaśaṃgamaname given in the Pratisakhya works to letter-combinations where a consonant gets a change suitable to the neighbouring consonants as given in the Rk.Pratisakhya in IV.1 to IV.5 including जश्त्व, अनुनासिकादेश, छत्व, परसवर्ण, अनुस्वार and others, as given in P. VIII.2.39, VIII.3.7, VIII. 3.23, VIII.4.40, 46, 58,59, 62, 63; confer, compare न ह्यत्र अवशंगमसंधाविव अपरिणतानि व्यञ्जनानि संयोगं गच्छन्ति Uvvata on R.Pr.IV.5.
vājasaneyeiprātiśākhyathe Pratisakhya work belonging to the Vajasaneyi branch of the White Yajurveda, which is the only Pratisakhya existing to-day representing all the branches of the Sukla Yajurveda. Its authorship is attributed to Katyayana, and on account of its striking resemblance with Panini's sutras at various places, its author Katyayana is likely to be the same as the Varttikakara Katyayana. It is quite reasonable to expect that the subject matter in this Pratisakhya is based on that in the ancient Prtisakhya works of the same White school of the Yajurveda.The work has a lucid commentary called Bhasya written by Uvvata.
vātsapraan ancient writer of Pratisakhya works who believed in the very feeble utterance ( लघुप्रयत्नतर ) of the consonants य and व, when preceded by अ and standing at the end of a word. See लघुप्रयत्न.
vānathe suffix वन् mentior:ed as वान् in the Atharvapratisakhya and illustrated in the word ऋतावानं: cf Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. III. 24.
vāmananame of one of the joint authors of the well-known gloss or वृति upon the Sutras of Panini, who lived in the seventh century A. D. It cannot be ascertained which portion of the Kasika was written by Vamana and which by his colleague जयादित्य, There was another famous scholar of Kashmir by name Vamana who flourished in the tenth century and who wrote an independent grammar treatise विश्रान्तविद्याधर, together with उणादसूत्रवृत्ति and लिङ्गानुशासन.
vārttikasūtrathe same as वार्तिकवचन which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Varttikas are termed Varttika sutras on account of their close similarity with the original Sutras, which in contrast are termed Vrttisutras.
vigrahalit, separation of the two parts of a thing; the term is generally applied to the separation of the constituent words of a compound word: it is described to be of two kinds : ( a ) शास्त्रीयविग्रहृ or technical separation; e. g. राजपुरुष्: into राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु and ( 2 ) लौकिकविग्रहं or common or popular separation ; e. g. राजपुरूष: into राज्ञ: पुरुष:. It is also divided into two kinds according to the nature of the constituent words (a) स्वपदाविग्रह separation by means of the constituent words, exempli gratia, for example राजहितम् into राज्ञे हृितम्;(b) अस्वपदविग्रह, e. g. राजार्थम् into राज्ञे इदम् ;or exempli gratia, for example सुमुखीं into शोभनं मुखं अस्याः confer, compare M.Bh. on P.V.4.7. The compounds whose separation into constituent words cannot be shown by those words (viz. the constituent words) are popularly termed nityasamsa. The term नित्यसमास is explained as नित्यः समासो नित्यसमासः | यस्य विग्रहो नास्ति । M.Bh. on P.II.2.19 Vart. 4. The upapadasamsa is described as नित्यसमास. Sometimes especially in some Dvandva compounds each of the two separated words is capable of giving individually the senses of both the words exempli gratia, for example the words द्यावा and क्षामा of the compound द्यावाक्षामा. The word विग्रह is found used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the separate use of a word as contrasted with the use in a compound; cf अच्छेति विग्रहे प्लुतं भवति R.Pr.VII.1. विग्रहृ is defined as वृत्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः in the Siddhantakaumudi.
vidyāvinodagrandson of Rameswarabhatta of Pratisthana who wrote a grammar of the Prakrta dialects.
vidhāraṇamention of a consonant as intact id est, that is without any phonetic coalescence or संधि; the same as अभिनिधान. The term is used in this sense in the Pratisakhya works.
vibhaktyarthanirṇayaa general term given to a chapter on case-affixes as also to treatises discussing the sense and relations of case-affixes. There is a treatise of this name written by Giridhara and another written by Jayakṛṣna Maunī.
vivāraname given to an external effort in the production of a sound when the vocal chords of the glottis or larynx are extended; confer, compare कण्ठबिलस्य विकासः विवारः Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.9. confer, compare also विवरणं कण्ठस्य विस्तरणम् | स एव विवाराख्य: बाह्यः प्रयत्न: | तस्मिन्सति श्वासे नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः कियते | तद्ध्वनिसंसर्गादघोषो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नो जायते इति शिक्षायां स्मर्यते Bhāṣya on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 5.
viśeṣaṇasamāsa(1)a tatpuruṣa compo und of the type of Mayūravyartisakādi where both the words which are compounded together are adjectival; (2) a karmadhāraya compound where the second member is an adjective; a determinative compound confer, compare गमनं च यच्चिरं च गमनचिरमिति विशेषणसमासोयम् Kāś. on P.VI.2.6.
viśvarūpaa grammarian of the sixteenth century who has written a small grammar treatise called विश्वरूपनिबन्ध.
viṣṇupaṇḍitaa grammarian belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who has written a small treatise on Paribhāṣā or maxims of interpretation which he has named परिभाषाप्रक्राश.
vṛtti(1)treatment, practice of pronunciation; (2) conversion of one phonetic element into another; confer, compare R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas or words as they stand in the Saṁhhitā text, the word is often seen used in this way in the compound word पदवृत्ति; आन्पदा: पदवृत्तयः R.Pr. IV.17: (4) modes of recital of the Vedic text which are described to be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलम्बित based upon the time of the interval and the pronunciation which differs in each one; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4. 109, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also I.l.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).ll ; ( 5 ) nature confer, compare गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम् R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation of a word; (7) verbal or nominal form of a root; confer, compare अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्येन Nirukta of Yāska.II.1; (8)mode or treatment followed by a scientific treatise; cf का पुनर्वृत्तिः । वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः | M.Bh. in Āhnika l on वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेश: Vārttika 10; (9) manner of interpretation with the literal sense of the constituents present or absent, described usually as two-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, | but with a third kind added by some grammarians viz. the जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (10) a compound word giving an aggregate sense different from the exact literal sense of the constituent words; there are mentioned five vṛittis of this kind; confer, compare परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः । कृत्तद्धितसमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः | वृत्त्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. at the end of the Ekaśeṣaprakaraṇa; ( 11 ) interpretation of a collection of statements; the word was originally applied to glosses or comments on the ancient works like the Sūtra works, in which the interpretation of the text was given with examples and counterexamples where necessary: confer, compare वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introductory stanza in the Kāśikā.Later on, when many commentary works were written,the word वृत्ति was diferentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीका,चूर्णि, निर्युक्ति, टिप्पणी, पञ्जिका and others, and made applicable to commentary works concerned with the explanation of the rules with examples and counter-examples and such statements or arguments as were necessary for the explanation of the rules or the examples and counter examples. In the Vyākaraṇa-Śāstra the word occurs almost exclusively used for the learned Vṛtti on Pāṇini-sūtras by Vāmana and Jayāditya which was given the name Kāśikā Vṛtti; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on Pāṇini's grammar.
vṛttidīpikāa treatise on the different ways in which the meaning is conveyed by words according to the conventions of grammarians,written by a grammarian Krisnabhatta surnamed Mauni.
vṛddha(1)a term used in Paninis grammar for such words or nouns ( प्रातिपदिक ) which have for their first vowel a vrddhi vowel, i. e. either अा or ऐ or अौ: exempli gratia, for example शाला, माला et cetera, and others; confer, compare वृद्धिर्यस्य अचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम् ; (2) a term applied to the eight pronouns headed by त्यत् for purposes of the addition of taddhita affix. affixes prescribed for the Vrddha words, such as छ by वृद्धाच्छ: P. IV.2.114: (3) a term applied to words having ए or ओ as the first vowel in them, provided such words denote districts of Eastern India, e. g. गोनर्द, भोजकट et cetera, and others confer, compare एङ् प्राचां देशे, P.I.1.73, 74 and 75; (4) a term used in the Pratisakhya works for a protracted vowel ( प्लत ) which has three matras; cf तिस्रॊ वृद्धम् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya.44.
vṛddhi(1)a technical term used by Panini to denote the vowels अा, ऐ and औ: a vowel belonging to the third grade out of the three grades of vowels which are known as zero, normal and long grades; cf , वृद्धिरादैच् P I. 1.1: (2) lengthening completely of a vowel which is called प्लुति in grammar: the term is used in the Rk Tantra Pratisakhya in this sense.
vedamitraan ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work mentioned in the Rk Pratisakhya.
vaidyanāthaVaidyanatha Payagunde, a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century, who was one of the chief pupils of Nagesa and who prepared a line of pupils at Varanasi. He has written learned commentaries on standard works on grammar, the principal ones being the Prabha on the Sabdakaustubha, the Bhavaprakasika on the Brhaccabdendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the LaghuSabdendusekhara, the Kasika or Gada on the Paribhasendusekhara and an independent short treatise named Rapratyaya-khandana
vaiyarthyaabsence of any purpose or utility; the word is used many times in the case of a rule, or a word or two of it, in whose case वैयर्थ्य or absence of utility is shown, and, with a view to prevent its being looked upon as a serious fault, something is deduced and the purpose is shown; cf सूत्रवैयर्थ्यप्रसङ्गात् and व्यर्थं सज्ज्ञापयति used in grammar treatises.
vaiyākaraṇajīvātua term used for the grammar treatise written by Cangudasa which is also called Cangusutra or Canguvyakarana.
vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇaa well-known work on the grammatical interpretation of words written by Kondabhatta as an explanatory work (व्याख्यान) on the small work in verse consisting of only 72 Karikas written by his uncle Bhattoji Diksita. The treatise is also named Brihadvaiyakaranabhusana. A smaller work consisting of the same subjectmatter but omitting discussions, is written by the author for facilitating the understanding of students to which he has given the name Vaiyakarahabhusanasara. This latter work has got three commentary works written on it named Kasika, Kanti and Matonmajja and one more scholarly one Sankari, recently written by Shankar Shastri Marulkar.
veyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāraa slightly abridged form of the Vaiyakaranabhusana by the author Kondabhatta himself for students and beginners. It consists of the same number of fourteen chapters as the main treatise, which are given the name Nirnaya. See vaiyākaranabhusana.
vaiyākaraṇaśābdamālāवैयाकरणशब्दरत्नमाला a treatise on the use of words written as a helpful guide to Sanskrit writers, by a grammarian named Somayajin in 1848 A.D.
vaiyākaraṇasarvasvaa small treatise on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named Kasinatha who has also written a few more small works वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका, वृत्तिचन्द्रिका,धातुमञ्जरी etc
vaiyāghrapadyaname of a treatise of grammar written in ten chapters by an ancient grammarian व्याघ्रपाद्; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपद्यम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV 2.65. For details, see Vyakaranamahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Ed. pp. 133, 134.
vyaṅkaṭasubbāśāsrīa grammarian who has written a grammar treatise named भाषामञ्जरीव्याकरण.
vyākaraṇaGrammar the development of the meaning of the term can be seen by the senses given below in a serial order and the examples after those senses; (a) analysis or explanation by analysis; (b) rules of explanation; (c) specific rules explaining the formation of words; d) explanation of the formation of rules; (e) a treatise in which such an explanation is given; (f) a collection of such treatises and (g) a systematic explanation of the formation of words in a language (व्याकरणशास्त्र or शब्दानुशासन); confer, compare(a) व्यक्रियते अनेन इति व्याकरणम् ; M.Bh.on Ahnika 1, Vart. 12: confer, compare (b) लक्ष्यलक्षणे व्याकरणम्: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1, Vart. 14; confer, compare (c) न यथा लोके तथा व्याकरणे Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.1. Vart. 7; d) सर्वत्रैव हि व्याकरणे पूर्वोच्चारित: संज्ञी परोच्चारिता संज्ञा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. I. 1.1. Vart 7: (e) न तथा लोके यथा व्याकरणे M.Bh. on P, I. 1.23 Vart. 4: confer, compare(f)इह च व्याकरणे शब्दे कार्यस्य संभव:, अर्थं असंभवः | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.68. confer, compare (g) व्याकरणं नाम इयमुत्तरा विद्या । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.32. The word व्याकरण is mostly used in the sense of ’the Science of Grammar ' in the Mahabhasya. It is explained by modern scholars as 'the law of the corrections of speech and etymological science' and described both as a science and an art.
vyākaraṇacandrikāa short treatise on grammar written by Krsnacarya.
vyākaraṇadīpaa small treatise on grammar by Cidrupasraya.
vyāghrapādname of an ancient grammarian who is quoted in the Pratisakhya works and the Mahabhasya His grammar work was called dasaka' possibly on account of its consisting of 10 chapters; confer, compare माध्यन्दिनिर्वष्टि गुणं त्विगन्ते नपुसंके व्याघ्रपदां वरिष्ठ: KaS. on P.VII.194; confer, compare also दशक्रा वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kas, , on P.IV.2.65.
byāḍiname of an ancient grammarian with a sound scholarship in Vedic phonetics, accentuation,derivation of words and their interpretation. He is believed to have been a relative and contemporary of Panini and to have written a very scholarly vast volume on Sanskrit grammar named *Samgraha which is believed to have consisted of a lac of verses; confer, compare संग्रहो व्याडिकृतो लक्षसंख्ये ग्रन्थ: NageSa's Uddyota; confer, compare also इह पुरा पाणिनीये अस्मिन्व्याकरणे ब्याड्युपरचितं लक्षग्रन्थपरिमाणं निबन्धनमासीत् Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Tika. The work is not available at present. References to Vyadi or to his work are found in the Pratisakhya works, the Mahabhasya, the Varttikas, the Vakyapadiya and many subsequent treatises. A work on the Vyakarana Paribhasas, believed to have been written by Vyadi, is available by the name परिभाषासूचन which from its style and other peculiarities seems to have been written after the Varttikas, but before the Mahabhasya. Vyadi is well-known to have been the oldest exponent of the doctrine that words denote an individual object and not the genus. For details see pp. 136-8, Vol. 7 Vyakarana Mahabhasya DE. Society's Edition.
vyāpattiliterally loss or disappearance; the word is used in the sense of conversion of one thing into another in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare अथाप्यन्तव्यापत्तिर्भवति Nirukta of Yāska.II. l ; cf also अन्यैरेकारान्नातिरत्र पूर्वा ततो व्यापत्तिर्भवतीति विद्यात् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)V.1.
vyutpattivāda(l)name given to a topic in grammar which deals with the derivation of words as suitable to the sense: (2) name given to treatises discussing the derivation and interpretation of words.
vhiṭne[ WHITNEY, WILLIAM DWIGHT, 1827-1894]a sound scholar of Vedic grammar who has, besides some books on Linguistic studies, written a work on Vedic Grammar and edited the Atharvaveda Pratisakhya.
khadhmaname given to a Yama letter in the Siksa treatises.
śabarasvāmina grammarian to whom a metrical treatise on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन is ascribedition This शवरस्वामिन् was comparatively a modern grammarian who was given the title बालयोगीश्वर. This लिङ्गानुशासन has a commentary written by हृर्षवर्धन Evidently these grammarians शबरस्वामिन् and हृर्षवर्धन are different from the famous author of the मीमांसाभाष्य and the patron of the poet Bana respectively.
śabdaliterally "sound" in general; confer, compare शब्दं कुरु शब्दं मा कार्षीः | ध्वनिं कुर्वनेवमुच्यते | M.Bh. in Ahnika I; confer, compare also शब्दः प्रकृतिः सर्ववर्णानाम् | वर्णपृक्तः: शब्दो वाच उत्पत्तिः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII.1, XXIII.3.In grammar the word शब्द is applied to such words only as possess sense; confer, compare प्रतीतपदार्थको लोके ध्वनि: शब्द: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Ahnika 1: confer, comparealso येनोच्चरितेन अर्थः प्रतीयते स शब्दः Sringara Prakasa I; confer, compare also अथ शब्दानुशासनम् M.Bh. Ahnika 1. In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya, शब्द् is said to be constituted of air as far as its nature is concerned, but it is taken to mean in the Pratisakhya and grammar works in a restricted sense as letters possessed of sense, The vajasaneyiPratisakhya gives four kinds of words तिडू, कृत्, तद्धित and समास while नाम, आख्यात, निपात and उपसर्ग are described to be the four kinds in the Nirukta. As शब्द in grammar, is restricted to a phonetic unit possessed of sense, it can be applied to crude bases, affixes, as also to words that are completely formed with case-endings or personal affixes. In fact, taking it to be applicable to all such kinds, some grammarians have given tweive subdivisions of शब्द, vizप्रक्रुति, प्रत्यय,उपत्कार, उपपद, प्रातिपदिक, विभक्ति, उपसर्जन, समास, पद, वाक्य, प्रकरण and प्रबन्ध; confer, compare Sringara Prakasa I.
śabdakaustubhaa treatise on grammar, critically explaining and discuss ing the meaning of Panini's Sutras in the order of the author himselfeminine. the work is written by Bhattoji Diksita and is mainly based on the Mahabhasya.
śābdabodhaprakriyāa grammar treatise on the denotation and relation of words written by a grammarian ramed Ramakrsna.
śabdarūpāvalia very brief treatise on declension giving the forms of the seven cases of a few choice-words. The work is studied as the first elementary work and is very common without the name of any specific author.There are different works named शब्दरूपावलि giving declensions of different words which are all anonymous, although from the dates of manuscripts mentioned, they appear to be more than five or six hundred years old.
śabdavyutpattikaumudīa small treatise on the derivation of words written by a grammarian named RajaramaSastrin.
śabdānuśāsanaliterally science of grammar dealing with the formation of words, their accents, and use in a sentence. The word is used in connection with standard works on grammar which are complete and self-sufficient in all the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.mentioned features. Patanjali has begun his Mahabhasya with the words अथ शब्दानुशासनम् referring possibly to the vast number of Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and hence the term शब्दानुशासन according to him means a treatise on the science of grammar made up of the rules of Panini with the explanatory and critical varttikas written by Katyayana and other Varttikakaras.The word शब्दानुशासन later on, became synonymons with Vyakarana and it was given as a title to their treatises by later grammarians, or was applied to the authoritative treatise which introduced a system of grammar, similar to that of Panini. Hemacandra's famous treatise, named सिद्धहैमचन्द्र by the author,came to be known as हैमशब्दानुशासन. Similarly the works on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्तिशाकटायन and देवनन्दिन् were called शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and जैनेन्द्र' शब्दानुशासन respectively.
śarvavarmāa reputed grammarian who is believed to have been a contemporary of the poet Gunadhya in the court of Satavahana. He wrote the Grammar rules which are named the Katantra Sutras which are mostly based on the Sutras of Panini. In the grammar treatise named 'the Katantra Sutra' written by Sarvavarman the Vedic section and all the intricacies and difficult elements are carefully and scrupulously omitted by him, with a view to making his grammar useful for beginners and students of average intelligence.
śākaṭāyana(1)name of an ancient reputed scholar of Grammar and Pratisakhyas who is quoted by Panini. He is despisingly referred to by Patanjali as a traitor grammarian sympathizing with the Nairuktas or etymologists in holding the view that all substantives are derivable and can be derived from roots; cf तत्र नामान्याख्यातजानीति शाकटायनो नैरुक्तसमयश्च Nir.I.12: cf also नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् M. Bh on P.III.3.1. Sakatayana is believed to have been the author of the Unadisutrapatha as also of the RkTantra Pratisakhya of the Samaveda ; (2) name of a Jain grammarian named पाल्यकीर्ति शाकटायन who lived in the ninth century during the reign of the Rastrakuta king Amoghavarsa and wrote the Sabdanusana which is much similar to the Sutrapatha of Panini and introduced a new System of Grammar. His work named the Sabdanusasana consists of four chapters which are arranged in the form of topics, which are named सिद्धि. The grammar work is called शब्दानुशासन.
śākaṭāyanavyākaraṇathe treatise on grammar written by sakatayana। See शाकटायन.
śākaṭāyanaśabdānuśāsananame of the treatise on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्ति-शाकटायन.
śāntanavaan ancient scholar of grammar who wrote a treatise known as the Phit sutras on accents.
śābdabodhataraṅgiṇīa treatise on the theory of verbal import written by ईश्वरानन्द.
śābdabodhaprakāśikāa treatise on the theory of शब्दबोघ written by रामकिशोरचक्रवर्तिन्.
śikṣāgeneral name given to a work on Phonetics. Although there are many such works which are all called शिक्षा, the work, which is often referred to, by the word, is the Siksa named पाणिनीयशिक्षा, about the authorship of which, however, there is a doubt whether it was the work of Panini or of somebody belonging to his school. The Siksa works are helpful, no doubt, for the study of grammar, but no topic belonging to Siksa is given by Panini which apparently means that these works do not come under the subject or province of Grammar. The reason why the Siksa topics are not given by Panini, is worth consideration. These Siksa works are not specifically related to a particular Veda and it cannot be said whether they preceded or succeeded the Pratisakhya works.
śuklayajuḥprātiśākhyaname of the Pratisakhya treatise pertaining to the White Yajurveda which is also called the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya. This work appears to be a later one as compared with the other PratiSakhya works and bears much similarity with some of the Sutras of Panini. It is divided into eight chapters by the author and it deals with letters, their origin and their classification, the euphonic and other changes when the Samhita text is rendered into the Pada text, and accents. The work appears to be a common work for all the different branches of the White Yajurveda, being probably based on the individually different Pratisakhya works of the different branches of the Shukla Yajurveda composed in ancient times. Katyayana is traditionally believed to be the author of the work and very likely he was the same Katyayana who wrote the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini.
śeṣacakrapāṇia grammarian of the Sesa family who wrote a small treatise on case-relations named कारकतत्त्व.
śeṣādria grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a work, Paribhasabhaskara, on the Paribhasas of the Panini system; the treatise is written in the manner of Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti which has been taken as a basis by him.
śaityāyanaan ancient Grammarian and Vedic scholar who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya for recommending a sharp and distinct nasalisation of the anusvara and the fifth class-consonants; confer, compare तत्रितरमानुनासिक्यमनुस्वारोत्तमेषु इति शैत्यायन: Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII. 1.
śaunakaa great ancient Vedic scholar who is believed to have written the Rk. Pratisakhya, which is said to be common for the two main branches of the Rgveda but which at present represents, in fact, all the different branches of the Rgveda.
śaunakaprātiśākhyaa popular name of the well-known Pratisakhya of the Rgveda, named ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य as well as ऋग्वेदप्रातिशाख्य.
śrīkaṇoktaa grammarian who has written a small treatise on corrupt words or ungrammatical words, which is named अपशब्दखण्डन.
śvāsaliterally breath; the voiceless breath required for uttering some letters; the term is used in the Pratisakhya and Vyakarana books in the sense of breath which is prominently required in the utterance of the hard consonants, sibilants, visarga and the Jihvamuliya and Upadhmaniya letters; the term is used in connection with these letters also; the usual term in use is, of course, श्वासानुप्रदान, the term श्वास showing the property of the breath, with which these letters are characterizedition
ṣaṭkārakavicāraan anonymous small treatise on the six case-relations in verse-form with a commentary.
ṣaṭkārakavivecanaa small treatise on the six case-relations written by a grammarian Bhavananda who held the title Siddhāntavagisa.
ṣatvachange of the consonant स् into ष् in certain conditions in the formation of a word, or after prepositions in the case of verbs beginning with स्. This cerebralization of स् was a peculiar phonetic change which naturally occurred when स् in utterance came after a vowel excepting अ. Some of the Pratisakhya works have exhaustively treated this change and Panini has also mentioned many rules in connection with it.
ṣaṣṭhaa term used in connection with the sixth of the spirants viz. the Jivhamuliya letter confer, compare ऋकारल्कारावथ षष्ठ ऊष्मा Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.18; the term is also used in the sense of the sixth vowel viz. ई. in the Rk. Pratisakhya; confer, compare मुख्ये परे पञ्चमषष्ठयोश्च Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 29.
ṣvunkrt. affix अक added to a root in the sense of a skilled artisan नर्तकः, नर्तकी ; खनकः खनकी ; रजकः, रजकी; confer, compareP. III. 1.145.
saṃjñāa technical term; a short wording to convey ample sense; a term to know the general nature cf things; convention; confer, compare वृद्धिशब्द; संज्ञा; अादेच: संज्ञिन: M.Bh. on P.1-1.1. There are two main divisions of संज्ञा-कृत्रिमसंज्ञा or an artificial term such as टि, घु, or भ which is merely conventional, and अकृत्रिमसंज्ञा which refers to the literal sense conveyed by the word such as अव्यय, सर्वनाम and the like. Some grammar works such as the Candra avoid purely conventional terms, These samjhas are necessary for every scientific treatise. In Panini's grammar, there are the first two chapters giving and explaining the technical terms whose number exceeds well-nigh a hundredition
saṃjñādhikāraa topic or a chapter or a portion of a treatise in which technical terms are given and explained; cf, संज्ञाधिकारोयम्; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.46, I. 1.56, I. 4.1, I. 4.23; see the word संज्ञा.
saṃdhieuphonic combination; phonetic combination of two vowels or two consonants or one vowel and one consonant resulting from their close utterance; many kinds of such combinations and varieties are given in the Pratisakhya works. In the Siddhantakaumudi, Bhattoji Diksita has given five kinds of such Sandhis at the beginning of his work; confer, compare पदान्तपदाद्योः संधिः । यः कश्चिद्वैदिकशास्त्रसंधिरुच्यते स पदान्तपदाद्योर्वेदितव्यः।ते संधयश्चत्वारो भवन्ति । स्वरयोः व्यञ्जनयो: स्वरव्यञ्जनयोश्च Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 3.
saṃprasāraṇaliterally extension; the process of changing a semi-vowel into a simple vowel of the same sthana or place of utterance; the substitution of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ for the semi-vowels य्, व् , र् and ल् respectively; cf इग्यणः संप्रसारणम् P. 1.1.45. The term संप्रसारण is rendered as a 'resultant vowel' or as 'an emergent vowel'. The ancient term was प्रसारण and possibly it referred to the extension of य् and व्, into their constituent parts इ +अ, उ+अ et cetera, and others the vowel अ being of a weak grade but becoming strong after the merging of the subseguent vowel into it exempli gratia, for example confer, compare सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P. III. 2.8 Vart.1. For the words taking this samprasarana change, see P. VI. 1 .13 to .19. According to some grammarians the term संप्रसारण is applied to the substituted vowels while according to others the term refers to the operation of the substitution: confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.15. The substitution of the samprasarana vowel is to be given preference in the formation of a word; , confer, compare संप्रसारणं तदाश्रयं च कार्यं बलवत् Pari. Sek. Pari. 1 19. संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्व the relative superior strength of the samprasarana change in comparison with other operations occurring simultaneotisly. The phrase न वा संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्वात् is often used in the Mahabhasya which is based upon the dictum of the superior strength of the samprasarana substitution, which is announced by the writer of the Varttikas; P. VI. 1.17 Vart, 2. , See संप्रसारण.
saṃvādacintāmaṇiname of a small treatise on roots and their meanings written by : a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय who has also written a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha called कौस्तुभगुण and सिद्धान्तकौमुदीगूढफक्किकाप्रकाश,
saṃhitāposition of words or parts of words in the formation ofa word quite near each other which results into the natural phonetic coalescence of the preceding and the following letters. Originally when the Vedic hymns or the running prose passages of the Yajurveda were split up into their different constituent parts namely the words or padas by the Padakaras, the word संहिता or संहितापाठ came into use as contrasted with the पदपाठ. The writers of of the Pratisakhyas have conseguently defined संहिता as पदप्रकृतिः संहिता, while Panini who further split up the padas into bases ( प्रकृति ) and affixes ( प्रत्यय ) and mentioned several augments and substitutes, the phonetic combinations, which resulted inside the word or pada, had to be explained by reason of the close vicinity of the several phonetic units forming the base, the affix, the augment, the substitute and the like, and he had to define the word संहृिता rather differently which he did in the words परः संनिकर्षः संहिता; cf P.I.4.109: confer, compare also संहितैकपदे नित्या नित्या धातूपसर्गयोः । नित्य समासे वाक्ये तु सा विवक्षामपेक्षते Sabdakaustubha on Maheshvara Sutra 5.1.
saṃhitāpāṭhathe running text or the original text of the four Vedas as originally composedition This text, which was the original one, was split up into its constituent padas or separate words by ancient sages शौनक, अात्रेय and others,with a view to facilitating the understanding of it, and consequently to preserving it in the oral tradition.The original was called मूलप्रकृति of which the पदपाठ and the क्रमपाठ which were comparatively older than the other artificial recitations such as the जटापाठ, घनपाठ and others, are found mentioned in the Pratisakhya works.
saṇtaddhita affix. affix सण् prescribed after the word पर्शु in the sense of collection; e. g. पार्श्र्वम् : confer, compare पर्श्वा: सण् P,IV,2.43 Vart, 3 for which there is an alfernative reading पर्श्वा णस् वक्तव्यः; for facility of grammatical operations णस् is recommended with preference in the Mahabhasya , cf एवं तर्हि णस् वक्तव्य; M.Bh. on P. IV.2.43 Vart. 3; (2) सण् is given as a technical term for संयोग in the Pratisakhya works: confer, compare सयुक् सण् । संयुक्तं व्यञ्जनं संयोगसंज्ञं भवति R.T.27.
sadāśiva-agnihotrīname of a modern grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a gloss on Pratisakhya works called प्रातिशाख्यदीपिका.
sapādasaptādhyāyīa term used in connection with Panini's first seven books and a quarter of the eighth, as contrasted with the term Tripadi, which is used for the last three quarters of the eighth book. The rules or operations given in the Tripadi, are stated to be asiddha or invalid for purposes of the application of the rules in the previous portion, viz. the Sapadasaptadhyayi, and hence in the formation of' words all the rules given in the first seven chapters and a quarter, are applied first and then a way is prepared for the rules of the last three quarters. It is a striking thing that the rules in the Tripadi mostly concern the padas or formed words, the province, in fact, of the Pratisakhya treatises, and hence they should, as a matter of fact, be applicable to words after their formation and evidently to accomplish this object, Panini has laid down the convention of the invalidity in question by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII. 2,1.
saptasvaralit, the seven accents; the term refers to the seven accents formed of the subdivisions of the three main Vedic accents उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित viz उदात्त, उदात्ततर, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर, स्वरित, स्वरितोदात्त,and एकश्रुति: cf त एते तन्त्रे तरनिर्देशे सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति ( उदात: । उदात्ततरः । अनुदात्तः ! अनुदात्ततरः । स्वरित: । स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः । एकश्रुतिः सप्तम: ॥ M. Bh on P. I. 2. 33. It is possible that these seven accents which were turned into the seven notes of the chantings of the samans developed into the seven musical notes which have traditionally come down to the present day known as सा रे ग म प ध नी; confer, compare उदात्ते निषादगान्धारौ अनुदात्ते ऋषभधैवतौ । स्वरितप्रभवा ह्येते षड्जमध्यमपञ्चमाः। Pāṇini. Siksa. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions the seven accents differently; confer, compare उदात्तादयः परे सप्त । यथा-अभिनिहितक्षैप्र-प्राशश्लिष्ट-तैरोव्यञ्जन-तैरोविराम-पादवृत्तताथाभाव्याः Uvvata on V.Pr.I.l l4.
samantabhadraa Jain scholar of great repute who is believed to have written, besides many well-known religious books such as आप्तमीमांसा गन्धहस्तिभाष्य et cetera, and others on Jainism, a treatise on grammar called Cintamani Vyakarana.
samanvayapradīpasaṃketaa treatise on the philosophy of Vyakarana written as a commentary by the author दंवशर्मन् on his own Karikas on the subject.
samānākṣarasimple vowels or monophthongs अ, इ and उ as contrasted with diphthongs ( संध्यक्षर ); cf अष्टौ समानाक्षराण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षराण्युत्तराणि Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 11, confer, compare also अथ नवादितस्समानाक्षराणि Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.1. 2. Some writers of Pratisakhyas held ऋ as संध्यक्षर and not as समानाक्षर; cf अन्यत्तु मतम्-ऋकारादीनां त्रयाणां त्वरद्वयसंधिरूपत्वाभावेपि रूपद्वयसद्भावादेषा संज्ञा न युक्तेति नवानामेवाहेति। gloss on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 2.
samāsaplacing together of two or more words so as to express a composite sense ; compound composition confer, compare पृथगर्थानामेकार्थीभावः समासः। Although the word समास in its derivative sense is applicable to any wording which has a composite sense (वृत्ति), still it is by convention applied to the समासवृत्ति only by virtue of the Adhikarasutra प्राक् कडारात् समास: which enumerates in its province the compound words only. The Mahabhasyakara has mentioned only four principal kinds of these compounds and defined them; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थ प्रधानोव्ययीभावः। उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः। अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः । उभयपदार्थप्रधानो द्वन्द्वः । M.Bh. on P.II.1.6; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.II.1.20, II.1.49,II.2.6, II.4.26, V.1.9. Later grammarians have given many subdivisions of these compounds as for example द्विगु, कर्मधारय and तत्पुरुष (with द्वितीयातत्पुरुष, तृतीयातत्पुरुष et cetera, and othersas also अवयवतत्पुरुष, उपपदतत्पुरुष and so on) समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुवीहि, समाहारद्वन्द्व, इतरेतरद्वन्द्व and so on. समासचक्र a short anonymous treatise on compounds which is very popular and useful for beginners. The work is attributed to वररुचि and called also as समासपटल. The work is studied and committed to memory by beginners of Sanskrit ] studies in the PathaSalas of the old type.
samāsavāda(l)a short treatise on compounds by गोविन्दचक्रवर्तिन् ; (2) a small compendium on compounds written by a grammarian named सार्वभौम.
samāsaśeābhāa short treatise on compounds by यश:सागर.
sasaṃkhyapossessed of the same number एकवचन, द्विवचन or बहुवचन: confer, compare कृत्स्न: पदार्थाभिधीयेत सद्रव्यः सलिङ्गः ससंख्य: । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2. 24 Vart. 8. सस्थान having got an identical place of utterance; the word is much used in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare सस्थानेन घोषिणां घोर्षिणैव Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 5.
sāmatantravyākaraṇaan anonymous ancient work of the type of the Pratisakhya works dealing with the euphonic changes and accents in the padapatha of the Samaveda.
sāmavaśaname of a Samdhi or euphonic change of the type of the vowels अ, इ and उ being lengthened in some specified cases chiefly for the sake of music ( साम ) or metre. This lengthening is given the name प्लुति in the Rk Pratisakhya: confer, compare दीर्ध ह्रस्वो व्यञ्जनेन्यस्त्वृकाराद् यथादिष्टं सामवशः स सन्धिः | Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)VII.1.
sāmavedprātiśākhyaname of a Pratisakhya work on Samaveda. It is probable that there were some Pratisakhya works written dealing with the different branches or Sakhas of the Samaveda, as could be inferred from indirect references to such works. For instance in the Mahabhasya there is a passage "ननु च भोश्छन्दोगानां सात्यमुग्रिराणायनीयाः अर्धमेकारमर्धमोकारं चाधीयते। ..पार्षदकृतिरेषां तत्रभवताम् " which refers to such works At present, however, one such work common to the several branches of the Samaveda, called Rktantra is available, and it is called Samaveda Pratisakhya. It is believed to have been written by औदव्रजि and revised by शाकटायन.
sāmānyaviśeṣabhāvathe relationship between the general and the particular, which forms the basis of the type of apavada which is explained by the analogy of तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय; the word also refers to the method followed by the Sutras of Panini, or any treatise of grammar for the matter of that, where a general rule is prescribed and, for the sake of definiteness some specific rules laying down exceptions, are given afterwards: confer, compare किंचित्सामान्यविशेषवल्लक्षणं प्रवर्त्यं येनाल्पेन यत्नेन महतः शद्बौघान् प्रतिपद्येरन् l Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnik 1.
sārasvataname of a grammar work which was once very popular on account of its brevity, believed to have been written in the sutra form by an ancient grammarian named Narendra who is said to have composed 700 sutras under the inspiration of Sarasvati.The exposition of these Sutras by a reputed grammarian named Anubhutisvarupacarya who possibly flourished in the thirteenth century A. D., is known by the name सारस्वतप्रक्रिया which has remained as a text book on grammar to the present day in some parts of India. This प्रक्रिया is popularly known as सारस्वतव्याकरण. The technical terms in this grammar are the current popular ones.
sārasvataprakriyāthe popular name given to the gloss by Anubhutisvarupacarya on Narendra's grammar rules. See सारस्वत a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
sārāvalīor सारावली-व्य्याकरण an inindependent treatise on grammar by Naryana Vandyopadhyaya.
siddhāntakaumudīa critical and scholarly commentary on the Sutras of Panini, in which the several Sutras are arranged topicwise and fully explained with examples and counter examples. The work is exhaustive, yet not voluminous, difficult yet popular, and critical yet lucid. The work is next in importance to the Mahabhasya in the system of Panini, and its study prepares the way for understanding the Mahabhasya. It is prescribed for study in the courses of Vyakarana at every academy and Pathasala and is expected to be committed to memory by students who want to be thorough scholars of Vyakarana.By virtue of its methodical treatment it has thrown into the back-ground all kindred works and glosses or Vrttis on the Sutras of Panini. It is arranged into two halves, the first half dealing with seven topics ( 1 ) संज्ञापरिभाषा, ( 2 ) पञ्त्वसंधि, ( 3 ) षड्लिङ्ग, ( 4 ) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, ( 5 ) कारक, ( 6 ) समास, ( 7 ) तद्धित, and the latter half dealing with five topics, ( 1 ) दशगणी, ( 2 ) द्वादशप्राक्रिया ( 3 ) कृदन्त ( 4 ) वैदिकी and ( 5 ) स्वर. The author भट्टोजीदीक्षित has himself written a scholarly gloss on it called प्रौढमनेरमा on which, his grandson, Hari Diksita has written a learned commentary named लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got a large number of commentaries on it out of which, the commentaries प्रौढमनेरमा, बालमनोरमा, (by वासुदेवदीक्षित) तत्त्वबोधिनी and लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर are read by almost every true scholar of Vyakarana. Besides these four, there are a dozen or more commentaries some of which can be given below with their names and authors ( I ) सुबेाधिनी by जयकृष्णमौनि, ( 2 ) सुबोधिनी by रामकृष्णभट्ट ( 3 ) वृहृच्छब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेश, ( 4 ) बालमनेारमा by अनन्तपण्डित, ( 5 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहृस्य by नीलकण्ठ, ( 6 ) रत्नार्णव, by कृष्णमिश्र ( 7 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर by रामकृष्ण, ( 8 ) सरला by तारानाथ,(9) सुमनोरमा by तिरुमल्ल,(10)सिद्वान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by लक्ष्मीनृसिंह, (11 )सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by विश्वेश्वरतीर्थ, (12) रत्नाकर by शिवरामेन्द्रसरस्वती and (13) प्रकाश by तोलापदीक्षित. Although the real name of the work is वैयाकरणसिद्धान्ततकौमुदी, as given by the author, still popularly the work is well known by the name सिद्धान्तकौमुदी. The work has got two abridged forms, the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi both written by Varadaraja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita.
siddhāntakaumudīvādārthaan explanatory work, discussing the difficult sentences and passages of the Siddhantakaumudi, written by a grammarian named Ramakrisna. सिद्धान्तरत्न a gloss on the Sarasvatisutra written by a grammarian natmed Jinacandra. सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर name of a commentary on the Katantraparisista by Sivaramacakravartin.
siddhāntasārasvataan independent work on grammar believed to have been written by Devanandin. सिद्धान्तिन् a term used in connection with the writer himself of a treatise when he gives a reply to the objections raised by himself or quoted from others,the term पूर्वपाक्षिन् being used for the objector. सिद्धि formation of a word: establishment of the correct view after the removal of the objection; e. g. संज्ञासिद्वि, कार्यसिाद्व, स्वरसिद्धि. सिप् (1) the personal ending ( सि ) of the second person singular (मध्यमपुरुषैकवचन ) substituted for the affix ल्; of the ten tenses and moods लट्, लिट्, लृट् and others; confer, compare P.III.4.78: (2 Vikarana affix स् added to a root before the affixes of लेट् or Vedic Subjunctive. सिम् a technical term used in the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya for the first eight vowels of the alphabet, viz. अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ and ऋ: confer, compare सिमादितोष्टौ स्वराणाम् V. Pr.. I.44.
sīradevaa prominent grammarian of the Eastern part of India who lived in the twelfth century A. D. He was a very sound scholar of Panini's grammar who wrote a few glosses on prominent works in the system. His Paribhasavrtti is a masterly independent treatise among the recognised works on the Paribhasas in which he has quoted very profusely from the works of his predecessors, such as the Kasika, Nyasa, Anunyasa and others. The reputed scholar Maitreya Raksita is more often guoted than others.
suc(l)taddhita affix. affix स् applied to fद्व, त्रि, चतुर् and to एक optionally, in the sense of 'repetition of the activity' e. g. द्विः करोति et cetera, and others cf Kas, on P. V. 4. 18, 19; (2) Unadi affix स्, see सु a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. सुजनपण्डित a grammarian who wrote a small treatise on genders named लिङार्थचन्द्रिका सुट् (1) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the first five case-affixes which are called सर्वनामस्थान also, when they pertain to the masculine or the feminine gender: confer, compare सुडनपुंसकस्य I.1.43; (2)augment स् prefixed to the root कृ and to the root कॄ when preceded by certain prepositions and as seen in the words कुस्तुम्बुरु and others as also in the words अपरस्पर गोष्पद, आस्पद, अाश्चर्य, अपस्कर, विप्किर, हरिश्चन्द्र, प्रस्कण्व्, मल्कर, कास्तीर, अजास्तुन्द, कारस्कर and words in the class of words headed by पारस्कर, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. VI. 1.135-57: (3) augment स् prefixed to the case-affix अाम् after a pronoun; e. g. सर्वेषाम् confer, compare P. VII. I.52;(4) augment स् prefixed to the consonant त् or थ् pertaining to लिङ् affixes, e. g. कृषीष्ट confer, compare P. III. 4.107.
supadmasamāsasaṃgrahaa treatise written by a grammarian named रूपनारायण, on the सुपद्मव्याकरण, which see below.
sūtraa short pithy assertion laying down something in a scientific treatise; aphorism; the word is sometimes used in a collective sense in the singular, referring to the whole collection of Sutras or rules; confer, compare व्याकरणस्य सूत्रम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika I. The term is defined as अाल्पाक्षरमसंदिग्धं सारवद्विश्वतोमुखम् | अस्तोभमनवद्यं च सूत्रं सूत्रविदो विदुः. There are given generally six kinds of Sutras viz. संज्ञासूत्र, परिभाषासूत्र,विधिसूत्र, नियमसूत्र, प्रतिषेधसूत्र and अधिकारसूत्र; confer, compare also संज्ञा च परिभाषा च विधिर्नियम एव च प्रतिषेधोधिकारश्च षड्विधम् सूत्रलक्षणम् | Com. on Kat. I. 1.2.
soma,somacāryaname of the writer of a gloss named त्रिभाष्यरत्न on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya.
sthabased upon; the word is peculiarly used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of ' based on ' ' belonging to ' or ' made up of '; confer, compare अस्थनामिनीं सन्ध्यम्, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 91 , so also confer, compare वं नैगि उस्थे Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 162.
sthavirakauṇḍinyaname of an ancient writer of Pratisakhya works who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII. 4.
sphoṭaname given to the radical Sabda which communicates the meaning to the hearers as different from ध्वनि or the sound in ordinary experience.The Vaiyakaranas,who followed Panini and who were headed by Bhartihari entered into discussions regarding the philosophy of Grammar, and introduced by way of deduction from Panini's grammar, an important theory that शब्द which communicates the meaning is different from the sound which is produced and heard and which is merely instrumental in the manifestation of an internal voice which is called Sphota.स्फुटयतेनेन अर्थः: इति स्फोटः or स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायमादुपजायते Vakyapadiya; confer, compare also अभिव्यक्तवादको मध्यमावस्थ आन्तर: शब्द: Kaiyata's Pradipa. For, details see Vakyapadiya I and Sabdakaustubha Ahnika 1. It is doubtful whether this Sphota theory was. advocated before Panini. The word स्फोटायन has been put by Panini in the rule अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य only incidentally and, in fact, nothing can be definitely deduced from it although Haradatta says that स्फोटायन was the originator of the स्फोटवाद. The word स्फोट is not actually found in the Pratisakhya works. However, commentators on the Pratisakhya works have introduced it in their explanations of the texts which describe वर्णोत्पत्ति or production of sound; confer, compare commentary on R.Pr.XIII.4, T.Pr. II.1. Grammarians have given various kinds of sphota; confer, compare स्फोटो द्विधा | व्यक्तिस्फोटो जातिस्फोटश्च। व्यक्तिस्पोटः सखण्ड अखण्डश्च । सखण्ड। वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। अखण्ड: पदवाक्यभेदेन द्विधा ! एवं पञ्च व्यक्तिस्फोटाः| जातिस्फोट: वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। इत्येवमष्टौ स्फोटः तत्र अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट एव मुख्य इति नव्याः । वाक्य जातिस्फोट इति तु प्राञ्चः॥; confer, compare also पदप्रकृतिः संहिता इति प्रातिशाख्यमत्र मानम् । पदानां प्रकृतिरिति षष्ठीतत्पुरुषे अखण्डवाक्यस्फोटपक्षः । बहुव्रीहौ सखण्डबाक्यस्फोट:||
sphoṭacaṭakaa small treatise on the theory of Sphota by a sound modern scholar of Vyakarana and Nyaya, by name Krisnasastri Arade who lived in Benaras in the earlier part of the nineteenth century.
sphoṭacandrikāa small treatise on the theory of Sphota written by Jayakrsna Mauni of the famous Maunin family. The author is known as Krsnabhatta also.
sphoṭavādaa general name given to treatises discussing the nature of Sphota written by the Vaiyakaranas who defend and establish the theory of Sphota and by the Naiyayikas who criticise the theory. Famous among these works are (l) स्फोटवाद by a stalwart Grammarian Kondabhatta, the author of the Vaiyakaramabhusana and (2) स्फोटवाद by NageSa, the reputed grammarian of the eighteenth century.
sphīṭasiddhi(1)name of a short treatise on the nature of Sphota, written by a grammarian named Bharata MiSra; (2) name of a short disquisition on Sphota by MandanamiSra.
sva(1)personal-ending of the second person singular. Atmanepada in the imperative mood; cf थास: से | सवाभ्यां वामौ | P.III.4.80, 91 ; (2) a term used in the sense of स्ववर्गीय (belonging to the same class or category) in the Pratisakhya works; cf स्पर्श: स्वे R.T.25; confer, compare also कान्त् स्वे Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 1. 55;confer, comparealso R, Pr.IV.1 ; and VI.1 ;(3) cognate, the same as सवर्ण defined by Panini in तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P. P.I.1.9; the term is found used in the Jain grammar works of Jainendra, Sakatayana and Hemacanda cf ]ain. I.1.2 SikI. 1.2; Hema. I.1.17.
svara(l)vowel, as contrasted with a consonant which never stands by itself independently. The word स्वर is defined generally :as स्वयं राजन्ते ते स्वराः ( Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on pan. The word स्वर is always used in the sense of a vowel in the Pratisakhya works; Panini however has got the word अच् (short term or Pratyahara formed of अ in 'अइउण्' and च् at the end of एऔच् Mahesvara sutra 4 ) always used for vowels, the term स्वर being relegated by him to denote accents which are also termed स्वर in the ancient Pratisakhyas and grammars. The number of vowels, although shown differently in diferent ancient works, is the same, viz. five simple vowels अ,इ,उ, ऋ, लृ, and four diphthongs ए, ऐ, ओ, and अौ. These nine, by the addition of the long varieties of the first four such as आ, ई, ऊ, and ऋ, are increased to thirteen and further to twentytwo by adding the pluta forms, there being no long variety for लृ and short on for the diphthongs. All these twentytwo varieties have further subdivisions, made on the criterion of each of them being further characterized by the properties उदात्त, अनुदIत्त and स्वरित and निरनुनासिक and सानुनासिक. (2) The word स्वर also means accent, a property possessed exclusively by vowels and not by consonants, as they are entirely dependent on vowels and can at the most be said to possess the same accent as the vowel with which they are uttered together. The accents are mentioned to be three; the acute ( उदात्त ), the grave अनुदात्त and the circumflex (स्वरित) defined respectively as उच्चैरुदात्तः, नीचैरनुदात्तः and समाहारः स्वरितः by Panini (P. I. 2.29, 30,3l). The point whether समाहार means a combination or coming together one after another of the two, or a commixture or blending of the two is critically discussed in the Mahabhasya. (vide Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31). There are however two kinds of svarita mentioned by Panini and found actually in use : (a) the independent स्वरित as possessed by the word स्वर् (from which possibly the word स्वरित was formed) and a few other words as also many times by the resultant vowel out of two vowels ( उदात्त and अनुदात्त ) combined, and (b) the enclitic or secondary svarita by which name, one or more grave vowels occurring after the udatta, in a chain, are called cf P. VIII. 2.4 VIII. 2.6 and VIII 4.66 and 67. The topic of accents is fully discussed by the authors of the Pratisakhyas as also by Panini. For details, see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 1.19; T.Pr. 38-47 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 108 to 132, II. I.65 Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. Adhyaya l padas 1, 2, 3 and Rk. Tantra 51-66; see also Kaiyata on P. I. 2.29; (3) The word स्वर is used also in the sense of a musical tone. This meaning arose out of the second meaning ' accent ' which itself arose from the first viz. 'vowel', and it is fully discussed in works explanatory of the chanting of Samas. Patanjali has given Seven subdivisions of accents which may be at the origin of the seven musical notes. See सप्तस्वर a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
svaravivṛtti( 1 )the same as स्वरविराम which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; ( 2 ) a short treatise on Vedic accents written by a modern Vedic scholar and grammrian named Indradattopadhyaya.
svarasaṃdhieuphonic combination of two vowels, a detailed description of which . forms a small topic in the Prtisakhya and grammar works; wide Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) chapters II. 1-26; T Pr. chapters 9 and 10 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III and अच्सन्धिप्रकणम् in the Siddhantakaumudi.
svābhāvyainherence; natural capacity; the word is used many times in connection with the power of denotation: confer, compare शब्दशक्तिस्वाभाव्यात् | Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P. III.1. 112 or अभिधानशक्तिस्वाभाव्यात् Nyasa on P. IV. 4.60. स्वार a term used in the PratiSakhya works for स्वरित or the circumflex accent: स्वारः स्वरितः ( Com. on T.Pr. XVII.6: confer, compare also T.Pr.XX.20; XXIII.24. There are seven varieties of स्वार given in thc Pratisakhya works, viz. क्षैप्र, नित्य, प्रातिहत, अभिनिहत, प्रश्लिष्ट, पादवृत्त and तैरोव्यञ्जन, cf Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XX.1-7.
the last of the spirant consonants, | which is a glottal, voiced letter called also ऊष्म or spirant of a partial contact, i. e. possessed of the properties कण्ठय, नादानुप्रदान, ऊष्म and ईषत्स्पृष्टत्व. This letter has been given twice in the Paninian alphabet, viz. the Mahesvara Sutras, and the Bhasyakara has given the purpose of it, viz. the technical utility of being included among soft consonants along with semi-vowels, nasals and the fifth, the fourth, and the third class-consonants (हश् अश् et cetera, and others),as also among the hard consonants along with the fourth and the third class-letters and spirants ( झ्लू, ). The second letter हू in हल् appears, however, to have only a technical utility,as the purpose of its place there among spirants is served by the jihvamuliya and the Upadhmaniya letters which are,in fact, the velar and the labial spirants respectively, besides the other three शू, षू and सू .The Rk Pratisakhya calls ह as a chest sound. For details, see Mahabhasya on the Siva Sutra हयवरट् Varttikas 1, 2 and 3.
hṛradattaname of a reputed grammarian of Southern India who wrote a very learned and scholarly commentary, named पदमञ्जरी, on the Kasikavrtti which is held by grammarians as the standard vrtti or gloss on the Sutras of Panini,and studied especially in the schools of the southern grammarians. Haradatta was a Dravida Brahmana, residing in a village on the Bank of Kaveri. His scholarship in Grammar was very sound and he is believed to have commented on many grammarworks.The only fault of the scholar was a very keen sense of egotism which is found in his work, although it can certainly be said that the egotism was not ill-placed and could be justified: confer, compare एवं प्रकटितोस्माभिर्भाष्ये परिचय: पर:। तस्य निःशेषतो मन्ये प्रतिपत्तापि दुर्लभः॥ also प्रक्रियातर्कगहने प्रविष्टो हृष्टमानसः हरदत्तहरिः स्वैरं विहरन् ! केन वार्यते | Padamajari, on P. I-13, 4. The credit of popularising Panini's system of grammar in Southern India goes to Haradatta to a considerable extent.
harikṛṣṇaa scholar of grammar who wrote a short treatise on the nature and function of prepositions named उपसर्गवाद.
haribhāskara( अग्निहोत्री )a grammarian of the Deccan who lived in the seventeenth century at Nasik and wrote commentaries on grammarworks out of which his treatise on Paribhasas ( परिभाषाभास्कर ) written independently but based upon Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti, deserves a special notice and mention.
hi(1)personal-ending of the second person. singular. substituted for सि in the imperative mood; confer, compare सेर्ह्यपिच्च P. III. 4.87; (2) a sign-word used in the Vajasaneyi-pratisakhya to mark the termination of the words of the Adhikarasutra V. Pr.III.5, IV.11.
hemacandraa Jain sage and scholar of remarkable erudition in the religious works of the Jainas as also in several Shastras. He was a resident of Dhandhuka in Gujarat, who, like Sankarācārya took संन्यासदीक्षा at a very early age and wrote a very large number of original books and commentaries, the total number of which may well nigh exceed fifty, during his long life of eighty-four years ( 1088 to ll 2 ). He stayed at AnhilavalaPattana in the North Gujarat and was patronised with extreme reverence by King Kumarapala who in fact, became his devoted pupil. Besides the well-known works on the various Shastras like Kavyanusasana, Abhidhanacintamani, Desinamamla, Yogasastra, Dvyasrayakavya, Trisastisalakapurusacarita and others which are well-known, he wrote a big work on grammar called सिद्धहेमचन्द्र by him,but popularly known by the name हेमव्याकरण or हैमशब्दानुशासन The , work consists of eight books or Adhyayas, out of which the eighth book is devoted to prakrit Grammar, and can be styled as a Grammar of all the Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit Grammar of seven chapters is based practically upon Panini's Astadhyayi, the rules or sutras referring to Vedic words or Vedic affixes or accents being entirely omittedThe wording of the Sutras is much similar to that of Panini; at some places it is even identical. The order of the treatment of the subjects in the सिद्धहैम. शब्दानुशासनमृत्र is not, however, similar to that obtaining in the Astadhyayi of Panini. It is somewhat topicwise as in the Katantra Vyakarana. The first Adhyaya and a quarter of the second are devoted to Samjna, Paribhasa and declension; the second pada of the second Adhyaya is devoted to karaka, while the third pada of it is devoted to cerebralization and the fourth to the Stripratyayas.The first two Padas of the third Adhyaya are devoted to Samasas or compound words, while the last two Padas of the third Adhyaya and the fourth Adhyaya are devoted to conjugation The fifth Adhyaya is devoted to verbal derivatives or krdanta, while the sixth and the seventh Adhyayas are devoted to formations of nouns from nouns, or taddhita words. On this Sabda nusasana, which is just like Panini's Astadhyayi, the eighth adhyaya of Hemacandra being devoted to the grammar of the Arsa language similar to Vedic grammar of Panini, Hemacandra has himself written two glosses which are named लधुवृति and वृहृदवृत्ति and the famous commentary known as the Brhannyasa. Besides these works viz the हैमशब्दानुशासन, the two Vrttis on it and the Brhannyasa, he has given an appendix viz the Lingnusasana. The Grammar of Hemacandra, in short, introduced a new system of grammar different from, yet similar to, that of Panini, which by his followers was made completely similar to the Paniniya system by writing works similar to the Siddhantakaumudi, the Dhatuvrtti, the Manorama and the Paribhasendusekhara. हेमहंसगणि a grammarian belonging to the school of Hemacandra, who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a work on Paribhasas named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he himself wrote a commentary called न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one called by the name न्यास.
haimāliṅgānuśāsanaa treatise on genders written by हेमचन्द्र, See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimavyākaraṇaa treatise on grammar written by हेमचन्द्र, called by the name हेमशब्दानुशासन. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimaśābdānuśāsanaa treatise on grammar written by Hemacandra. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
Vedabase Search
Results for tis41 results
tisraḥ the threeSB 2.10.41
tisraḥ the three (nakṣatras)SB 7.14.20-23
tisraḥ threeSB 10.80.16-17
SB 10.90.41
SB 11.29.41-44
SB 4.1.1
SB 7.10.54-55
SB 9.20.34
tisraḥ three in numberSB 3.12.56
tisṛbhiḥ threeSB 10.66.12-14
tisṛbhiḥ times threeSB 10.50.44
tisṛbhiḥ ca api plus threeSB 10.50.4
tisṛbhiḥ ca api plus threeSB 10.50.4
tisṛbhiḥ ca api plus threeSB 10.50.4
tisṛṣu on threeSB 7.14.20-23
gatīnām tisṛṇām of the three destinations (the heavenly planets, the earthly planets and hell)SB 6.9.32
pratisamīkṣaṇa and by constantly being watched by HerSB 8.12.22
pratisamīkṣate continues to functionSB 3.28.38
pratisamīkṣate goes on living and waitingSB 11.13.37
pratisaṃruddha-vikramaḥ suspending all power of manifestationSB 3.11.28
pratisaṃyuyudhuḥ they counterattacked the demonsSB 8.10.4
pratisandadhe reestablishedSB 1.17.42
pratisandhita executedSB 5.1.22
pratisañjihīrṣuḥ desiring to dissolveSB 3.32.9
pratisańkramaḥ ultimate destructionSB 2.8.21
pratisańkramaḥ dissolutionsSB 3.7.37
pratisańkramaḥ annihilationSB 3.10.14
pratisańkramaḥ the annihilationSB 11.16.35
pratisańkrāmayat coiling downSB 4.24.50
pratisańkrāme in the annihilationSB 11.19.16
pratisańkrameta can overcomeSB 3.9.9
pratisarantu may followSB 5.2.16
pratisargaḥ cause of devastationSB 4.8.5
pratispardhete just resemblingSB 10.12.21
pratisrotaḥ which was flowing in the opposite directionSB 9.15.21
pratisvanān the sound of their echoesSB 10.12.7-11
pratisvanayatā which echoedSB 3.13.24
puraḥ tisraḥ the three residences of the demonsSB 7.10.69
puraḥ tisraḥ the three residences of the demonsSB 7.10.69
gatīnām tisṛṇām of the three destinations (the heavenly planets, the earthly planets and hell)SB 6.9.32
pratisaṃruddha-vikramaḥ suspending all power of manifestationSB 3.11.28
Results for tis232 results
tisraiṣaṇīya noun (masculine) name of CS, Sū. 11
Frequency rank 24112/72933
tis noun (feminine) [gramm.] the word tri
Frequency rank 35410/72933
atisakta adjective
Frequency rank 31586/72933
atisakti noun (feminine) excessive attachment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31587/72933
atisaṅga noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 42251/72933
atisattvavant adjective
Frequency rank 42252/72933
atisanna adjective
Frequency rank 42253/72933
atisamañjasa adjective
Frequency rank 26193/72933
atisamasta adjective
Frequency rank 42254/72933
atisampanna adjective
Frequency rank 42255/72933
atisaraṇa noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 22877/72933
atisarga noun (masculine) act of parting with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
dismissal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
giving away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
granting permission (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
leave (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 20481/72933
atisarjana noun (neuter) a gift (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
granting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
killing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
liberality (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sending out of the world (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the act of giving away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 42256/72933
atisarpay verb (class 10 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 42257/72933
atisaha adjective
Frequency rank 42258/72933
atisaṃgata adjective
Frequency rank 42259/72933
atisaṃcaya noun (masculine) excessive accumulation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 26194/72933
atisaṃtarpaṇa adjective
Frequency rank 42260/72933
atisaṃdhā verb (class 3 ātmanepada) to deceive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to overreach (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to wrong or injure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 16373/72933
atisaṃdhāna noun (neuter) cheating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
overreaching (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31588/72933
atisaṃnikarṣa noun (masculine) extreme nearness
Frequency rank 26195/72933
atisaṃnidhāna noun (neuter) proximity
Frequency rank 42261/72933
atisaṃrudh verb (class 7 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 42262/72933
atisaṃvṛta adjective
Frequency rank 42263/72933
atisaṃvṛdh verb (class 1 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 42264/72933
atisaṃsarga noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 31589/72933
atisaṃsparśa noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 42265/72933
atisaṃharṣa noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 42266/72933
atisāttvika adjective
Frequency rank 31590/72933
atisāndra adjective
Frequency rank 31591/72933
atisāmīpya noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 42267/72933
atisāra noun (masculine) dysentery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a son of Nitantu purging (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2459/72933
atisārin adjective afflicted with purging or dysentery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 8543/72933
atisāraka noun (masculine neuter) [medic.] atisāra
Frequency rank 26196/72933
atisāraghnī noun (feminine) Aconitum ferox
Frequency rank 42268/72933
atisāranidāna noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.157
Frequency rank 42269/72933
atisāray verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to cause to pass through (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 9098/72933
atisāṃtapana noun (neuter) [rel.] a kind of penance
Frequency rank 42270/72933
atisāṃvatsara adjective extending over more than a year (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31592/72933
atisiddhi noun (feminine) great perfection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 42271/72933
atisṛj verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to abandon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to create in a higher degree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to forgive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to give away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to glide over or along (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to leave as a remnant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to present (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to remit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to send away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 14622/72933
atisev verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to practise excessively (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to use or enjoy immoderately (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 11885/72933
atisevā noun (feminine) excessive addiction (to a habit) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 42272/72933
atisevana noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 22878/72933
atisaukṣmya noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 31593/72933
atisaurabha noun (masculine) the mango tree
Frequency rank 31594/72933
atisauhitya noun (neuter) excessive satiety (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31595/72933
atistuti noun (feminine) excessive praise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 42273/72933
atistrīkāmatā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 42274/72933
atisthaulya noun (neuter) extreme body volume
Frequency rank 20482/72933
atisthūla adjective excessively big or clumsy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
excessively stupid (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 11502/72933
atisnigdhatara adjective
Frequency rank 42275/72933
atisnih verb (class 4 parasmaipada) [medic.] to treat excessively with snehana
Frequency rank 15390/72933
atisneha noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 15391/72933
atisnehay verb (class 10 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 42276/72933
atisrava noun (masculine) excessive discharge
Frequency rank 22879/72933
atisru verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to flow over or flow excessively (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 22880/72933
atisruti noun (feminine) [medic.] excessive bloodletting
Frequency rank 22881/72933
atisvaccha adjective
Frequency rank 31596/72933
atisvapna noun (masculine) excessive sleep (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31597/72933
atisvar verb (class 1 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 42277/72933
atisvinna adjective
Frequency rank 42278/72933
atisveda noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 26197/72933
anatisaṃkṣepa noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 20514/72933
anatisṛṣṭa adjective
Frequency rank 31715/72933
anatisthūla adjective not very massive
Frequency rank 42606/72933
anatisnigdha adjective
Frequency rank 42607/72933
anatisneha noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 31716/72933
anutpattisama noun (masculine) [logic]
Frequency rank 43119/72933
antisūtra noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 43472/72933
apratisambaddha adjective unconnected
Frequency rank 26481/72933
apratisaṃkrama adjective having no intermixture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 43898/72933
apratisaṃkhyā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 43899/72933
apratisaṃcara noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 43900/72933
apratisaṃdheya adjective
Frequency rank 43901/72933
apratisaṃvedana noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 43902/72933
apratisaṃhṛta adjective
Frequency rank 43903/72933
apratisāra noun (masculine) [medic.] name of a medical preparation
Frequency rank 43904/72933
apratisiddha adjective allowed recommended
Frequency rank 32210/72933
avantisundarī noun (feminine) name of a woman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13996/72933
avantisundarīpariṇaya noun (masculine) name of Daśakumāracarita 1.5
Frequency rank 45162/72933
avantisoma noun (masculine) sour gruel (prepared from the fermentation of rice-water) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23218/72933
ātisārika adjective [medic.] used during atisāra
Frequency rank 46318/72933
āmātisārin adjective afflicted with the above disease (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 46534/72933
āmātisāra noun (masculine) dysentery or diarrhoea produced by vitiated mucus in the abdomen (the excretion being mixed with hard and fetid matter) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23382/72933
uttarabastisiddhi noun (feminine) name of Carakasaṃhitā, Si. 12
Frequency rank 47154/72933
upapattisama noun (masculine) (in log.) a kind of contradiction in which both the contradicting assertions are supposed to be demonstrable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47546/72933
ekajyotis noun (masculine) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 33638/72933
kīrtisāra noun (masculine) name of a man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 49524/72933
kṣitisuta noun (masculine) name of the demon Naraka (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the planet Mars (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 50563/72933
khajyotis noun (masculine) a shining flying insect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
fire-fly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 50793/72933
cittaviśrāntisthāna noun (neuter) ein Punkt im Körper
Frequency rank 52286/72933
tisasya noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 52893/72933
tisāra noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 52894/72933
tisūtrīya noun (masculine) name of Carakasaṃhitā, Śār. 8
Frequency rank 35168/72933
tismara adjective recollecting a former existence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13517/72933
jyotis noun (neuter) jyotiṣa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a metre of 32 short and 16 long syllables (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a mystical name for the letter r (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
brightness (of the sky) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
celestial world (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
eye-light (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
fire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
flash of lightning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
light (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
light as the divine principle of life or source of intelligence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
light as the type of freedom or bliss or victory (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
moonlight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of certain formularies containing the word jyotis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of several Ekāhas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
planets and stars (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
science of the movements of the heavenly bodies (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sun and moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the eye (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the heavenly bodies (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the light of heaven (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 1031/72933
tṛṇajyotis noun (neuter) name of a shining grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 21395/72933
ditisuta noun (masculine) a Daitya (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19432/72933
dinajyotis noun (neuter) daylight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sunshine (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 54420/72933
drumajyotis noun (neuter) a kind of plant
Frequency rank 55146/72933
nīlajyotis noun (neuter) a kind of divyauṣadhi (Ray, Rasārṇava)
Frequency rank 24450/72933
prakṛtistha adjective bare (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
being in the original or natural state (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
genuine (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
healthy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
incidental to nature (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
inherent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
innate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
normal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
stripped of everything (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
unaltered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
unimpaired (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
well (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37099/72933
pratisatkṛ verb (class 8 ātmanepada) to greet back
Frequency rank 37215/72933
pratisattvam indeclinable img/alchemy.bmp
Frequency rank 37216/72933
pratisadṛś adjective similar (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58966/72933
pratisamas verb (class 4 parasmaipada) to put back again to its place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58967/72933
pratisamādiś verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to answer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to command (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to order (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to reply (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15054/72933
pratisamādhā verb (class 3 parasmaipada) to correct (an error) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to put back again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to re-arrange (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to redress (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to replace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to restore (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24717/72933
pratisamānī verb (class 1 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58968/72933
pratisamās verb (class 2 parasmaipada) to be a match for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to cope with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to resist (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19673/72933
pratisamāsana noun (neuter) resisting (with gen.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the being a match for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
with standing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37217/72933
pratisamīkṣ verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to hold out (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to persevere (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37218/72933
pratisambandhi indeclinable according to the respective connection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58969/72933
pratisambhāṣaṇa noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 58970/72933
pratisara noun (masculine) a bracelet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a cord or ribbon used as an amulet worn round the neck or wrist at nuptials etc. (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a line returning into itself. circle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a servant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a wreath (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
assailing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
day-break (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
dressing a wound (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the rear of an army (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 29179/72933
pratisaraṇa noun (neuter) leaning or resting on (comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
streaming back (of rivers) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37219/72933
pratisarga noun (masculine) destruction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
dissolution (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
secondary or continued creation out of primitive matter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the portion of a Purāṇa which treats of the destruction and renovation of the world (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 9213/72933
pratisargavarṇana noun (neuter) name of Agnipurāṇa, 19
Frequency rank 58971/72933
pratisargika adjective
Frequency rank 58972/72933
pratisarpin adjective
Frequency rank 58973/72933
pratisah verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to be a match for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to overcome (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58974/72933
pratisaṃkāśa noun (masculine) a similar appearance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
resemblance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58975/72933
pratisaṃkuñc verb (class 6 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 58976/72933
pratisaṃkram verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to come to an end (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to go back again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37220/72933
pratisaṃkrama noun (masculine) dissolution (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
impression (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
re-absorption (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24718/72933
pratisaṃkrāma noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 58977/72933
pratisaṃkhyā noun (feminine) consciousness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58978/72933
pratisaṃkhyā verb (class 2 parasmaipada) to count or reckon up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to number (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58979/72933
pratisaṃgrah verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to find (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to meet with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 21817/72933
pratisaṃcar verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to come together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to meet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58980/72933
pratisaṃcara noun (masculine) a place of resort (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
going or moving backwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
haunt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
re-absorption or resolution (back again into Prakṛti) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
that into which anything is re-absorbed or resolved (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15916/72933
pratisaṃcaraṇa noun (masculine neuter) Back movement (opposite of Prasarana)
Frequency rank 29180/72933
pratisaṃchad verb (class 1 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 58981/72933
pratisaṃchāday verb (class 10 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58982/72933
pratisaṃjan verb (class 4 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58983/72933
pratisaṃjihīrṣu adjective wishing to withdraw or to be freed from (abl.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58984/72933
pratisaṃdiś verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to command (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to give a person (acc. or haste with gen.) a message or commission in return (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to order (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to send back a message to (gen.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 29181/72933
pratisaṃdeśa noun (masculine) a message in return (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
answer to a message (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58985/72933
pratisaṃdhi noun (masculine) adverseness (of fate) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
re-birth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
re-entry into (comp.) or into the womb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
resistance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
reunion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the period of transition between two ages (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24719/72933
pratisaṃdhā verb (class 3 parasmaipada) to adjust (an arrow) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to comprehend (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to put on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to put together again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to re-arrange (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to recollect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to remember (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to reply (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to return (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to understand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 18190/72933
pratisaṃdhātṛ noun (masculine) one who recollects or remembers (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24720/72933
pratisaṃdhāna noun (neuter) a juncture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a remedy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
joining together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
memory (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
panegyric (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
praise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
putting together again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
recollection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
self-command (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
suppression of feeling for a time (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the period of transition between two ages (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15055/72933
pratisaṃnivṛt verb (class 1 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58986/72933
pratisaṃbudh verb (class 4 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58987/72933
pratisaṃmiśray verb (denominative parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 58988/72933
pratisaṃyat verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to be prepared completely to fight against (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58989/72933
pratisaṃyuj verb (class 7 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58990/72933
pratisaṃyuta adjective connected with endowed with
Frequency rank 58991/72933
pratisaṃrabh verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to become angry against to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to take hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 21818/72933
pratisaṃrudh verb (class 7 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58992/72933
pratisaṃvatsaram indeclinable at every year (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
yearly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 18191/72933
pratisaṃvāray verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to keep back
Frequency rank 58993/72933
pratisaṃviś verb (class 6 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58994/72933
pratisaṃvedin adjective being conscious of anything (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
experiencing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
feeling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24721/72933
pratisaṃvedana noun (neuter) enjoyment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
experiment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58995/72933
pratisaṃveṣṭ verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to contract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to shrink up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58996/72933
pratisaṃsarga noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 29182/72933
pratisaṃsah verb (class 1 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 58997/72933
pratisaṃsṛj verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to mingle with (instr.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13071/72933
pratisaṃskartṛ adjective a reviser
Frequency rank 19674/72933
pratisaṃskartṛsūtra noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 17009/72933
pratisaṃskartṛsūtratā noun (feminine) the state of a Pratisaṃskartṛsūtra
Frequency rank 58998/72933
pratisaṃskāra noun (masculine) restoration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37221/72933
pratisaṃskṛ verb (class 8 parasmaipada) to repair (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to restore (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10149/72933
pratisaṃstambh verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to encourage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to strengthen (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58999/72933
pratisaṃhan verb (class 2 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 37222/72933
pratisaṃhāra noun (masculine) abstention from (abl.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
comprehension (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
compression (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
diminution (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
drawing in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
giving up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
keeping away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
resigning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
withdrawing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19675/72933
pratisaṃhāray verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to retract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59000/72933
pratisaṃhṛ verb (class 2 parasmaipada) to absorb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to annihilate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to change (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to check (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to contract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to destroy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to draw or keep back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to draw together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to put off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to repress (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to take away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to withdraw (as a weapon) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 12570/72933
pratisaṃhṛṣ verb (class 4 parasmaipada) to be glad (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to rejoice again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37223/72933
pratisādhay verb (class 10 ātmanepada) to treat (a disease)
Frequency rank 59001/72933
pratisārin adjective going round or from one to the other (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59002/72933
pratisāraṇa noun (masculine feminine neuter) Betupfen dressing and anointing the edges of a wound (or an instrument for doing so) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a particular process to which minerals (esp. quicksilver) are subjected (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[medic.] a method of cauterisation
Frequency rank 6246/72933
pratisāraṇaka noun (neuter) img/alchemy.bmp
Frequency rank 59003/72933
pratisāray verb (class 10 parasmaipada) betupfen to apply externally (a medicine) (G.J. Meulenbeld (0), 206) to put asunder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to put back again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to restore to its place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to separate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to sever (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to spread over (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to tip or touch with (instr.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
img/alchemy.bmp
Frequency rank 4687/72933
pratisiddhi noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 59004/72933
pratis verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to assail (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to attack (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to go against (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to go home (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to go round or from place to place (not only on the main road) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to return (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to rush upon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59005/72933
pratisṛj verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to despatch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to hurl or utter in reply (a curse) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to send away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37224/72933
pratisṛp verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to creep back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to creep into (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to enter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37225/72933
pratisev verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to be kind towards (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to follow (pleasure) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to honour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to pursue (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to serve (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59006/72933
pratisomā noun (feminine) a kind of plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37226/72933
pratiskandha noun (masculine) every shoulder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of an attendant of Skanda (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59007/72933
pratistambh verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to hinder to lean or press (Ā. "one's self") against (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to obstruct
Frequency rank 21819/72933
pratistambha noun (masculine) a kind of pillar
Frequency rank 59008/72933
pratisnāva adjective
Frequency rank 37227/72933
pratispardhin adjective a rival (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
coping with (gen.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
emulous (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
like (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
resembling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24722/72933
pratismāray verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to remind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59009/72933
pratismṛ verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to recollect (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to remember (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37228/72933
pratismṛti noun (feminine) name of a particular kind of magic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59010/72933
pratisrotas indeclinable against the stream (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
up the stream (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15056/72933
pratisūrya noun (masculine) a chameleon (which lies or basks in the sun) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of lizard (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a mock sun (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
parhelion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59011/72933
pratisūryaka noun (masculine) a kind of venomous insect (kīṭa)
Frequency rank 37229/72933
pratisūryam indeclinable towards the sun
Frequency rank 59012/72933
pratisvan verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to resound (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37230/72933
pratisvana noun (masculine) echo (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
reverberation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 37231/72933
pratisvanay verb (class 10 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 59013/72933
pratisvam indeclinable singly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59014/72933
pravṛttamātrajyotis noun (masculine) a kind of Yogin
Frequency rank 59436/72933
prātisīma noun (masculine) a neighbour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59642/72933
prātisvika adjective granting to every one his own due (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
not common to others (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
own (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59643/72933
prītisaṃrakṣaṇī noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 59728/72933
barhirjyotis noun (masculine) fire or the god of fire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 60018/72933
bṛhajjyotis noun (masculine) name of a grandson of Brahmā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[rel.] name of Śiva
Frequency rank 37689/72933
bṛhaspatiproktanītisāranirūpaṇa noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.108
Frequency rank 60368/72933
bṛhaspatisava noun (masculine) name of a festival lasting one day (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 60369/72933
brahmajyotis noun (masculine) name of an alchemist
Frequency rank 24865/72933
mahājyotis noun (masculine) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[rel.] name of Brahmā
Frequency rank 38116/72933
meghajyotis noun (neuter) a flash of lightning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
lightning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 62528/72933
mūrdhajyotis noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 62713/72933
viśvajyotis noun (masculine) name of a man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of an Ekāha (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 66139/72933
viṣvagjyotis noun (masculine) name of the eldest of the 100 sons of Śatajit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 66272/72933
vṛttistha noun (masculine) a lizard (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
chameleon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 66441/72933
vyatisami verb (class 2 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 66814/72933
vyatisaṃdah verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to burn up entirely
Frequency rank 66815/72933
vyatisev verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to be well furnished or provided with (instr.)
Frequency rank 66816/72933
śaktisena noun (masculine) name of a son of Nighna (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67080/72933
śāntisūkta noun (neuter) name of a hymn (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67448/72933
śitisāraka noun (masculine) Diospyros Embryopteris (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67589/72933
śuktisaṃbhava noun (neuter) a pearl
Frequency rank 67822/72933
śuktisāhvayā noun (feminine) name of a city (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67823/72933
śuktisparśa noun (masculine) a dark spot or flaw on a pearl (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
anhaftende Kalkteile von der Muschelschale (Garbe, Richard (1974), 74)
Frequency rank 67824/72933
śaunakoktanītisārādivarṇana noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.115
Frequency rank 68080/72933
śrutisāgara noun (masculine) name of Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[rel.] name of Śiva
Frequency rank 68250/72933
śrutisphoṭā noun (feminine) Gynandropsis Pentaphylla (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 68251/72933
sajyotis indeclinable according to the light (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
as long as the sun is in the sky (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 40318/72933
sadyojyotis noun (masculine) name of an author
Frequency rank 30695/72933
samatisṛj verb (class 6 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 68888/72933
sahasrajyotis noun (masculine) name of a son of Subhrāj (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 40579/72933
saṃpratisthāpay verb (class 10 ātmanepada)
Frequency rank 69980/72933
smṛtisaṃkṛti noun (masculine) name of a Ṛṣi (?)
Frequency rank 71970/72933
svayaṃjyotis noun (feminine) [rel.] name of Devī
Frequency rank 72118/72933
 

abhiṣyanda

conjunctivitis, oozing and enlargement of eyes; 2. any item that increases kapha, that promotes thick secretions blocking the passages. Go to kaphaja abhiṣyanda.

adhijihvika

ranula or cystic swelling of connective tissue consisting of collected mucin from a ruptured salivary gland duct caused by local trauma.

adhimāṃsa

polyp; an abnormal growth of tissue projecting from a mucous membrane.

alasaka

1. tympanitis; 2. flatulence.

āmātisāra

dysentery or diarrhoea.

āmavāta

rheumatism, non-specific older term for medical conditions which affect connective tissue and the joints; arthritis caused by undigested stuff.

anumata

one of tantrayuktis, assent, approval.

apadeśa

one of tantrayuktis, statement of reason; specification; adducement of reason; a step in syllogism.

apavarga

one of tantrayuktis; exception.

apīnasa

dry nose and inability to recognise smell with a feeling of hot fumes; rhinitis.

āraṇyaka

forest-born; any of Sanskrit religious and philosophical treatises, post-Vedic in ori intended to interpret Vedic concepts.

arjaka

Plant clove basil, Ocimum gratissimum.

arśovartma

a form of trachoma; an infectious disease caused by the Chlamydia trachomatis, a micro-organism which produces a characteristic roughening of the inner surface of the eyelids. Al called granular conjunctivitis.

arthāpatti

one of tantrayuktis; presumption; inference from circumstances; disjunctive hypothetical syllogism; logical implication.

aśvini

1. a binary star Beta Arietis in Aries constellation; first of the 27 stars in celestial sphere; 2. name of a month.

atasi

Plant linseed, Linum usitatissimum.

atideśa

one of tantrayuktis, extended application; substitution; substantiating by future event

atidīrgha

gigantism; excess growth.

atisa

Go to ativiṣa

atisṛṣṭā

abnormally long respiration.

ativiṣa

Plant atis root; Aconitum heterophyllum.

avikrāntavīkṣaṇa

(avikrānta.vīkṣaṇa) retrospection; one of the tantrayuktis.

bahalavartma

multiple chalazion, cysts in eye caused by blocked glands; blepharitis.

bālagrahacikitsa

a treatise on paediatrics authored by Devendramuni in 13th Century , partly available now

bālātisāra

infantile diarrhoea.

bhālukitantra

a treatise on surgery, not survived, therefore not available.

bharaṇi

second star in the path of moon corresponding to 35, 39, and 41 Arietis in Aries constellation.

bhayātisāra

diarrhoea due to psychological stress.

bhūkadamba

Plant bishop’s weed, Ptychotis ajowan.

bhūśirīṣa

Plant black siris, Albizia odoratissima.

brāhmi

Plant water hyssop, thyme leaved gratiola, Bacopa monnieri syn. Herpestis monnieria. Indian pennywart. see Centella asiatica.

bṛhatyogataraṇgiṇi

a treatise of ayurveda written by Trimallabhaṭṭu, 18th Century

cidrodara

perforation of intestines; peritonitis.

danta

teeth, dantabhanjana loss of teeth, dantacala loose tooth, danta grāhi chilling of teeth due to cold beverages; dantakapālika tartar forming flakes; krimidanta dental caries, dantaharṣa morbid sensitiveness of teeth, intolerance to cold; dantamāmsas gums; dantanāḍi dental sinus; dantapuppuṭa gum boil, gingivitis; dantaśalāka toothpick, dantaśarkara tartar, dantaśaṭha bad for teeth ex: citrus; dantaśūla toothache, dantavaidarbha loose teeth due to injury; dantavardhana extra tooth; dantaveṣṭa pyorrhoea alveolaris, formation of pus in teeth.

dhanvantrivilāsa

a medical treatise authored by Tukkoji in Tanjavur (18th Century ).

dhātu

1. metal; 2. root words (linguistic elements) of Sanskrit language. 3. tissues – rasa (chyle, lymph, etc), rakta (blood), mamsa (muscle), medas (adipose tissue), asthi (cartilage and bone), majja (bone marrow), and śukra (reproductive elements).

drākṣa

Plant raisins, mature fruits of Vitis vinifera.

ekānta

one of tantrayuktis; certain; invariable; exclusiveness; absolute and definite statement.

gajaśāstra

a treatise on the diseases of elephants authored by Sripurusha in 8th Century AD; now this is not available.

gala

throat; galaganḍa goiter; enlargement of thyroid gland; galaśunḍika (kanṭaśunḍika) uvulitis (swelling of the uvula); galaśoṣa dryness in throat; galavidhradhi retropharyngeal abscess.

galauḍha

retropharyngeal abscess; chronic pharyngitis.

galaugha

tumour in throat; pharyngitis, laryngitis.

galāyu

tonsillitis.

gaṇḍamāla

inflammation of the glands in the neck; cervical lymphadenitis.

ganḍīra

Plant 1. root of Coleus forskohlii; a pot herb or a species of cucumber; 2. fox grape, Cayratis cornosa.

gardabhika

parotitis, inflammation of one or both parotid (salivary) glands.

gilāyu

benign growth in the throat, tonsillitis.

girikarṇika

Plant 1. a variety of prickly chaff flower whitish in colour. Achyranthes aspera. 2. blue pea, Clitoria ternatea; 3. wild guava, Careya arborea.

govidya

a treatise on treatment of cows, written by Kirtivarma in the 12th Century AD; the book is partly available.

granthiparṇi

Plant 1. smooth angelica, Angelica glauca; 2. knod grass; Leonotis nepetaefolia.

hārītasamhita

a treatise on ayurveda authored by Hārīta.

hastimeha

prostatitis, urine with lasīka.

hatādimantha

an eye disease, panophthalmitis; inflammation of all coats of the eye including intraocular structures; atrophic eye.

hetvartha

one of tantrayuktis; implication; extension of reasoning.

hiṅgvaṣṭakacūrna

powdered preparation used in the treatment of anorexia and tympanitis.

jālagardabha

lymphangitis; cellulitis. Inflammation of lymphatic vessels and channels.

jalodara

ascitis; dropsy; water-belly.

jihva

tongue; jihvakanṭaka glossitis (inflammation or infection of the tongue); jihvasthambha paralysis of the tongue.

jvarātisāra

fever with diarrhoea.

kāmalā

jaundice; hepatitis.

kāmasūtra

a treatise on sexual love authored by Vātsyāyana, apparently belonged to the period between 4th and 6th centuries during the Gupta empire.

kāmadudhāras

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

kanḍu

itching, pruritis.

kaṇṭha

neck, throat, kaṇṭhagataroga diseases of pharynx and larynx, kaṇṭhanāḍi trachea; kaṇṭhaśālūka adenoid or nasopharyngeal tonsil, kaṇṭhaśunḍi elongated uvula or uvulitis.

kaṇṭhaśunḍika

uvulitis or inflammation of uvula.

kaphajābhiṣyanda

vernal keratoconjunctivitis or spring catarrh: a recurrent, bilateral, and selflimiting inflammation of conjunctiva, having a periodic seasonal incidence.

karṇa

ear, karṇanāda tinnitus, karṇapāka otitis externa diffusa, karṇapippali cysts, polyps in the ear; karṇapūrana fill medicated oil in the ear, karṇarog ear disease, karṇaśodha edema; sūla earache, otalgia, karṇavedhi, karṇavyadha ear-boring.

kāsyapa

vṛddha Jīvaka, paediatrician and gynaecologist par excellence in āyurveda kāsyapatantra a treatise on peadiatrics.

ketaki,kaitaka

Plant screw pine, dried underground roots of Pandanus tectorius, P. fascicularis. P. odoratissimus.

klinnavartma

conjunctivitis, blepharitis.

kliṣṭavartma

allergic conjunctivitis.

kṣapana

destructive, diminishing, fasting; chastisement of the body.

kṣata

wound, kṣata udara peritonitis, acute abdomen.

kṣīradadhinyāya

mulk-curds hypothesis about the transformation of tissues.

kukūṇaka

ulcerative bhlepharitis, opthalmia neonatorum, eye disease in infants.

kuraṇḍa

orchitis, enlargement of testicles including inguinal hernia.

kuranṭaka

Plant yellow amaranth, Barleria longifolia, B. prionitis.

laghukarṇi

Plant bowstring hemp, Clematis triloba, mūrva.

mādhavanidāna

a treatise on pathology, also known as Ṛgviniscaya.

mahānārāyanataila

medicated oil to reduce muscular spasm and arthritis.

māṃsatana

cellulitis of throat.

matsya

fish. matsyakāya pisces person; an individual with traits similar to a fish: unsteadiness, idiotism, excess desire for water and quarrelsome.

meda,medas

fat, adipose tissue.

medovahasrotas

adipose tissue system.

mucuṭīyantra

forceps like instrument used in surgery to pull tissue.

mukha

mouth, oral, mukhapāka stomatitis, mukhasrāva excess salivary secretion, mukhavairasya distaste or loss of taste.

mūrva

Plant bowstring hemp, a controversial plant. several plants like Marsdenia tenacissima, M. volubilis; elephant creeper or Argyreia nervosa; Clematis triloba, Maerua arenaria, Bauhinia vahlii; Chenomorpha fragrans are considered as mūrva.

mūtrakasāda

nephritis.

nābhi

umbilicus, navel, nābhipāka omphalitis, inflammation of the umbilicus.

navanīta

a treatise on āyurveda (4th Century ) discovered by colonel Bower, a British military officer, therefore named Bower’s manuscript; also known as Yaśomitrasamhita.

netrabhiṣyanda

infective conjuctivitis

netrasrāva

chronic dacrocystitis, epiphora or overflow of tears onto the face.

nidarśana

example, one of tantrayuktis; simili.

nigrāha

chastisement; subjugation.

nirdeśa

one of tantrayuktis, declaration, statement in detail, certainty, elaboration.

nirvacana

etymological derivation, one of tantrayuktis, etymology, definition.

niyoga

one of tantrayuktis, injunction, mandate.

padārtha

1. matter, stuff, substance, material object, category; 2. proper implied meaning of the word, one of tantrayuktis.

pakvātisāra

chronic diarrhoea.

pālakāpya

author of Hastyāyurveda, a treatise on diseases of elephants.

pandara

gangrenous stomatitis.

pānḍurāsrigdhara

whitish discharge from vagina, leucorrhoea.

parāśara

one of the six desciples of Ātreya, authored a treatise not available now; specialized in pancakarma.

pārijāta

Plant 1. night-flowering coral jasmine, Nyctanthes arbortristis; 2. Indian coral tree, Erythrina indica; 3. fragrance.

parvatakatantra

a treatise on peadiatrics.

pāṣāṇagardabha

mumps; parotitis; hard swelling on maxillary joint.

pauṣkalāvata

one of the six disciples of Dhanvantari; fragments of the his treatise were recovered.

pīnasa

chronic rhinitis, sinusitis, coryza.

pittātisāra

diarrhea due to pitta.

pothaki

trachoma; an infectious disease caused by the bacteria Chlamydia trachoma, which produces a characteristic roughening of the inner surface of the eyelids. Also called granular conjunctivitis.

pradeśa

1. region, country, 2. one of tantrayuktis, determination of a statement to be made; substantiating by similar past event.

prasanga

one of tantrayuktis, connected argument, context; conclusion by repetition.

pratisāraṇa

dressing and anointing the edges of a wound

pratisyāya

coryza, common cold, catarrh.

prīṇana

satisfying, moisturizing, a function of rasadhātu

pūrvapakṣa

one of tantrayuktis, objection to an assertion in discussion; question; prima facie view.

puṣkalāvata

author of a treatise on surgery.

pūtikarṇa

chronic suppurative otitis media; a disease of the middle ear.

pūtinasya

bad smell from nose; ozena or atrophic rhinitis, in which the bony ridges and mucous membrane of the nose waste away.

pūyālasa

an eye disease with pus and foul smelling, lacrimal abscess, acute dacrocystitis.

rajata

silver, whitish.

rakasa

a kind of skin disease, dermatitis.

rasakaumudi

a treatise on medicinal alchemy by Jnana Chandra.

rasendrakalpadruma

a treatise on medicinal alchemy by Ramakrishna Bhatta.

ṛgviniscaya

a treatise on pathology written by Mādhavakara (8th Century ), probably belongs to Bengal region. This is also known as Mādhavanidāna.

rūmimastagi

Plant mastic, Pistacia lentiscus

sahācara

Plant Barleria prionitis, B. cristata

saireyaka

Plant crested Philippine violet flower, blue barleria, Barleria cristata, B. prionitis, B. involucrata.

śalāka

science related to dentistry, ear, nose, throat, eye and other diseases of the organs of the supraclavicular region, śalākayantra rodlike forceps

samhita

treatise, compilation, compendium.

samśaya

one of tantrayuktis, doubtful statements.

samuccaya

one of tantrayuktis, aggregation, assemblage.

sandhivāta

osteoarthritis.

śankhavaṭi

ayurvedic medicine used in gastritis.

santoṣa

contentment, cultivation of satisfaction, happyness.

śarīrasthāna

chapter on embodied person; part of ayurveda treatises dealing with human body and its physical and psychological disposition.

śataṣloki

poetic treatise on āyurveda by a Telugu scholar in Tanjavur.

savraṇasukla

corneal ulcer, ulcerative keratitis.

śikatāvartma

granular conjunctivitis.

śimbi

Dolichos lablab; beans; Mucuna pruritis; Phaseolus trilobus; wild gram.

simhanādaguggulu

herbo-mineral preparation used in arthritis diseases.

sira

duct, blood vessel, vein, nerve; sirapidika episcleritis, sirapratāna prominent and reticulated veins.

śirotpāta

allergic conjunctivitis.

śītāda

scorbutic gingivitis; spongy gums; scurvy; an early stage of periodontal disease.

smṛtisāgararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in loss of memory.

sphoṭaka

boil, furuncle or deep folliculitis.

sṛsangna

one of tantrayuktis, a special term.

śulbasūtra

parts of ancient treatises of empirical mathematics.

sūryāvarta

headache that increases and decreases according to the course of sun; frontal sinusitis.

suśruta

disciple of Dhanvatari, who was the king of Kāśi. He authored Śuśruta samhita, an important treatise on surgery.

suśrutasamhita

foremost surgical treatise of ancient India, authored by Śuśruta and redacted by Nāgārjuna.

sūtaśekhararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

sūtrasthāna

first general section of ayurveda treatises containing principles of ayurveda.

svādutriphala

drākṣa (Vitis vinifera), kharjūra (Phoenix dactylfera), kāṣmarya (Gmelina arborea).

svaraghna

paralysis of larynx, pharyngitis.

śvetapradara

leucorrhoea, thick whitish or yellowish vaginal discharge.

śvetapradara

leucorrhoea, whitish discharge from vagina.

tālu

palate, tālukanṭaka inflammation of uvula, tālupāka palatitis or ulceration of palate, tālupuppuṭa indolent swelling on the palate; tāluśoṣa constitutional disease of cleft palate

tarunāsthi

cartilage bone, flexible connective tissue.

trika

sacral region; trikagraha arthritis of sacro-iliac region.

tunḍikeri

tonsillitis.

uddeṣya

one of tantrayuktis, enunciation, motive, stipulation, statement in brief.

umā

Plant flax, Linum usitatissimum.

upadeśa

one of tantrayuktis, instruction, elucidation, injunction.

upakuśa

1. ulcerative gingivitis; 2. pyorrhea or peridontitis.

upamāna

particle of comparison, simile, one of tantrayuktis, analogy, upamāna pramāṇa means of knowledge by testimony.

upapluta

whitish and yellowish discharge from vagina and painful, associated with swelling.

uṣnavāta

cystitis.

utphullaroga

swollen, wide open; peritonitis.

uttarapakṣa

one of tantrayuktis, reply, refutation, answer to first or objectionable argument.

vaidyarājavallabha

a treatise of āyurveda authored by Laxmanapandita in Hampi, Vijayanagara empire in 14th Century

vajradanti

Plant porcupine flower, Barleria prionitis.

vākyaśeṣa

one of tantrayuktis; context, part of the sentence ‘implied’; supplying the ellipsis.

vātagajānkuṣarasa

(vāta.gaja.ankusa.ras) herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis and muscular diseases.

vātakaṇṭaka,vātakandaka

sprain in the ankle, plantar fascitis, calcaneal spur.

vātakunḍalika

incoordination between bladder constriction and sphincter relaxation; cystitis.

vātarakta

gout and arthritis; a kind of arthritis that occurs when uric acid builds up in blood and causes joint inflammation.

vidāri

1. retropharyngeal abscess after bursting, 2. gangrenous stomatitis; 3. eruption in axilla or groin; 4. inflammatory oedema in the ear.

vidārika

lymphnode enlargement in groin and axilla, dermatitis of the external ear, otitis media.

vidhāna

arrangement, expediency, one of tantrayuktis; order of sequence.

vikalpa

one of tantrayuktis, alternative, variation, difference of perception.

viparyaya

one of tantrayuktis, reversion, contrary to, contrast, difference; assuming the opposite.

visūcika

cholera, gastro-enteritis.

vicarcika

eczema, dermatitis, inflammation of the skin.

vyākhyāna

commentary; one of tantrayuktis; description, elaboration.

yavāni

Plant bishop’s weed, dried fruit of Trachyspermum ammi syn. Carum copticum, Ptychotis ajowan.

yoga

1. union; 2. pharmaceutical preparation; 3. union of words, 4. one of tantrayuktis; 5. planetary combination.

yogarājaguggulu

herbomineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis.

yogaratnākara

a treatise of āyurveda authored by Nayanasekhara (17th Century ).

yonikanḍu

pruritis vulvae.

Wordnet Search
"tis" has 68 results.

tis

tārā, tārakā, tārikā, nakṣatram, ṛkṣam, uḍuḥ, dyotiḥ, udyat, jyotis, jyotiṣī, bhāsantaḥ, rātrijam, rātribham   

ākāśe dṛśyamanāḥ khagolīya-piṇḍāḥ ye rātrau sphuranti, tathā ca yeṣāṃ śobhā na kṣarati।

rātrau tārāyāḥ śobhā avarṇanīyā।

tis

kāmadevaḥ, kāmaḥ, madanaḥ, manmathaḥ, māraḥ, pradyumnaḥ, mīnaketanaḥ, kandarpaḥ, darpakaḥ, anaṅgaḥ, pañcaśaraḥ, smaraḥ, śambarāriḥ, manasijaḥ, kusumeṣuḥ, ananyajaḥ, ratināthaḥ, puṣpadhanvā, ratipatiḥ, makaradhvajaḥ, ātmabhūḥ, brahmasūḥ, viśvaketuḥ, kāmadaḥ, kāntaḥ, kāntimān, kāmagaḥ, kāmācāraḥ, kāmī, kāmukaḥ, kāmavarjanaḥ, rāmaḥ, ramaḥ, ramaṇaḥ, ratināthaḥ, ratipriyaḥ, rātrināthaḥ, ramākāntaḥ, ramamāṇaḥ, niśācaraḥ, nandakaḥ, nandanaḥ, nandī, nandayitā, ratisakhaḥ, mahādhanuḥ, bhrāmaṇaḥ, bhramaṇaḥ, bhramamāṇaḥ, bhrāntaḥ, bhrāmakaḥ, bhṛṅgaḥ, bhrāntacāraḥ, bhramāvahaḥ, mohanaḥ, mohakaḥ, mohaḥ, mātaṅgaḥ, bhṛṅganāyakaḥ, gāyanaḥ, gītijaḥ, nartakaḥ, khelakaḥ, unmattonmattakaḥ, vilāsaḥ, lobhavardhanaḥ, sundaraḥ, vilāsakodaṇḍaḥ   

kāmasya devatā।

kāmadevena śivasya krodhāgniḥ dṛṣṭaḥ।

tis

pralayaḥ, yugāntaḥ, kalpaḥ, kalpāntaḥ, layaḥ, pratisargaḥ, kṣayaḥ, prakṣayaḥ, saṃvartaḥ, saṃkṣayaḥ, vilayaḥ, pratsañcaraḥ   

hindūnāṃ jagadvilayasya avadhāraṇāviśeṣaḥ। yugānām antaḥ yatra yugānām anto vā yasmin jagad pralīyate।

jñānād ātyantikaḥ prokto yoginaḥ paramātmani pralayaḥ pratisargo'yaṃ kāla-cintāparair-dvajaiḥ।

tis

smṛtisthānam   

tad āgāraṃ yat kasyāpi mānavasya smṛtirūpeṇa nirmitam।

lālakilā iti durgaḥ ekaṃ smṛtisthānam asti।

tis

tamomaya, tāmasa, tāmasika, tamasvin, sāndhakāra, satimira, tamovṛta, tamobhūta, nirāloka, aprakāśa, hatajyotis   

andhakāreṇa yuktaḥ।

kṛṣṇasya janma bhādrapadamāsasya tamomayyāṃ rātrau abhavat।

tis

atisāraḥ, sāraṇaḥ, pravāhikā, virekaḥ   

bahudravamalaniḥsaraṇarogaḥ।

saḥ atisāreṇa pīḍitaḥ।

tis

sūkṣmatama, atisūkṣma   

yad atyantaṃ sūkṣmaṃ vartate।

jīvāṇu iti sūkṣmatamaḥ jīvaḥ।

tis

asuraḥ, daityaḥ, daiteyaḥ, danujaḥ, indrāriḥ, dānavaḥ, śukraśiṣyaḥ, ditisutaḥ, pūrvadevaḥ, suradviṭ, devaripuḥ, devāriḥ, kauṇapaḥ, kravyāt, kravyādaḥ, asrapaḥ, āśaraḥ, rātriñcaraḥ, rātricaraḥ, kavvūraḥ, nikaṣātmajaḥ, yātudhānaḥ, puṇyajanaḥ, nairṛtaḥ, yātuḥ, rakṣaḥ, sandhyābalaḥ, kṣapāṭaḥ, rajanīcaraḥ, kīlāpāḥ, nṛcakṣāḥ, naktañcaraḥ, palāśī, palāśaḥ, bhūtaḥ, nīlāmbaraḥ, kalmāṣaḥ, kaṭaprūḥ, agiraḥ, kīlālapaḥ, naradhiṣmaṇaḥ, khacaraḥ   

dharmagranthaiḥ varṇitāḥ te jīvāḥ ye dharmavirodhinaḥ kāryān akarot tathā ca devānāṃ ṛṣīṇāṃ ca śatravaḥ āsan।

purākāle asūrāṇāṃ bhayena dharmakārye kāṭhīnyam abhavat।

tis

yuktiyuktaḥ, yuktiyuktā, yuktiyuktam, ऱीtisaṃmataḥ, ऱीtisaṃmatā, ऱीtisaṃmatam   

yad tarkadvārā, lokavyavahāreṇa vā sammataḥ asti।

mohanaḥ guruṇā pṛṣṭānāṃ praśnānāṃ yuktiyuktam uttaraṃ dattvā sarvān vyasmāyayat। / dharmaśāstravirodhe tu yuktiyuktaḥ vidhiḥ smṛtaḥ।

tis

stutiḥ, praśaṃsā, praśastiḥ, anuṣṭutiḥ, abhiṣṭava, āloka, uktham, īḍā, upavarṇanam, upastavaḥ, gīrṇi, guṇaślāghā, gūrti, devanam, dhiṣaṇam, nāntram, pariṣṭuti, pariṣṭavanam, pāṇaḥ, prakhyātiḥ, pratiṣṭutiḥ, pratisaṃdhānam   

kimapi vastvoḥ athavā vyakteḥ guṇānāṃ praśaṃsāsūcikā ādarasūcikā vā uktiḥ।

sarvaiḥ gopālasya vīratāyāḥ stutiḥ kṛtā।

tis

pratispaśa, sūcin   

yat cārasambandhi।

mahyaṃ sūcinyaḥ kathāḥ rocante।

tis

gaṅgā, mandākinī, jāhnavī, puṇyā, alakanandā, viṣṇupadī, jahnutanayā, suranimnagā, bhāgīrathī, tripathagā, tistrotāḥ, bhīṣmasūḥ, arghyatīrtham, tīrtharījaḥ, tridaśadīrghikā, kumārasūḥ, saridvarā, siddhāpagā, svarāpagā, svargyāpagā, khāpagā, ṛṣikulyā, haimavratī, sarvāpī, haraśekharā, surāpagā, dharmadravī, sudhā, jahnukanyā, gāndinī, rudraśekharā, nandinī, sitasindhuḥ, adhvagā, ugraśekharā, siddhasindhuḥ, svargasarīdvarā, samudrasubhagā, svarnadī, suradīrghikā, suranadī, svardhunī, jyeṣṭhā, jahnusutā, bhīṣmajananī, śubhrā, śailendrajā, bhavāyanā, mahānadī, śailaputrī, sitā, bhuvanapāvanī, śailaputrī   

bhāratadeśasthāḥ pradhānā nadī yā hindudharmānusāreṇa mokṣadāyinī asti iti manyante।

dharmagranthāḥ kathayanti rājñā bhagīrathena svargāt gaṅgā ānītā।

tis

dyumat, dyutikar, dyutimat, dyotana, dyoti, dyotamāna, ujvala, kāntimat, kiraṇamaya, utprabha, ullasa, ullasita, prakāśavat, prakāśaka, prakāśamāna, prakāśat, prakāśin, citra, tejasvat, tejasvin, tejomaya, taijasa, añjimat, atiśukra, abhirucira, abhivirājita, abhiśobhita, abhīṣumat, amanda, avabhāsita, avabhāsin, ābhāsvara, ārocana, ābhāsura, iddha, utprabha, udīrṇadīdhiti, uddyota, uddyotita, kanakatālābha, kanakaprabha, kanala, kāśī, kāśīṣṇu, ketu, taijasa, dīdi, dīdivi, dīpta, dīptimat, dyotamāna, dhauta, punāna, prakhya, prabhāvat, bṛhajjyotis, bhāskara, bhāsura, bhāsvara, bhāsvat, bhāsayat, rukmābha, rucita, rucira, rucya, ruśat, roca, rocana, rocamāna, rociṣṇu, varcasvin, vidyotamāna, virukmat, vicakṣaṇa, virājamāna, śuklabhāsvara, śundhyu, śubhāna, śubhra, śubhri, śumbhamāna, śobha, śobhamāna, sutāra, suteja, sudīpta, sudyotman, supraketa, suprabha, suruk, suvibhāta, sphurat, hiraṇyanirṇij, hiraṇyanirṇig   

yasmin dīptiḥ asti athavā yasya varṇaḥ ābhāyuktaḥ asti।

prācyadeśāt āgatena tena dūtena tat dyumat ratnaṃ rājasabhāyāṃ rājñe samarpitam।

tis

pariśuṣ, pratisaṃveṣṭ, praviś   

ārdratākṣayānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

śaityena tvak pariśuṣyati।

tis

ādiś, anuśās, ājñāpay, cud, samādiś, sandiś, vyādiś, pratisandiś, abhicud   

kam api kasmin api kārye śabdena pravartanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

adhyayanoparāntam ācāryaḥ gṛhaṃ gaccha iti ādiśat।

tis

pratiyogitā, pratispardhā, spardhā   

keṣucana kāryādiṣu anyasmāt agre gamanasya prayatnaḥ।

adhunā kāryaśālāsu jātayā pratiyogitayā vīthyāṃ pratidine nūtanam uptādanaṃ dṛśyate।

tis

avasādanam, pratisāraṇam   

kṣate bheṣajayuktaṃ paṭṭabandhanam।

saḥ kṣate avasādanaṃ kārayituṃ rugṇālaye gataḥ।

tis

apagamaḥ, vigamaḥ, atisargaḥ   

apagamanasya kriyā।

apagamasya kāle netre aśrūṇi āgacchanti।

tis

atisāraḥ, viḍbhaṅgaḥ, varcobhedaḥ, śakṛdbhedaḥ   

bahudravamalasya niḥsaraṇarogaḥ।

atisāreṇa pīḍitaḥ puruṣaḥ vāraṃvāraṃ śaucārthe gacchati।

tis

nanāndā, nandinī, nandā, patisvasā   

bhartuḥ bhaginī।

subhadrā satyabhāmāyāḥ nanāndā āsīt।

tis

atisāraḥ, annagandhiḥ, atīsāraḥ, āmātisāraḥ, sāraṇaḥ, pravāhikā, grahaṇī, virekaḥ, āmaraktaḥ, udarāmayaḥ   

sodarapīḍayā bahudravamalaniḥsaraṇarogaḥ।

sā atisāreṇa pīḍitā।

tis

sādṛśyam, sajātitā, samānajātitā, bhāvasamatā, bhānasamānatā, jātisamatā   

tadbhinnatve sati tadgatabhūyodharmavattvam।

candrabhinnattve sati tadgatāhlādakattvādimattvaṃ mukhe candrasya sādṛś.m darśayati

tis

pratispardhī, pratiyogī   

yaḥ spardhāṃ karoti।

vāmanaḥ muṣṭiyoddhā pratispardhinam abhyabhavat।

tis

svīkṛ, aṅgīkṛ, urarīkṛ, saṃvijñā, samman, abhijñā, abhyupagam, abhyupe, pratigṝ, pratisaṃvad   

anyeṣāṃ matānām anumodanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

ahaṃ bhavatāṃ mataṃ svīkaromi।

tis

apanī, pratisāraya, apasāraya, niḥsāraya, niṣkāsaya   

kenāpi upāyena anyaṃ dūraṃ nirgamanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

bhāratīyāḥ vīrāḥ śatrūn apānayanta।

tis

atisāraḥ   

bahudravamalaniḥsaraṇarogaḥ।

cikitsakena atisārasya parīkṣaṇaṃ kṛtam।

tis

atisāraḥ, śakṛdbhedaḥ, varcobhedaḥ, viḍbhaṅgaḥ   

rogaviśeṣaḥ yasmin malaḥ atiśayena dravīkṛtya sarati।

saḥ vaidyāt atisārasya bheṣajam ānetuṃ gataḥ।

tis

pratidvandvī, pratispardhī   

yaḥ spardhate।

mallena pratidvandvī puruṣaḥ parājitaḥ।

tis

pratisthānam, sthāne sthāne, abhitaḥ, paritaḥ, sarvatra, sarvataḥ, mārgavartmasu, viṣvañc   

pratyekasmin sthāne।

rakṣārthaṃ sainikāḥ pratisthānaṃ tiṣṭhanti।

tis

mūrtipūjā, mūrtipūjanam, mūrtisevā, pratimāsevā   

mūrtau īśvarasya vidyamānatāṃ matvā tasyāḥ pūjanam।

kabīraḥ mūrtipūjāyāḥ virodhakaḥ āsīt।

tis

pratisaṃcaraḥ   

kenāpi kāraṇena kṛtaṃ nivāsasthānam।

eṣaḥ catuṣpathaḥ bhikṣūṇāṃ pratisaṃcaraḥ asti।

tis

pratisamādhā, vyāvṛt   

pūrvaṃ vartamānasya vastunaḥ sthāne anyasya vastunaḥ parivartanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

mandire mama pādatrāṇaṃ pratisamādhatte।

tis

viśodhaya, śodhaya, samādhā, pratisamādhā   

doṣapramārjanapūrvakaḥ utkarṣānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

sarvakāraḥ kṛṣisaṃsādhanān viśodhayati।

tis

pratisāraya, apasāraya, apanāyaya   

anyeṣāṃ dūraṃ nirgamanapreraṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

saḥ bālakaiḥ śunaḥ gṛhāt pratyasārayat।

tis

puṣpakabarī, śīrṣakam, śīrṣakamālā, avacūḍā, puṣpaveṇī, puṣpaśekharaḥ, pratisaraḥ, mālakā, mālikā, mālyadāman, rucakam, suratatālī, sraj, srak, srag, dāman, pīḍā   

puṣpāṇi rajjau grathitvā nirmitā mālā yā śirasi dhāryate।

stribhiḥ keśeṣu puṣpakabarī paridhāryate।

tis

raktātisāraḥ   

saḥ atisāraḥ yasmin malena saha raktaṃ sravati।

upekṣaṇena raktātisāraḥ ghātakaḥ bhavitum arhati।

tis

trayaḥ, tisraḥ, trīṇi, kālaḥ, agniḥ, bhuvanam, gaṅgāmārgaḥ, śivacakṣuḥ, guṇaḥ, grīvārekhā, kālidāsakāvyam, valiḥ, sandhyā, puram, puṣakaram, rāmaḥ, viṣṇuḥ, jvarapādaḥ   

ekaḥ adhikaḥ dvau iti kṛtvā prāptā saṃkhyā।

pañca iti saṅkhyātaḥ yadā dvau iti saṅkhyā nyūnīkṛtā tadā trayaḥ iti saṃṅkhyā prāptā।

tis

raktātisāraḥ   

raktayuktaḥ atisāraḥ।

raktātisāraḥ ghātakaḥ asti।

tis

ucchiṣ, avaśiṣ, avaśeṣaya, pariśeṣ, pariśeṣaya, śiṣ, śeṣaya, apaśiṣ, atiśiṣ, parihā, atisṛj, avahā   

pariśeṣānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

ahaṃ bhavatāṃ kṛte apūpasya khaṇḍam ucchinaṣmi।

tis

brātislāvānagaram, presabarganagaram   

slovākiyādeśasya rājadhānī।

brātislāvānagaraṃ slovākiyādeśasya mahiṣṭhaṃ nagaram।

tis

kiṅkiṇī, kṣudraghaṇṭikā, kaṅkaṇī, kiṅkiṇikā, kiṅkiṇiḥ, kiṅkiṇīkā, kaṅkaṇikā, kṣudraghaṇṭī, kṣudrikā, pratisarā, ghargharī   

sā mekhalā yasyāṃ laghavaḥ nūpurāḥ bhavanti।

śīlāyāḥ kaṭītaṭe kiṅkiṇī śobhate।

tis

carmmasandhānam, carmmapācakam, dūtisandhānam.   

carmakārasya kāryam।

saṃta raidāsamahābhāgāḥ carmasandhānam akurvan।

tis

javanikā, yavanikā, pratisīrā, chāyā, citrā, tiraskaraṇī, kaṭa   

citrādīnām yantreṇa prakṣepaṇārthe upayuktā javanikā;

asyām calacitraśālāyām laghu javanikā asti

tis

sthitisthāpakaviśiṣṭa, vetasaguṇaka   

yasmin sthitisthāpakāni ācitāni santi।

eṣaḥ talpaḥ sthitisthāpakaviśiṣṭaḥ asti।

tis

hā, tyaj, parityaj, santyaj, apahā, vihā, prahā, apāhā, utsṛj, visṛj, atisṛj, vyapasṛj, rah, virah, uñjh, proñjh, parihṛ, vṛj, parivṛj, vivraj   

ātmanaḥ samīpasthasya kasya api anāsañjanarūpaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

saḥ mām haṭṭe eva ajahāt।

tis

kāntimattā, atisundaratā, aticārutā, surūpatā, abhirāmatā, anavadyarūpatā   

saundaryasya atiśayatā।

muniḥ apsarasaḥ kāntimattāṃ dṛṣṭvā tapāt bhraṣṭaḥ।

tis

āgam, antargam, antarbhū, yā, antargaṇ, antaryā, gaṇ, vigaṇ, parigrah, parisamāp, pratisaṃhṛ   

kasya api kasmin api saṃhṛtyātmakaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

vārāṇasī uttarapradeśe āgacchati।

tis

vyāptiḥ, vyāptisambandhaḥ, avinābhāvaḥ, avinābhāvasambandhaḥ   

dvayoḥ vastunoḥ vartamānaḥ anivāryasambandhaḥ yaḥ kadāpi na bādhate athavā yasmin dve vastunī parasparābhyāṃ vinā na vartete।

dhūmāgnayoḥ vyāptiḥ asti।/vyāptiḥ sādhyavadanyasminnasambandha udāhṛtaḥ।(bhāṣāparicchedaḥ)

tis

pratiskandhaḥ   

kārtikeyasya anucaraḥ।

pratiskandhasya varṇanaṃ purāṇe prāpyate।

tis

ratisundaraḥ   

ratibandhaviśeṣaḥ।

ratisundarasya varṇanaṃ kāmaśāstre prāpyate।

tis

pratisaraṇam   

arthaśāstrānusāreṇa haṭṭasya sā sthitiḥ yasyāṃ janānāṃ krayaśakteḥ nyūnatāyāḥ kāraṇāt vastūnāṃ vikrayaṇaṃ mandāyate।

pratisaraṇena grāhakāḥ vikretāraḥ ca prabhāvitāḥ bhavanti।

tis

anuvartisārvajanikanirgamaḥ   

kenacit nigamena haṭṭe svasya bhāgaḥ pūrvaṃ san api punaḥ upalabhyante vā janaiḥ krīyate tādṛśī kriyā।

asmākam udyogasaṃsthāyāḥ anuvartisārvajanikanirgamaḥ adyāpi na prāptaḥ।

tis

pratisāraṇam   

vraṇādiṣu lepādīn lepitum ekaṃ sādhanam।

cikitsakaḥ vraṇe pratisāraṇena lepaṃ lepayati।

tis

vimatisamudghātī   

ekaḥ rājakumāraḥ ।

vimatisamudghātinaḥ ullekhaḥ kośe asti

tis

śaktisiṃhaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

śaktisiṃhasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

tis

śaktisenaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

śaktisenasya varṇanaṃ rājataraṅgiṇyām asti

tis

śāntisūktam   

ekaṃ sūktam ।

śāntisūktasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

tis

śāntisūriḥ   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

śāntisūreḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tis

śāntisomaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

śāntisomasya ullekhaḥ kathāsaritsāgare asti

tis

śuktisāhvayā   

ekaṃ nagaram ।

śuktisāhvayāyāḥ ullekhaḥ mahābhārate asti

tis

bṛhaspatisaṃhitā   

dvau kṛtiviśeṣau ।

prācīna-saṃskṛta-vāṅmaye bṛhaspatisaṃhitā nāma dvau kṛtiviśeṣau suvikhyāte

tis

bṛhaspatisaṃhitā   

dvau kṛtiviśeṣau ।

prācīna-saṃskṛta-vāṅmaye bṛhaspatisaṃhitā nāma dvau kṛtiviśeṣau suvikhyāte

tis

śrutisāraḥ   

dvayoḥ kṛtayoḥ nāma ।

śrutisārasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tis

tisṛkā   

ekaḥ grāmaḥ ।

tisṛkā pāṇinīnā parigaṇitā

tis

vṛttisaṅgrahaḥ   

pāṇinīyānām sūtrāṇām ekaḥ laghuḥ ṭīkāgranthaḥ ।

vṛttisaṅgrahasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tis

jayantisvāmī   

vedoccāraṇaviṣayakasya granthasya lekhakaḥ ।

jayantisvāminaḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tis

tismarahradaḥ   

ekaḥ saraḥ ।

jātismarahradasya ullekhaḥ mahābhārate asti

tis

tisṛkā   

ekaḥ grāmaḥ ।

tisṛkā pāṇininā parigaṇitā

Parse Time: 1.982s Search Word: tis Input Encoding: IAST: tis